KIP 9000 Service Manual Ver A_0

H i g h V o l u m e N e t w o r k P r i n t e r

S e r v i c e M a n u a l V e r s i o n A . 0

K115sm1e1.doc 1-1

Chapter 1

Introduction Page 1. 1 Features 1- 1 1. 2 Specifications 1- 2 1. 3 Appearance 1- 4 1. 3. 1 Front view 1- 4 1. 3. 2 Right side view 1- 5 1. 3. 3 Rear view 1- 6 1. 3. 4 Operation Panel 1- 8 1. 3. 5 Media Indicators 1-10 1. 3. 6 “in use” Indicators 1-11

K115sm1e1.doc 1-2

1. 1 Features (1) New Contact Development Technology with non-magnetic mono-component toner Superior image quality High definition line, distinctive greyscale and consistent solid black can be produced. 100% toner efficiency No waste toner is generated. Neither cleaning mechanism nor waste toner receptacle is needed. It is environmentally friendly and can reduce the running cost. (2) Superior printing productivity KIP9000’s fast print speed (240mm/sec) enables to process large volume of prints/copies (11 A0 or E minute). (3) Long parts life and low frequency of service maintenance Service parts are durable for very long use and self-cleaning functions of KIP9000 enables the operator to enjoy quality images for a long term without maintenance. (4) Pre-calibrated LED Head All LED pixels are individually calibrated for the best image quality. (5) Image Enhancement Technology Dependent on the image, the best level of Image Enhancement is automatically calculated. (6) Installation of roll media and Toner Cartridge while printing It is possible to install new roll media or add more toner without interrupting printing operation. (7) Long print The maximum print length guaranteed is 6 meters (19.7 ft)(with plain paper). The maximum possible length is 24 meters. (75ft) (Quality of print is not guaranteed.)

K115sm1e1.doc 1-3

1. 2 Specifications Subject Specification Model KIP 9000 Type Console Printing method LED Array Electro Photography Photoconductor Organic Photoconductive Drum Print speed 240mm / second (11 A0 or E /minute - 22D/minute) Exposure method LED Print Head Resolution 600dpi x 600dpi Print width Max : 914mm (36 inches)

Min : 297mm (11 inches) Print length Max : Plain paper 6m (19.7’) with A0 or 36” wide

Tracing paper A0 / 48 inch Film A0 / 48 inch NOTE : Longer print than the above specified maximum lengths is available. However, KIP does not guarantee any result including image quality and media feeding if the print is longer than the above specified lengths. Min 210mm (8.5”)

Warm up time Shorter than 6 minutes (At 23 degrees centigrade, 60% RH and 230V)

First print time Shorter than 12 seconds (A0 / E) Fusing method Heat roller fusing Development Contact type mono component non-magnetic development system

(One toner cartridge contains 500g.) Charging method Corona Media feeding method Automatic roll feeding (4 Roll Decks)

Manual bypass feeding NOTE : Multiple cut sheet feeding (50 sheets max) is available when the size is narrower than A2 (594mm) or 24”.

Transfer method Corona Separation method Corona and LED Input power 220 - 240V (+6% / -10%), 16A and 50/60Hz in U.S.A. and Europe Interface KIP Interface 8 (LVDS)

USB2.0 (5VDC max) RS-232C (12VDC max)

Maximum power consumption

When 230V, 50/60Hz and Dehumidify Heater is ON Stand by 0.9 Kwh Printing 3.0 Kwh Warm up 3.5 Kwh

Acoustic noise Less than 70db (Printing) NOTE : Impact noise is excluded. Less than 55db (Stand by)

Ozone Less than 0.05ppm (Average of 8 hours) Dimensions 1360mm (Width) x 980mm (Depth) x 1265mm (Height) (54x39x50) Weight About 400kg (880lbs) Media Specified media

Plain paper 18 - 24# 70 - 90g/m2 Tracing paper 18 - 24# 70 - 90g/m2 Film 100 micrometer (4mil) or thinner..

K115sm1e1.doc 1-4

Subject Specification Environmental condition

Temperature 10 - 32C (50 - 89F) Humidity 20 - 80% RH

Storage condition of consumables

Print media Keep the media surely in a plastic bag and close to shut out the humidity. Toner Keep the toner cartridge away from the direct sunlight, and store it in the condition of 0 - 35 oC and 10 - 85% RH.

NOTE These specifications may be changed without notice.

K115sm1e1.doc 1-5

1. 3 Appearance

1. 3. 1 Front view Power Switch Operation Panel User Interface Bypass Feeder Right Side Door Roll Decks Toner Cover Media Indicator “in use” Indicators

Name of part Function Power Switch Turns on/off the KIP9000. Bypass Feeder Cut sheet media can be set here and fed into.

Multiple cut sheet feeding (50 sheets max) is available when the size is narrower than A2 (594mm) or 24”.

Operation Panel Indicates the status of KIP 9000, error, mis-feed location and so on.

Roll Decks There are 4 Roll Decks (Drawers are 3 but Roll Spools are 4.). Each Roll Deck holds one roll of media. Roll Deck 1 : (Top drawer) Roll Deck 2 : (Middle drawer) Roll Deck 3 : (Front side of bottom drawer) Roll Deck 4 : (Rear side of bottom drawer)

Media Indicator Informs the size and the type of roll media loaded on each Roll Deck.

Toner Cover Can access to the Toner Supplying Mechanism and replace the Toner Cartridge.

Right Side Door Can access the internal of KIP9000 for removing the mis-fed media.

Use Interface Touch Screen offers many kinds of user operation. “in use” Indicators Shoes the Roll Deck that must not be opened.

K115sm1e1.doc 1-6

1. 3. 2 Right side view Toner Cartridge Fuser Handle Cutter Handle Counter A Counter B Internal Transportation Unit Lever

Name of part Function Cutter Handle Can cut the roll media manually if it has not been cut yet after it

was mis-fed. Counter A Counts the linear feet of total prints. Counter B Counts the square feet of total prints. Internal Transportation Unit Lever

Can unlock and open the Internal Transportation Unit for removing the mis-fed media.

Fuser Handle Can eject the mis-fed media manually from the Fuser Unit. Toner Cartridge Includes 500 grams of toner.

K115sm1e1.doc 1-7

1. 3. 3 Rear view Dehumidify Heater Switch Interface Connector for scanner Top Rear Cover Exit Cover Power Cord

Folder Port

USB Port

Shut Down Diag Port Power Outlet for controller

it

VGA Port Interface Connector for IPS

K115sm1e1.doc 1-8

Name of part Function Exit Cover Can remove the mis-fed media around Fuser section. Interface Connector for Controller Unit

Connects the cable from the controller unit. D-Sub Connector 36 pins, 3.3Vdc maximum (large)

Interface Connector for Scanner

Connects the cable from the image scanner. D-Sub Connector 36 pins, 3.3Vdc maximum (large)

Folder Port Not used in North America SHUT DOWN Port Connects the Shutdown Signal Cable.

KIP 9000 will send a shutdown signal to the controller through this cable. 12Vdc maximum

Diag Port Not used usually. (Service personnel may use to make field service.)

VGA Port Connect the cable here, which comes from the controller VGA port by UL-Listed cable for Touch screen LCD. 5Vdc maximum

USB Port Connect the cable here, which comes from the controller USB Key Connector Type B for Touch screen LCD. 5Vdc maximum

Top Rear Cover Can access the Dehumidify Heater Switch. Outlet for Controller Unit In case you place a controller unit outside of the KIP 9000, it is

possible to supply AC power from the KIP 9000 to the controller unit if you connect the power cord to this outlet. (220 - 240V, 3A maximum) Connected controller unit must meet UL Standard 60950-1 (UL-Listed) NOTE: Specification for Power Cord used in North America Use the following type of Power Cord for a controller unit. (1) Rating minimum 250VAC 7A (2) Plug Type IEC60320: C13 (3) Socket Type IEC60320: C14 (4) Cord H05VV-F 3G-0.75mm SVT3x18AWG (5) UL-Listed

Power Cord Connect to the wall outlet alone. Dehumidify Heater Switch

Turns on/off the Dehumidify Heater.

K115sm1e1.doc 1-9

1. 3. 4 Operation Panel Operation Panel on offers several user operations. Names and functions of key and indication LED are as follows. 1 2 3 4 5 8 12 15 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 16

No. Name of part Function 1 Ready Indicator Flashes green when KIP 9000 is warming up, and lights green

when it is ready. 2 Open Indicator Lights orange when any door or unit is open or unlocked. 3 Toner Empty

Indicator Flashes red when the toner is near empty. (Toner Cartridge has no Toner). Lights red when the toner is completely empty. (Developer Unit has no toner. No more print is available.)

4 Roll Empty Indicator Lights red if the roll media in use is empty. 5 Mis-feed Indicator Lights red when the print media is mis-fed. 6 WIRE-CLEAN Key Starts cleaning for the Image Corona Wire. 7 EXP-CLEAN Key Starts cleaning for the LED Head. 8 Roll Deck Indicator Shows the present selection of roll to perform initial cut. 9 SELECT Key Selects a roll to perform initial cut.

10 CUT Key Performs initial cut for the selected roll. 11 Mis-feed Location

Indicator Shows the location of mis-fed media by lighting the concerning LED.

12 Density Indicator Shows the present selection of density level. 13 COPY DENSITY

Key Changes the density level for making the print density darker or lighter.

14 MENU Key Key Key * Key ENTER Key

[MENU], [ ], [ ] and [ENTER] Keys are used in User Modes. (The service personnel may use them also in the field service.) [ * ] Key is used to stop the alarm sound.

15 Status Display Indicates kinds of information such as error codes, mis-feed codes, and etc.

16 ONLINE Key & Indicator

The ONLINE Indicator lights green when KIP9000 is online, and it is put out when offline. ONLINE Key switches between online and offline, and also cancels the User Mode.

COPY DENSITY MENU ENTER ONLINE

MF

D1

D2

D3

EXITPAPER DECK

1 2 3 4

SELECT CUTWIRE CLEAN EXP-CLEAN

D4

PF

K115sm1e1.doc 1-10

1. 3. 5 Media Indicators The Media Indicator on the right front of KIP9000 informs the size (width) and the type of roll media installed in each Roll Deck. Example 1 : Metric mode Example 2 : Inch mode Roll Deck 1 : A0 plain paper Roll Deck 1 : 36” vellum Roll Deck 2 : A1 tracing paper Roll Deck 2 : 30” plain paper Roll Deck 3 : A3 film Roll Deck 3 : 24” film Roll Deck 4 : A4 plain paper Roll Deck 4 : 12” plain paper

plain papervellum / tracingfilm

1


2


3


4


1


2


3


4


1


2


3


4

K115sm1e1.doc 1-11

1. 3. 6 “in use” Indicators 3 “in use” Indicators on the right front of KIP9000 are related with 3 drawers respectively, and inform the operator which drawer must not be opened during printing. One or two “in use” Indicator light orange when the KIP 9000 is on printing. Do not open the drawer if the concerning “in use” Indicator is lighting orange. The drawer can be opened even if the KIP9000 is on printing if the concerning “in use” Indicator is not lighting. Example : Top and middle drawer can not be opened as the “in use” Indicators for them are lighting orange. Only the bottom drawer can be opened as its “in use” Indicator is not lighting.

1

43

2

in use

1

43

2

in use

in use

in use

K115sm1e1.doc 1-12

Even if the KIP9000 is printing, it is possible to open the drawer and replace/install the roll media without interrupting the print operation. However, it is not necessarily allowed to open any drawer at any time. A certain drawer can not be opened in the following situations. 1. When the roll media is fed from a certain drawer, this drawer can not be opened. 2. When the media (including cut sheet media) fed from other drawer is passing through the media path in a certain drawer, this drawer can not be opened. See the following section diagram. Media feeding paths from each Roll Deck is integrated into one path in the middle drawer. When the KIP 9000 is printing with the roll media fed from the Roll Deck 1 for example, only the bottom drawer can be opened. (“in use” Indicators for top and middle drawers will light orange in this case.)

D4

in use

in use

in use

Top Drawer is not allowed to open.

Middle Drawer is not allowed to open.

Bottom Drawer is allowed to open.

Roll Deck 1

Roll Deck 2

Roll Deck 3

Roll Deck 4

Reference

2-1

Chapter 2

Installation

Page 2.1 Installation Requirements 2-2 2.2 Unpacking 2-3 2. 2. 1 Unpacking 2-3 2. 2. 2 Confirm accessories 2-4 2.3 Level the KIP9000 2-11 2.4 Removal of Tape, Screws and Shock Absorbers 2-12 2.5 Setting up the Process Unit (LED Head, Developer & Drum) 2-14 2.6 Installing the Monitor 2-31 2.7 Installing the Controller 2-50 2.8 Installing the Toner Cartridge 2-48 2.9 Loading Media into the Roll Decks 2-50 2. 9. 1 Roll 1, 2 and 3 2-50 2. 9. 2 Roll 4 2-55 2.10 Installing the Cut Sheet Tray 2-57 2.11 Turning on the KIP9000 2-58 2.12 Supplying Toner into Developer Unit 2-59

KIP9000 had passed the strict inspection after careful adjustment in the factory, and then it was packaged and shipped. Installation is an important work to reproduce the same machine performance at customer site. Service personnel have to understand all the detail about KIP9000 before installation. Install the machine in a good environmental place in a correct way, and confirm that it operates correctly.

2-2

2.1 Installation Requirements The following conditions are required for installation of the equipment. (1) Power source should be as follows (according to your region). U.S.A. / Europe 220 - 240V (+6% / -10%), 16A, 50/60Hz (2) The equipment must be on a dedicated circuit. The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible. (3) Connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet. (4) The site temperature range 10 - 32C (or 50 - 89 F) with the humidity between 20% - 80% (NON CONDENSING). Keep the equipment away from water sources, boilers, humidifiers or refrigerators. (5) The installation site must not have open flames, dust or ammonia gases. (6) The equipment should not be exposed to the direct sunlight. Please draw curtains to block any sunlight. (7) Ozone will be generated while this equipment is in use, although the quantity generated is within safe levels. (see certifications) Ventilate the room, if required. (8) Levelling Bolts on the bottom of the KIP 9000 should touch the floor securely.

And the equipment must be levelled. Floor strength must be ample to sustain the weight of the system.

(9) Keep ample room around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation. Required space is noted.

195cm (77 inch) or wider




Rear

Front

2-3

2.2 Unpacking

2. 2. 1 Unpacking 1. Remove the top crate and 4 side crates. 2. Remove the wrapping film and the protection paper from KIP9000. Confirm that the product includes the following items. A : Drum Package E : Setup Procedure and User’s Manual B : LED Head Package F : Setup Toner Bottle (Inside of the Right Side Door) C : Manual Tray G : Monitor parts (inside lower deck) D : Drum Stand and 36”x5” paper H : Controller case (packed on back) 3. Lift up the KIP9000 using a folk lift, with the forks set to the widest possible position to fit into the inner skid, and place the KIP9000 directly onto the floor. 4. Remove the plastic. 5. Remove the wrapping film.

CAUTION When the printer is to be installed in winter condensation may occur! The printer will be very cold if it has been kept in a warehouse or delivered by truck. If a cold machine is unpacked on the customer site right after it’s delivery, condensation will occur and cause issues. In such cases, leave the KIP9000 at the installation site for at least 6 hours without removing its package. Only if the printer is warmed to room temperature, then start the installation. Be careful not to be harmed during installation as it is heavier than 400Kg. (880 lbs) NOTE Toner and media are not included in the package. Please purchase them separately.

D

A B C

D

E

FG

H

2-4

2. 2. 2 Confirm accessories Confirm the system includes the following items.

Description Picture / Notes Quantity Drum (Inside of the black box)

1

LED Head 1

LED Cleaning Pad 1

Monitor 1

2-5

Item name Picture Number

of article Monitor Arm 1

M4x10 Flush Head Screw 3

Monitor Panel BKT 1

M4x6 Tooth Washer Screw

• 1 for securing the ground strap of Panel BKT

• 2 for securing the

Cover 3

3

2-6


of article M4x8 Tooth Washer Screw 4

Monitor Cover 2 1

Monitor Cover 3 1

M4x10 Tooth Washer Screw

4

2-7


of article PC Bracket 1

Cover 21 1

Cut Sheet Feeder Tray 1

36”x5” paper 1

2-8


of article Drum Stand 1

Setup Toner Bottle (200g) 1

Drum Cleaning Blade

1

Drum Shading Sheet 1

2-9


of article Service Label 1

IPS (PC) KIP IPS Computer in a separate box

with VGA cable and Power cable

1

Serial Cable 1

IF Cable 1

2-10


of article USB Cable 1

VGA Cable With IPS

1

Power Supply Lead With IPS

1

2-11

2.3 Level the KIP9000 KIP9000 needs to be levelled with a water level. If it is not levelled, it may cause creasing or a poor image. Put the water level on the following 3 locations on the KIP9000 to level the printer. Turn the 4 Height Adjusters (1) on the bottom.

Height Adjuster 1 1

2-12

2.4 Removal of Tape, Screws and Shock Absorbers Remove the tape, screws and shock absorbers which secure some movable items. They prevent parts from being damaged during transportation. 1. Remove 2 screws with the tag (1) on the bottom of the Fuser. These screws are no longer used.

2. Open each Roll Deck (2) and remove the tape (3) and the shock absorber (4).

NOTE The above 2 screws removes pressure during delivery to avoid damage. As the Pressure Roller needs to give proper tension to the Fuser Roller during normal operation, do not forget to remove these screws at installation. If not removed, the toner will not be fused.

1

3 4

2

2-13

3. Open the Toner Cover (5) and remove the tape (6) securing the Toner Cartridge Cover. 4. Open the Right Side Door (7), and remove the tapes (8) and the shock absorber with tag (9). 5. Open the Top Rear Cover (10) and remove the shock absorber with tag (11) on the right. 6. Remove the shock absorber (12) protecting the monitor cables.

5 6

7

8 9

10 11

12

2-14

2.5 Setting up the Process Unit (LED Head, Developer & Drum) 1. Open the Right Side Door (1). 2. Twist the Lock Lever (2) counter-clockwise to unlock the Internal Transportation Unit, bring down the Internal Transportation Unit (3), and hold its shaft with the Hook (4). 2.a Unplug the connector on the side of process frame

1

2 3

4

2-15

3. Remove 2 M4x10 screws (5). Also remove 4 M4x14 screws (6) in gray sponges. 4. Hold the Handles (7) firmly and draw out the Process Unit (8).

NOTE Gray sponges hold the M4x14 screws (6) and prevent them from dropping out.

Machine side

Sponge

M4x14

6

5

7 8

2-16

5. Open the Top Rear Cover (9), disconnect the connector (10) on the left, remove 4 tooth washer screws (11), and remove the Top Center Cover (12). 6. Open the packaging box of LED Head, and carefully remove the wrapped LED Head (13) and small box (14). Remove the wrapping from the LED Head, and remove the Cleaning Pad from the small box. 7. Loosen the screw (15) on the LED Head Unit, and install the Cleaning Pad (16) with this screw.

9 10

11 11 12

14 13

16

15

16

2-17

8. Remove the protection box (17) on one side of the LED Head Unit, which is protecting the Wire Cleaning Motor. 9. Insert 2 positioning bars (18) on motor side of LED Head Unit into the positioning slits (19) on the left side of the KIP9000.

NOTE Be careful not to bend or break 3 pieces of Ground Plates (20). They must be simply placed on the upper face of LED Head Unit.

17

18

20

19

2-18

10. Fit the positioning pin (21) on another side of LED Head to the notch (22) on the right of KIP9000. Install the 2 M4x10 screws (5) removed at the former procedure 3 BUT DO NOT TIGHTEN AT THIS TIME.

CAUTION It is necessary to have a correct gap (focus distance) between LED Head and Drum by a later procedure, and the LED Head Unit must be easily moved up and down at that time. Therefore do not tighten the M4x10 screws (5) at this time. (If tightened, the positioning bars of LED Head Unit will be bent.)

21

22

5

2-19

11. Connect 3 connectors (23) to LED Head and 1 connector (24) of Cleaning Motor. 12. Confirm that the right side of LED Head can be easily moved up and down by hand, then push the Process Unit (8) into the machine fully. (See NOTE on the next page before closing the Process Unit.) The positioning bars (25) on the right of LED Head Unit will fit into the positioning slits (26) when Process Unit is closed, and a proper gap (focus distance) can be kept between LED Head and Drum this time.

24 23

8

26

25

2-20

NOTE Make sure to close the Process Unit with the M4x10 screws loosed! The positioning bars (25) of the LED Head will fit into the positioning slits (26) when the Process Unit is closed. The positioning bars (25) are curved up so that they can fit into the positioning slits (26) vary smoothly. When the bars fit into the slits, the whole LED Head Unit is moved up and a correct gap (focus distance) can be kept between LED Head and Drum. If the Process Unit is closed when M4x10 screws are tightened, the LED Head can not move up. This state can not have a proper gap (focus distance) between LED Head and Drum, and will bend the positioning bars (25) .

Drum

LED Head

Bar

Slit

Bar is bent.

Proper gap

Gap is not proper

Tightened

LED Head can not move

2-21

13. Secure the Process Unit tightening 4 M4x14 screws (6). After that, tighten 2 M4x10 screws (5) to secure the LED Head Unit with keeping a proper focus distance. 14. Return the Top Center Cover (12), and close the Top Rear Cover (9). 15. Remove 4 M4x10 screws (6), and draw out the Process Unit (8) again.

NOTE Process Unit needs to be fixed before LED Head Unit to have correct focus distance. Do not change the order.

6

5

9

12

6

8

2-22

16. Disconnect the connector (27) of the Wire Cleaning Motor, remove 2 screws (28) at both sides, and remove the Image Corona (29). 17. Remove the tapes (30) and protection paper (31) on the Developer Unit.

NOTE The Developer Roller is purposely covered with the toner for smooth rotation. Do not remove it when removing the protection paper.

27

28

29

31

30

2-23

18. Remove the screw with tag (32) on the right of Developer Unit. Also remove the screw with tag (33) on the left. (These screws are no longer used.) 19. Remove 3 screws (34), and remove the Toner Hopper Cover (35). (Section drawing of Developer & Toner Hopper)

33

32

34

35

35

Hopper

NOTE The screw (32) is not reused. ( this differs from the KIP 8000 )

2-24

20. Put the 36”x5” paper (36) under the Sender Screw of Toner Hopper to close the toner supplying holes on the bottom of Toner Hopper. (Shift the 36”x5” paper (36) to the left side as far as possible.) 21. Shake the Setup Toner Bottle (37) to loosen the toner. (Setup Toner Bottle includes 200g of toner.) 22. Supply the Setup Toner into the Toner Hopper so that an even level of toner can be kept across the hopper. (The Sender Screw should be covered evenly)

Toner Sender Screw

36

This is an accessory of KIP9000.

36

36 36

Sender Screw

37

2-25

23. Carefully remove the 36”x5” paper (36). 24. Return the Toner Hopper Cover (35) and secure it with 3 screws (34). 25. Remove the tapes on both sides of Cleaning Roller (38). Loosen the tooth washer screw (39) and hexagon head screw (40), and remove the Bracket (41) on the right.

36

34

35

38

39

40

41

2-26

26. Remove the Cleaning Roller (38) from its operating position, and put it on its “temporary position” by fitting both bearings to the notches (42) on both sides as shown in below. (Left side) (Right side)

NOTE Do not close the Process Unit with the Cleaning Roller placed on the “temporary position”. The surface of Cleaning Roller will be damaged. Confirm the Cleaning Roller is returned to its operating position, then close the Process Unit.

38

42

38

42

2-27

27. Remove the Drum (43) from the box, fit both Drum Bearings (44) into the Drum Guides (45) on both sides of Process Unit with placing the Drum Gear (46) on the left, and carefully bring down the Drum along with the Drum Guides.

NOTE The Drum Shaft inside of KIP9000 has 2 Driving Pins (47), and the Drum Bearing on Drum Gear side has 2 Projections (48). Driving Pins (47) hold the Projections (48) when the Drum Shaft rotates, so the Drum is rotated. If the Process Unit is closed when both Driving Pins (47) and Projections (48) are at the same position, the Driving Pins (47) will be bent or broken as the projections (48) will hit them. The Dents (49) on the Drum Shaft show the position of Driving Pins (47) on another side, and the Marking Lines (50) on outside of Drum Bearing show the position of internal Projections (48). Rotate the Drum by hand so that the Dents (49) and Marking Lines (50) do not overlap with each other (cross position), then close the Process Unit. This will prevent the Driving Gears (47) from being bent.

44

43 45

46

47 48

47

49

50

2-28

28. Return the Cleaning Roller (38) to its correct position, and secure it with Bracket (41), tooth washer screw (39) and hexagon head screw (40).

NOTE (1) Tighten the tooth washer screw (39) and hexagon head screw (40) when pressing down the Bracket (41). (2) Tighten the hexagon head screw (40) with a wrench. Do not use a screwdriver as the Drum may be scratched. (3) Confirm that the Electrode Plate (51) inside of Bracket (41) is surely contacted to the Cleaning Roller shaft. Cleaning Roller shaft

38

39

40

41

41

51

51

2-29

29. Return the Image Corona (29) to the Process Unit and secure it with 2 screws (28). Connect the connector (27) of the Wire Cleaning Motor. 30. Close the Process Unit (8), and secure it with 4 M4x14 screws (6). 31. Release the shaft of Lock Lever from the Hook (4), bring up the Inner Transportation Unit (3) gently, and lock it firmly with the Lock Lever (2).

27

28

29

28

6

2 3

4

2-30

32 Plug in the connector on the side of process frame

33. Close the Right Side Door (1).

1

2-31

2.6 Installing the Monitor 1. Open the Top Rear Cover (1). 2. Disconnect the connector (2) on the left, and remove 4 screws (3). 3. Remove the Top Center Cover (4). 4. Remove 6 screws (5), and remove the Top Front Cover (6).

1

2

3 3

4

5

5

6

2-32

5. Open the Toner Cover (7) and the Toner Cartridge Cover (8). 6. Remove 2 screws (9), and loosen 1 screw (10). 7. Remove the Cover (11) on the right.

7 8

NOTE The screw (10) needs to be loosened as it will interfere with Cover in the next step.

9

10

11

2-33

8. Remove the Top Right Cover (12). 9. Insert the 3 monitor cables (13) into the Arm (14).

12

13

14

14

NOTE 3 monitor cables (13) are as follows.

• VGA Cable • USB Cable • Power Cable

2-34

10. Install the Arm (14) to machine frame with 3 M4x10 flash head screws (15). 11. Return the Top Right Cover (12).

NOTE Place 2 cut-edges (16) on the front.

15

14

15

15

16

16

12

2-35

12. Secure the ground strap (17) of Panel BKT Assy to the screw hole (18) on the Arm with 1 piece of M4x6 Tooth Washer Screw (19).

17 19

17

18

2-36

13. Secure the Panel BKT Assy (20) to the Arm (14) with 4 M4x8 Tooth Washer Screws (21).

14

20

21

20

21

2-37

14. Put 3 monitor cables (13) inside of Cover 3 Assy (22).

13

22

22

2-38

15. Insert the monitor cables into the square hole (23) of Cover 2 Assy (24) as the arrow shows, and secure the Cover 3 Assy (22) onto Cover 2 Assy (24) with 2 pieces of M4x6 Tooth Washer Screw (19).

24

22

19 24

19

23

2-39

16. Connect each VGA Cable (25), Power Cable (26) and USB Cable to its own terminal on the Monitor Assy (27).

27

26 25

27

VGA Power USB

2-40

17. Secure both Monitor Assy (27) and Cover 2 Assy (24) together with 4 M4x10 Tooth Washer Screws (28).

24

28

27

27 24

28 28

2-41

18. Adjust the vertical angle of monitor, and tighten the screw (29). 19. Adjust the horizontal angle of monitor, and tighten the screw (30).

29

30

2-42

20. Return the Cover (11). 21. Close the Toner Cartridge Cover (8) and the Toner Cover (7). 22. Return both Top Front Cover (6) and Top Center Cover (4).

11

7 8

4

6

2-43

2.7 Installing the Controller 1. Loosen 2 screws (1) and 2 screws (2) 2. Hang the PC Frame (3) to 2 screws (1), and tighten the screws (1).

1

3

1

3

2

2-44

3. Put the Controller Unit (4) on the PC Frame. Connect the necessary cables.

Please see the following two pictures for cable connections on the printer and IPS

NOTE VGA Cable IF Cable IPS Power Shut Down Cable USB Cable (Serial Cable)

4

2-45

NOTE IPS Power LAN Cable IF Cable

VGA Cable Shut Down Cable USB Cable (Serial Cable) (any one)

2-46

4. Hang the Cover 21 Assy (5) to 2 screws (2) while holding the cables with the wire saddles. Tighten the screws (2) to secure the Cover 21 (5).

5

5

2

NOTE Place the Power Cord of Controller Unit with the right wire saddle (6), and the other cables with left sire saddle (7). Do not place the Power Cord with other cables.

6 7

2-47

5. The power switch on the IPS should only be turned on after confirming that the IPS power

supply voltage slider is set to “230”. The power outlet on the KIP 9000 is 220 - 240 VAC or the same as the wall voltage.

2-48

2.8 Installing the Toner Cartridge 1. Open the Toner Cover (1), and open the Toner Cartridge Cover (2). 2. Shake the new Toner Cartridge (3) fully to loosen the toner. 3. Install the Toner Cartridge (3) with its green seal (4) up.

NOTE The product does not include the Toner Cartridge. Purchase it separately. Use only KIP 9000 Toner

2

1

3

3

4

2-49

4. Rotate the Toner Cartridge quarter revolution. Strip off the green seal (4). 5. Rotate the cartridge quarter revolution more to place the toner supplying hole on the bottom. 6. Close the Cartridge Cover (2) and Toner Cover (1).

NOTE Be sure to place the toner supplying bole on the bottom. Otherwise the KIP9000 will show Toner Empty Error.

4

2 1

2-50

2.9 Loading the Media into the Roll Decks

2. 9. 1 Roll deck 1, 2 and 3 1. Open the concerning Roll Deck (1). 2. Retrieve the Roll Spool (2) to the arrow direction for 1 revolution to disengage the gears on the left, and remove it from the deck.

NOTE If the Roll Spool is removed without disengaging the gears (3) on the left, these gears will be broken.

NOTE The product does not include the media. Please purchase it separately.

2

1

3

2

2-51

3. Pressing down the green lever (4), insert the Roll Spool to the new roll media. 4. Align the edge of roll media with the concerning size guide (5), then release the green lever. The roll media is firmly fixed to the Roll Spool.

NOTE Do not install the roll media with wrong direction. Correct Wrong

4

5

2-52

5. Return the Roll Spool to the Roll Deck.

NOTE The driving belt (6) inside of the Roll Deck must be flat and evenly contact on the bottom of black small roller (7) on the right of Roll Spool. If it is twisted or not contacting the black small roller properly, correctly it. Correct Wrong (Belt is twisted.)

6

7

6

7

2-53

6. Using the slit (8) on each drawer, cut off the leading part of roll media with a cutter knife to straighten the leading edge. DO NOT FEED ANY TAPE OR ADHESIVE INTO THE MACHINE AS IT MAY STICK TO THE DRUM. It is best to trim at least one revolution from the roll to prevent this. Please advise the users 7. Insert the leading edge of media between feeding rollers (9), and rotate the upper feeding roller to pinch the leading edge (1-2cm) with the rollers.

NOTE The Roll Deck 3 only has a positioning hole (10). (Other Rolls do not have it.) Feed the roll media until its leading edge comes to appear in the hole, and place the leading edge at the center of the hole.

8

9

10

2-54

8. Set the Media Selector (11) correctly according to the type of media installed. If any inch size media is installed, select either “ENGINEERING” or “ARCHITECTURE” as well. (“ENGINEERING” is selected when the button is up, and “ARCHITECTURE” when it is down.) 9. Close the Roll Deck (1).

NOTE Set the Media Selector to correct media type. (Including Architecture/Engineering selection) Wrong setting of Media Selector could cause unexpected printing results.

11

1

2-55

2. 9. 2 Roll deck 4 The method of installation to Roll 4 is a little different from the method for the other Rolls because of the different location of Roll 4’s feeding rollers. This section instructs the operation required for Roll 4. Refer to [10.1 Roll 1, 2 & 3] on page 2-55 for the common operations. 1. Open the bottom Roll Deck (1). 2. Remove the Roll Spool from the Roll Deck, pull out the Roll Spool from the old roll media, and set the new roll media onto the Roll Spool.

NOTE Please keep the correct direction as the following left photo. (It is the same way you make for Roll 1, 2 & 3.) Correct Wrong

1

2-56

3. Return the Roll Spool to the Roll Deck 4. 4. Insert the leading edge of media under the feeding roller (2). 5. Rotate the green knob (3) clockwise to pinch the leading edge (about 1-2cm) with the feeding rollers. 6. Close the Roll Deck 4 (1).

2

3

1

2-57

2.10 Installing the Cut Sheet Feeder Tray Install the Tray (1) to the setting holes (2) on the front face.

2

1

43

EX P-CLEAN

WI RE-CLEAN

D1

MF

D2

D3

D4

EXIT

PF

CO PY DENSITY

M ENU

ENTER

RE SE T

→

←

*

PAPER DEC K

CUT

SELECT

12 3

4

1

2

1

2-58

2.11 Turning on the KIP9000 1. Plug the printer to a dedicated wall outlet. 2. Press “|” side of Power Switch to turn on the KIP 9000. 3. KIP 9000 starts warming up the Fuser, and the Ready Indicator on the Operation Panel starts flashing. Ready Indicator flashes. 4. The Ready Indicator lights when the KIP9000 is ready in about 6 minutes.

NOTE The outlet must satisfy the following power condition. U.S.A. / Europe 220 to 240V (+6% to -10%), 16A, 50/60Hz


MF

D1

D2

D3

EXITPAPER DECK

1 2 3 4


D4

PF

2-59

2.12 Supplying the Toner into Developer Unit 1. Press and hold the [ * ] key on the Operation Panel, and press switches in the order as [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] to enter the Service Mode. 2. The [MENU] key lights green and the Status Display indicates present Firmware version when entering the Service Mode. Firmware version 3. Select the Special Operation Mode indicating the Sub Mode Number “9” on the 1st digit from the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key. Sub Mode Number of Special Operation Mode 4. Select the Toner Supplying Mode indicates the Item Number “09” pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Item Number of “Toner Supplying”

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2-60

4. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start supplying the toner. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during toner supply. “8 8” flashes during toner supply. 5. When the printer detects “toner full”, it stops toner supplying automatically. “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE It is unable to start supplying the toner even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing on the 5th and 6th digits.

K115sm3e1.doc 3-1

Chapter 3

Print Process Page 3. 1 Characteristic of Toner 3- 2 3. 2 Print Processes 3- 3 3. 2. 1 Erasing 3- 5 3. 2. 2 Drum Cleaning 3- 6 3. 2. 3 Charge of Drum 3- 7 3. 2. 4 Exposure 3- 8 3. 2. 5 Development 3- 9 3. 2. 6 Pre-transfer LED 3-11 3. 2. 7 Transfer 3-12 3. 2. 8 Separation 3-13 3. 2. 9 Fusing 3-14 3. 3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit 3-15 3. 4 Toner Collection Process 3-18 3. 5 Automatic Controls 3-21 3. 5. 1 Auto Density Control 3-21 3. 5. 1. 1 Density Lock 3-22 3. 5. 1. 2 Auto Density Control 3-23 3. 5. 2 Auto SP Control 3-24

K115sm3e1.doc 3-2

3. 1 Characteristic of Toner The toner used on KIP9000 has a characteristic to be charged “negative” (like a negative object), which tends to be attracted to a relatively “positive” object. Suppose that there are objects A and B, and the situation is as follows. 1. Electric potential of the object B is higher than that of object A. 2. Toner exists on the object A. Comparing the potential of both objects, it can be said that the object B is relatively “positive” and the object A is “negative”. (In another word, object B is more “positive” than the object A.) As the toner is “negative”, it is attracted to the object B which is more “positive”. If the object B is moved close to the object A, the toner moves onto the object B. Object A with low potential (Relatively negative) Toner moves from A to B. Object B with high potential (Relatively positive) On the contrary, suppose that the toner exists on the object B of which electric potential is higher than the object A. Even if the object A is moved close to the object B, the toner continues to stay on the object B because negative toner and relatively negative object A repel each other. Object A with low potential (Relatively negative) Toner stays on B. Object B with high potential (Relatively positive) Thus, the toner has a characteristic to move from one place with a lower potential to another place with a higher potential. By controlling the electric potentials properly, it is possible to move the toner from one place to another as intended, or it is also possible to remove the toner from unwanted place. The movement of toner is controlled correctly thus and several processes as Development, Toner Transfer, Drum Cleaning and etc. are performed.

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

K115sm3e1.doc 3-3

3. 2 Print Processes One print cycle consists of 9 processes. 1. Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges) 2. Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner) 3. Charge of Drum 4. Exposure 5. Development 6. Pre-transfer LED 7. Transfer 8. Separation 9. Fusing

Image Corona

Grid Plate LED Head

Cleaning Roller

Eraser Lamp

Regulation Roller

Toner Supply Roller

Developer Roller Pre-transfer LED

Transfer Corona

Separation Lamp

Separation Corona

Pressure Roller

Fuser Roller

SPS

Drum

Density Sensor

K115sm3e1.doc 3-4

Processes from 1 to 8 are related with the control of electric potentials. The following graphic shows the potential on each process and the movement of toner. Voltage of Cleaning Roller Voltage of Transfer Corona Voltage of Developer Roller Potential on Drum surface SP1 : For black image SP2 : For white image

Name of part Voltage (Current) during Print Cycle Voltage during Toner Collection Process

Image Corona Wire About -5.8KV (-2.0mA +/-0.05mA) - Grid Plate -XV +/-20V

(It varies following the machine temperature.) -

Developer Roller -YV +/-3V (It varies following the detection by Density Sensor.)

+350V +/-3V

Regulation Roller (Center)

-100V +/-3V from the voltage of Developer Roller -100V +/-3V from the voltage of Developer Roller

Regulation Roller (Both sides)

+365V +/-3V from the voltage of Developer Roller +365V +/-5V from the voltage of Developer Roller

Toner Supply Roller -350V +/-3V from the voltage of Developer Roller -350V +/-3V from the voltage of Developer Roller

Transfer Corona +520V +/-30V (When the Insulated Drum is used.)

-

Separation Corona AC (11KVp-p) + DC (-250V +/-3V : Plain paper) (-300V +/-3V : Tracing paper) (-10V +/-3V : Film)

-

Cleaning Roller +800V +/-3V -500V +/-3V

0V

-100V

-200V

-300V

-400V

-500V

-600V

-700V

-800V

+400V

+300V

+200V

+100V

+500V

-900V

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

81

+600V

SP1

SP2

+700V

+800V

When printing is going to finish or when the used Roll Deck is changed with other one, “Toner Collection Process” is performed to take back the remained toner into the Developer Unit. Refer to [3.4 Toner Collection Process] on the page 3-18 for the detail.

Reference

K115sm3e1.doc 3-5

3. 2. 1 Erasing As the first step of print cycle, the negative electric charges on the Drum are removed by Erasing process, which remained there after the former print cycle. The Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges when exposed to the light. So the Drum is rotated and evenly exposed to the light from the Eraser Lamp. The electric potential on the Drum becomes 0V as a result of this process.

Eraser Lamp

Drum

Negative electric charges

0V

0V

0V

K115sm3e1.doc 3-6

3. 2. 2 Drum Cleaning Small amount of toner is remaining on the Drum as it was not transferred onto the printing media in the former print cycle. Drum Cleaning is a process to remove such toner from the Drum with the Cleaning Roller. The Cleaning Roller is supplied with +800V (+/-3V) in the print process, and the potential of Drum is 0V at this time as the Eraser Lamp removed the negative electric charges in the former “Erasing” process. As the Cleaning Roller is relatively “positive” against the Drum potential, the toner moves from Drum to Cleaning Roller.

Cleaning Roller

Drum Remained toner

NOTE The Cleaning Roller may not be able to remove all the toner completely from the Drum if a mass of toner is remaining on a small area of Drum (like a trace of solid black image). Such toner not removed completely by Drum Cleaning will be removed from the Drum in later Development Process.

0V

0V

0V +800V

K115sm3e1.doc 3-7

3. 2. 3 Charge of Drum The Image Corona takes negative discharging, and the Drum surface is charged negatively with -XV evenly by this process. The Drum surface charged with -XV corresponds to the white area of the printed image pattern. The value of surface potential “-XV” is not constant. The Auto SP Control automatically changes the surface potential to the most appropriate level according to the information from Surface Potential Sensor and Temperature Sensor. (Refer to [3.4.2 Auto SP Control] on page 3-26 for more detail.)

Image Corona

Drum 0V

-XV

0V

-820V

K115sm3e1.doc 3-8

3. 2. 4 Exposure According to the printed image pattern, the LED Head throws light onto a certain area of the Drum that corresponds to the black area of printed image pattern. As the Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges when exposed to the light, the potential of this exposed area is increased to about -50V. The other part of Drum surface not exposed to the LED light keeps about -XV of Surface Potential which has been given by the Image Corona. An invisible electric image pattern that consists of about -XV area and about -50V area is formed on the surface of Drum as a result. (This is called “Electrostatic Latent Image”.) (Distribution of electric potentials after the Exposure)

LED Head

Drum

(1) The LED Head illuminates with 8 different light-on time. These 8 light-on times are called IE (Image Enhancement) Levels. Each singular pixel included in the print image is exposed with any of these 8 IE Levels according to its “visual appeal power”. That means the strength of illumination from the LED is not constant but varies flexibly. See [REFERENCE] on page 8-81 for the description of IE Level. (2) The light from LED Head will not be blocked even if there remains the toner on the Drum as the diameter of toner is much smaller than that of 1 pixel of LED. It is unnecessary to worry about the effect on the printed image.

Reference

Image Corona

0V

-XV

0V

-XV

-50V -50V

-XV -50V

K115sm3e1.doc 3-9

3. 2. 5 Development The Developer Roller is evenly covered with the toner, and it is contacted to the Drum firmly. (The width of contacting area is about 5mm.) The Developer Roller is supplied with -YV of Developer Bias which is flexibly adjusted by the Auto Density Control. On the other hand, an Electrostatic Latent Image consisting of -XV area and -YV area exists on the Drum. The relationship among -XV, -YV and the exposed part of the Drum (about -50V) are as follows. -XV (White image area of Drum) < -YV (Developer Bias) < -50V (Black image area of Drum) Seen from the voltage of Developer Roller Bias (-YV), the -50V area on the Drum that was exposed to the light from the LED is relatively “positive”, so the toner moves from the Developer Roller to the -50V area of Drum. On the other hand, the -XV area is relatively “negative” seen from the Developer Roller, so the toner does not move to the -XV area but stays on the Developer Roller. A visible toner image is formed on the Drum as a result. The value of Developer Bias “-YV” is not constant. The Auto Density Control automatically changes the Developer Bias to the most appropriate level according to the information from the Density Sensor. (Refer to [3.4.1 Auto Density Control] on page 3-23 for more detail.) Developer Roller Density Sensor Before Development After Development (Toner moves only to -50V area) (Invisible Electrostatic Latent Image) (Visible toner image)

Drum Drum

Developer Roller -XV

-50V

-YV

-XV -50V

K115sm3e1.doc 3-10

Very small amount of toner may be remaining on “white image area” (corresponds to -XV area) of Drum if Drum Cleaning process could not remove the toner completely. Such unnecessary toner in white image area can be removed surely by the Developer Roller because of the relationship of potential between Drum and Developer Roller. -XV [Drum] < -YV [Developer Roller] So there is no possibility that such unnecessary toner will appear on the print as a black spot. (Toner removed by Developer Roller is returned to the Developer Unit and reused.) 1. Toner remained on the white image area (-XV) of Drum 2. When the toner contacts on the Developer Roller, it moves from Drum (-XV) to Developer Roller (-YV) as the potential of Developer Roller is relatively “positive” against Drum. 3. Developer Roller transports the toner toward the Toner Supply Roller 4. Toner Supply Roller returns the toner to the inside of Developer Unit. 5. Toner is used again for development. Before Development After Development (Toner is remaining on the white area.) (Toner is removed from the white area.)

Reference

1

2-XV

-YV

3

4

5

Toner

K115sm3e1.doc 3-11

3. 2. 6 Pre-transfer LED The potential of non-toner area of the Drum is -XV even after the Development process, which is so high that the print media may not be separated smoothly from the Drum on later Separation Process as it is strongly attracted to -XV area by the static force, and may result in a jam in the worst case. To reduce the static force in advance before Separation Process, the Pre-transfer LED throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges some degree from non-toner area. The potential of non-toner area is increased from -XV to about -80V by Pre-Transfer Process. Pre-transfer LED

-XV -80V -80V

K115sm3e1.doc 3-12

3. 2. 7 Transfer The Transfer Corona takes positive discharging to charge the printing media positively. As the toner existing on negative Drum surface is attracted to the positive printing media, the toner image can be transferred onto the media. The voltage supplied to the Transfer Corona Wire is as follows. Transfer Corona Wire : +520V +/-30V (When the Insulated Drum is used.)

The Transfer Guide Plate in front of the Transfer Corona is grounded through the Varistor which keeps only the necessary positive electric charges while dismissing excess charges to the ground. 1. If the Transfer Guide Plate is directly grounded, the positive electric charges given to the printing media will escape to the ground through the Transfer Guide Plate. As the printing media is not enough charged positive, much toner remains on the Drum without being transferred onto the media. The image looks very light in this case. 2. If the Transfer Guide Plate is completely floated from the ground so as to block the escape route of the positive electric charges, it collects too much positive charges because the Transfer Corona exists nearby it. As the Transfer Guide Plate is more strongly charged positive than required, it attracts the toner flying inside the machine. This toner attracted onto the Transfer Guide Plate will cause the dirt on the back of the print.

Drum

Printing media

Transfer Guide Plate

Positive electric charges

Transfer Corona

Reference

-50V -50V -50V -50V

K115sm3e1.doc 3-13

3. 2. 8 Separation The printing media is stuck to the Drum after the Transfer being attracted by the static force. It is necessary for avoiding the jam to separate the media from the Drum smoothly removing the static force. The Separation Corona takes AC discharge being supplied with the AC voltage and the DC voltage. AC voltage : 11KVp-p DC voltage : -250V for plain paper -300V for tracing paper - 10V for film) As the AC voltage is compensated by the negative DC voltage, the negative charges are provided to the printing media more than positive ones. The positive charges on the printing media are offset by these negative charges. On the other hand, the Separation Lamp throws light from under the Separation Corona to remove the negative charges of the Drum. The static force between media and Drum is removed, and the media is naturally removed from the Drum. Negative charges on the Drum are removed by the light from the Separation Lamp. Positive charges on the media are removed by AC discharging.

Separation Lamp Separation Corona

NOTE The main purpose of Separation Lamp is to assist to separate the media from Drum. But sometimes the Separation Lamp may become a solution for getting a better transfer result when some specific type of media is used. If the printed image looks not clear or not enough dark when printed with some king of unsupported type of printing media for example, it will be valuable to try to turn ON the Separation Lamp for such media. It can be turned ON/OFF per media type in the Service Mode and User Mode. See the following each pages.

• [(17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (No.17)] on page 8-60 • [(18) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (No.18)] on page 8-61 • [(36) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (No.C6)] on page 8-76 • [8.2.6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film])] on page 8-174

K115sm3e1.doc 3-14

3. 2. 9 Fusing After Transfer / Separation Processes, the Inner Transportation Unit carries the printing media to the Fuser Unit. The Fuser Unit mainly consists of the Fuser Roller and the Pressure Roller. The toner is firmly fused onto the printing media by the heat and the pressure when the media passes through between the Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller. Fuser Roller Inner Transportation Unit Pressure Roller

K115sm3e1.doc 3-15

3. 3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit Developer Unit is provided with 3 rollers “Developer Roller”, “Regulation Roller” and “Toner Supply Roller”, which are provided with their own Bias respectively as the following table. The voltage of the Developer Roller (-YV) is measured against the ground, and the voltages for other items are the difference against the Developer Roller Bias (-YV).

Name of roller Supplied voltage Developer Roller -Y +/-3V against the ground Regulation Roller (Center) -100 +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias Regulation Roller (Sides) +365 +/-3V against the Developer Roller Bias Toner Supply Roller -350 +/-3V against the Developer Roller Bias

Regulation Roller : Side Insulator Regulation Roller : Center (+365V against Developer Roller Bias) (-100V against Developer Roller Bias) Developer Roller (-YV against GND) Toner Supply Roller (-350V against Developer Roller Bias)

NOTE The insulator divides the Regulation Roller into “Centrer” and “Side”. Different voltage is provided to them respectively.

K115sm3e1.doc 3-16

Taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers, the movement of toner is controlled in the Developer Unit as follows. 1. The Toner Supply Roller carries the toner toward the Developer Roller. 2. The voltage of the Toner Supply Roller is 350V lower than that of Developer Roller. When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, it moves onto the Developer Roller. Then the Development Roller carries the toner toward the Regulation Roller. 3. The Regulation Roller is strongly pressed to the Developer Roller by the spring, and these 2 rollers move to the opposite direction each other at the contact point. The Developer Roller carries much toner, but the Regulation Roller limits the amount of toner that can pass through between 2 rollers. As a result very small amount of toner can pass through between rollers and the rest is returned back to the inside. As the voltage of Developer Roller is 100V higher than that of Regulation Roller (Center), the toner passed through between rollers is surely attracted to the Developer Roller. Very thin layer of toner is evenly formed on the surface of Developer Roller as a result. 4. Much toner sticks onto the Regulation Roller when it is returned back to the inside. This toner is scraped off by the Scraper which is contacted to the Regulation Roller. Scraper Regulation Roller : Center (-100V against Developer Roller Bias) Toner Supply Roller Developer Roller (-350V against Developer Roller Bias) (-YV against GND)

K115sm3e1.doc 3-17

5. The voltage of both sides of Regulation Roller is 365V higher than the Developer Roller Bias. When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, it moves onto the Regulation Roller. The side areas of the Developer Roller are not covered with the toner as a result, which can prevent the toner drops into the machine from the side. Regulation Roller : Center (+365V against Developer Roller Bias) Developer Roller (-YV against GND) Regulation Roller : Center (-100V against Developer Roller Bias) Toner area Regulation Roller : Side Non-toner area (+365V against Developer Roller Bias) Developer Roller (-YV against GND)

K115sm3e1.doc 3-18

3. 4 Toner Collection Process As explained in [3.2.2 Drum Cleaning] on page 3-6, the Cleaning Roller removes and collects the remained toner on the Drum using +800V of voltage supplied to it in the print cycle. KIP9000 takes an operation to return the collected toner to the Developer Unit in the following 3 cases. (This process to return the toner is called “Toner Collection Process”.) (1) When the KIP9000 is going to stop after printing out all the accumulated print jobs. (2) When the used roll media is ended and changed with another one. (3) When the used roll media is changed from one to another because of the change of print size. When the trailing edge of the last sheet passes over the Separation Area, the KIP9000 performs Toner Collection Process as follows rotating the Drum for 2 revolutions. 1. The Eraser Lamp throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges from the Drum. The potential of Drum becomes 0V. 2. The voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller is changed to -500V in the Toner Collection Process. As the potential of Drum becomes relatively positive against the Cleaning Roller, the toner moves from Cleaning Roller to Drum. This toner is transported to the Developer Roller. Eraser Lamp

Toner

Cleaning Roller

Drum

-500V 0V

0V

0V 0V

0V 0V

K115sm3e1.doc 3-19

3. The voltage supplied to the Developer Roller is also changed to +350V (+/-3V) in the Toner Collection Process. As the potential of Developer Roller becomes higher than that of Drum, toner on the Drum moves onto the Developer Roller. Then the toner is carried into the Developer Unit by both the Developer Roller and the Toner Supply Roller.

Toner Drum

Developer Roller

+350V

0V

0V

0V

0V

K115sm3e1.doc 3-20

Voltages supplied to Regulation Roller and Toner Supply Roller are changed also as follows. Regulation Roller : Sides Regulation Roller : Center (+365V against the Developer Roller Bias) (-100V against the Developer Roller Bias) Developer Roller Toner Supply Roller (+350V against GND) (-350V against the Developer Roller Bias)

Reference

Name of roller Supplied Voltage (Against the ground)

Supplied voltage (Against the Developer Roller Bias)

Developer Roller +350V +/-3V - Toner Supply Roller - -350V +/-3V Regulation Roller (Center)

- -100V +/-3V

Regulation Roller (Sides)

- +365V +/-5V

K115sm3e2.doc 3-21

3. 5 Automatic Controls

3. 5. 1 Auto Density Control If the temperature of installation site varies while the Developer Bias is always fixed to a constant level, the print image may become lighter or darker than expected. Especially when the temperature falls, the print image tends to become lighter. The Auto Density Control is able to get rid of such effect by the temperature variation and realizes to have always expected density in any temperature condition. Without Auto Density Control With Auto Density Control Target density Resulting density (Look different from “target”) (Look same with “target”) The Density Lock process performed in the factory (in most of cases) provides a “Target Density” to KIP9000. When the Auto Density Control is set to ON, it automatically changes the Developer Bias flexibly to have the same density with the Target Density in any situation.

K115sm3e2.doc 3-22

3. 5. 1. 1 Density Lock Density Lock is a process to provide “Target Density” to KIP9000, which is performed in the factory in most of cases. (This may have to be done in the field very rarely.) This process is very important as the Target Density specified here will continue to be the expected density applied on all print/copy afterward. Density Lock is performed in the factory in the following method. (Do as the same if you will set the Target Density again in the field.) 1. Set the Auto Density Control to OFF on the Service Mode 5-AA to get rid of any effect by the variation of temperature during the Density Lock process. 2. Print out any solid black image (Test Pattern #2 for example), and measure its density with a densitometer. 3. If the solid black needs to be much darker, increase the value of Developer Bias in the Service Mode 4-19. (Or decrease the value if the solid black needs to be much lighter.) 4. When the density of solid black is successfully adjusted to “expected density” level, perform the Density Lock immediately in the Service Mode 9-0b. 5. When Density Lock is started, the LED of Density Sensors throw light onto the bare Drum surface, and the reflection from the Drum is detected. If the reflection does not satisfy the specified level, the light intensity of LED is automatically calibrated. The Density Sensor is initialized by this process. Density Sensor 6. After the initialization of LED, some calibration target images (solid black) are created on the Drum with the current Developer Bias setting, and the Density Sensors detect the density of these images. Calibration target images Drum Density Sensor 7. KIP9000 takes average for the densities of those calibration target images and converts it into a hexadecimal data. This is hexadecimal data is memorized as “Target Density” in the Service Mode 5-Ab.

NOTE The Developer Bias adjusted in the former procedure 3 can produce the “expected density” only in the limited temperature situation. If time passes and the room temperature changes, this Bias may no more be able to produce “expected density”. Therefore the Density Lock must be performed immediately after the adjustment of Developer Bias before the room temperature changes.

K115sm3e2.doc 3-23

3. 5. 1. 2 Auto Density Control The Auto Density Control is a process to adjust the actual density to the same level with “Target Density” in any temperature condition by increasing or decreasing the Developer Bias flexibly. The Auto Density Control can work when it is set to ON (ON1 or ON2) in the Service Mode 5-AA (or User Mode E). The Auto Density Control takes Bias adjustment when;

• the Fuser is colder than 50 degrees centigrade at power on. • the inside temperature changes more than 3 degrees since the last Auto Density Control. • 24 hours has passed with the machine turned on since the last Auto Density Control. • any parameter concerned with the Auto Density Control is changed. • the Auto Density Control is newly activated or inactivated. • the Target Density is changed.

And the Bias adjustment is performed as follows. 1. Some calibration target images (solid black) are created on the Drum, and the Density Sensor detects the density of these images. Calibration target images Drum Density Sensor 2. KIP9000 takes average for the densities of those calibration target images, and converts it into a hexadecimal data (Actual Density). 3. The above “Actual Density” is compared with the “Target Density”. 4. If the difference between “Actual Density” and “Target Density” is not within the acceptable range, the Auto Density Control sets another Developer Bias and starts from the procedure 1 again. (Refer to the following [Reference] for the acceptable range.) 5. The adjustment will be finished if the difference of them comes to be within the acceptable range. If not within the acceptable range, Auto Density Control will try the above procedures 1 to 4 several times. 6. If the density still can not be adjusted to within the acceptable range even after 6 time trials, KIP9000 will show the Service Call Error E-28.

Acceptable range depends on the setting on User Mode E (or Service Mode 5-AA).

• When User Mode E (or Service Mode 5-AA) is set to “ON1”, error check is performed with 5 times of “strict check level” then 1 time of “normal check level”.

• When User Mode E (or Service Mode 5-AA) is set to “ON2”, error check is performed with 6 times of “strict check level”.

Reference

Error check level Acceptable range (Unit : Hex.) Densitometer value Normal check level +/-20 +/-0.3 Strict check level +/-1 +/-0.05

K115sm3e2.doc 3-24

3. 5. 2 Auto SP Control A proper voltage gap must be maintained between [Bias] (Developer Bias) and [SP; white] (Surface Potential for white) for avoiding a foggy background problem. But if the Auto Density Control increases (adjusts to more negative side) the [Bias], the voltage gap between [Bias] and [SP: white] may become so small. Especially the Auto Density Control tends to increase the [Bias] greatly when in a cold environment as bigger voltage gap is required between [SP: black] (Surface Potential for Black) and [Bias] to have enough density. The foggy background problem tends to occur in such case because of small voltage gap between [Bias] and [SP: white]. In normal environment In a cold environment (Gap between [Bias] and [SP: white] is very small.) If [SP: white] is adjusted to more negative side accompanying to the increment of [Bias], it is possible to have enough voltage gap between [SP: white] and [Bias] so the foggy background can be avoided. The Auto SP Control is thus a process to adjust the [SP: white] automatically to have enough voltage gap against [Bias]. Before the adjustment by Auto SP Control After the adjustment by Auto SP Control (Between [Bias] and [SP: white] is small.) (Between [Bias] and [SP: white] is enough large.)

GNDSP black

Bias

SP white

GNDSP black

Bias

SP white

GNDSP black

Bias

SP white

GNDSP black

Bias

SP white

GNDSP black

Bias

SP white

K115sm3e2.doc 3-25

The value of [SP: white] adjusted by the Auto SP Control relies on the “Target Surface Potential” that is specified on the following service modes to each setting points (5 to 30oC by every 5oC step) respectively. Service Mode 5-A3 : Target Surface Potential at 5oC 5-A4 : Target Surface Potential at 10oC 5-A5 : Target Surface Potential at 15oC 5-A6 : Target Surface Potential at 20oC 5-A7 : Target Surface Potential at 25oC 5-A8 : Target Surface Potential at 30oC If the current temperature condition is 15 oC and the Target Surface Potential specified to 15oC is set to “-400V” for example, the Auto SP Control tries to adjust the [SP: white] to -400V. The Auto SP Control can work when it is set to ON in the Service Mode 5-A2 (or User Mode D). The Auto SP Control takes potential adjustment when;

• the Fuser is colder than 50 degrees centigrade at power on. • the inside temperature changes more than 3 degrees since the last Auto SP Control. • 24 hours has passed since the last Auto SP Control. • any parameter concerned with the Auto SP Control is changed. • the Auto SP Control is newly activated or inactivated. • the Target Surface Potential is changed.

Auto SP Control adjusts the density as follows. 1. The Surface Potential Sensor detects the surface potential of Drum, which is given with the current setting of “Grid Plate Current”. Surface Potential Sensor

(1) The Target Surface Potential can be specified only to the setting points of 5 degrees step. Between 2 setting points are plotted with linear curve, and necessary [SP: white] is automatically calculated. 5 10 15 20 25 30 oC (2) Normally a higher value (more negative value) is specified to lower temperature expecting the Auto Density Control will increase the Bias greatly for low temperature.

Reference

-450V -400V -350V -300V

K115sm3e2.doc 3-26

2. On the other hand, the Auto SP Control calculates the necessary [SP: white] based on the temperature detected by the Temperature Sensor. 3. The actual surface potential detected by Surface Potential Sensor is compared with the calculated [SP: white]. 4. If the difference between actual potential and required [SP: white] is not within the acceptable range, the Auto SP Control sets another “Grid Plate Current” and starts from the procedure 1 again. (The acceptable range of surface potential can be specified in the service Mode 5-A9.) 5. The adjustment will be finished if the difference of them comes to be within the acceptable range. If not within the acceptable range, Auto SP Control will try the above procedures 1 to 4 several times. 6. If the surface potential still can not be adjusted to within the acceptable range even after 6 time trials, KIP9000 will show the Service Call Error E-26.

K115sm4e1.doc 4-1

Chapter 4

Electrical Systems Page 4. 1 Summary 4- 2 4. 2 Location of Electrical Components 4- 3 4. 2. 1 Printed Circuit Board 4- 3 4. 2. 2 High Voltage Power Supplies & Transformer 4-15 4. 2. 3 DC Power Supplies 4-18 4. 2. 4 Motors 4-21 4. 2. 5 Blowers & Fans 4-25 4. 2. 6 Clutches & Brakes 4-31 4. 2. 7 Solenoids 4-34 4. 2. 8 Heaters & SSR 4-37 4. 2. 9 Terminal Block, Switches, Breaker & Counters 4-41 4. 2.10 Relays 4-46 4. 2.11 Micro Switches 4-48 4. 2.12 Paper Sensors, Thermistor, Thermostat, Toner Sensors & SPS 4-51 4. 2.13 Sensors in Roll Decks 4-60 4. 2.14 Sensors in Bypass Feeder 4-62 4. 2.15 Fuses 4-63 4. 3 Checking & Adjustment of Analog Output from HVP & BIAS 4-67 4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog output 4-67 4. 3. 2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1 (Image Corona) 4-68 4. 3. 3 Checking & Adjustment of HVP3 (Transfer Corona) 4-70 4. 3. 4 Checking & Adjustment of HVP4 (Separation Corona) 4-73 4. 3. 5 Checking & Adjustment of HVP5 (Cleaning Roller) 4-76 4. 3. 6 Checking & Adjustment of HVP6 (Grid Plate of Image Corona) 4-79 4. 3. 7 Checking & Adjustment of BIAS (For Developer Unit) 4-83 4. 3. 7. 1 Negative Developer Bias adjustment (Print Cycle) 4-84 (1) Negative Developer Bias for Development Roller 4-84 (2) Negative Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller 4-87 (3) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center) 4-90 (4) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Side) 4-93 4. 3. 7. 2 Positive Developer Bias adjustment (Toner Collection Process) 4-96 (1) Positive Developer Bias for Development Roller 4-96 (2) Positive Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller 4-98 (3) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center) 4-100 (4) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Side) 4-102 4. 4 Compensation of Analog Outputs by Service Mode 4-0d (Necessary after replacing the DCP2) 4-104 4. 5 Location of Connectors 4-105 4. 5. 1 Process Unit 4-105 4. 5. 2 Base of machine 4-106 4. 5. 3 Back of machine 4-107 4. 5. 4 Top of machine 4-108 4. 5. 5 Left side of machine 4-109 4. 5. 6 Right side of machine 4-110 4. 5. 7 Bypass Feeder Unit 4-111 4. 5. 8 Top Drawer Unit 4-112 4. 5. 9 Middle Drawer Unit 4-113 4. 5.10 Bottom Drawer Unit 4-114

K115sm4e1.doc 4-2

4. 1 Summary The microcomputer on DC Controller controls the operation of KIP9000. It reads the input signals from sensors, controls the loads of motors, SSRs, solenoid, clutches and blowers on programmed timing. DC Controller has an LED, meaning that 5Vdc is applied on this DC Controller safely. Generally the color of wiring is separated depends on the voltage. 0Vdc: blue Signal in to DC Controller (sensors): purple 5Vdc: yellow Signal out from DC Controller: gray 24Vdc: orange 36Vdc: pink

Sensor Micro Computer (CPU & ROM)

DC Load Driver

CAUTION There are batteries on the Main Control PCB (PW11520). Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Waste disposal method of battery: As for the waste disposal of battery, dispose in accordance with local state and federal relations.

K115sm4e1.doc 4-3

4. 2 Location of Electrical Components

4. 2. 1 Printed Circuit Board (Inside of Bypass Feeder)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 PW7771 Indication PCB B

(Operation Panel PCB) PW7771 Offers several operations and

information. 2 PW7770 Indication PCB A

(Media Indicator PCB) PW7770 Indicates media size and media

type on each Roll. 3 PW7170 Deck Indicator PW7170-01 Upper Deck “in use” indication 4 PW7170 Deck Indicator PW7170-01 Medium Deck “in use” indication 5 PW7170 Deck Indicator PW7170-01 Bottom Deck “in use” indication 6 LCD Touch Screen LCD R10L200-

KPU1 Offers several user operations. (Touch screen)

7 PW7790 Paper Size PCB PW7790 Detects the size of cut sheet media.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

K115sm4e1.doc 4-4

(Top side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 8 PW7758 LED Driver PCB PW7758 Driver of Pre-Transfer LED 9 PW7755 DC Driver PCB PW7755 Driver of Motors, HVPs, Bias, Fans,

Solenoid and Clutches 10 PW3590 DC Translation PCB

(DC Terminal PCB) PW3590-01 Junction of LED Head

11 PW11250 DC Regulator PCB PW11250 Power Supply of LCD Unit (12VDC)

12 PW7757 Transmission Driver PCB (Toner Quantity Sensor LED Driver PCB)

PW7757 Driver of the Transmission PCB used for toner quantity check

13 PW10257 Driver PCB PW10257 Driver of Web Motor

8 9 10

12 1311

K115sm4e1.doc 4-5

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 14 Surface Potential Sensor

PCB ES2A-4102 (600mm)

Detects the potential on Drum surface. (Always replace with SPS Sensor)

14

K115sm4e1.doc 4-6

(Right side)

15

16

17

18

K115sm4e1.doc 4-7

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 15 PW11520 Main Control PCB PW11520 Controls overall sequence of

KIP9000 being related with the Interface.

16 PW10780 Temperature & Humidity Sensor PCB

PW10780 Detects temperature and humidity inside of machine

17 PW3599 Signal Terminal PCB PW3599 Signal Junction 18 PW7772 DCP Indication PCB PW7772 Indicating the output conditions

of DC Power Supplies.

CAUTION There are batteries on the Main Control PCB (PW11520). Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Waste disposal method of battery: As for the waste disposal of battery, dispose in accordance with local state and federal relations.

K115sm4e1.doc 4-8

(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 20 PW7750 Transmission PCB PW7750 Detects the toner remaining

level in the Toner Cartridge. (Throws the light)

21 PW7751 Receiver PCB PW7751 Detects the toner remaining level in the Toner Cartridge. (Receives the light

21

20

K115sm4e1.doc 4-9

(Right side of Roll Decks)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 22 PW3575UA Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Size and type selector of Roll 1 23 PW3575UB Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Size and type selector of Roll 2 24 PW3575UC Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Size and type selector of Roll 3 25 PW3575UD Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Size and type selector of Roll 4

22

23

24 25

K115sm4e1.doc 4-10

(Left side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 26 TP0362 FUMTR Motor Controller PCB TP0362 Fuser Motor Controller 27 TP1142 DRMTR Motor Controller PCB TP1142 Drum Motor Controller 28 PW7756 CUTMTR Motor Controller PCB A PW7756 Cutter Motor Controller 29 PW6125 Phase Control PCB 2 PW6125 Reduces “flicker”. 30 PW4210 AC Circuit Board 2 PW4210 Terminal of AC 31 TP0362 PFMTR Motor Controller PCB TP0362 Paper Feed Motor Controller 32 PW7740 Temperature Detect

PCB PW7740 Monitoring abnormal

temperature of IR Lamps.

27

28

26

29

30

3132

K115sm4e2.doc 4-11

(Rear side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 33 PW2215 Filter PCB C PW2215 AC line filter 34 PW2215 Filter PCB C PW2215 AC line filter 35 PW6624 PC Controller PCB 2 PW6624 Shuts down the controller PC 36 PW4211 Filter PCB PW4211 Noise filter of the controller 37 PW5490 Reception PCB PW5490 Communicates with optional

device. 38 PW5491 Transmission PCB PW5491 Communicates with optional

device.

33 34

35

36

3738

K115sm4e2.doc 4-12

(Process frame)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 39 PW7730 E_LAMP Eraser Lamp PCB A PW7730 Removes the electric charges from

the Drum. 40 PW7731 E_LAMP Eraser Lamp PCB B PW7731 Removes the electric charges from

the Drum.

39 40

K115sm4e2.doc 4-13

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 41 PW1034 S_LAMP Eraser PCB C

(Separation Lamp) PW1034 Removes the electric charges to help

paper separation 42 PW1034 S_LAMP Eraser PCB I

(Separation Lamp) PW1034 Removes the electric charges to help

paper separation

41

42

K115sm4e2.doc 4-14

(Backside of each Roll Deck)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 43 PW3597 DC Translation PCB P PW3597 Roll Deck 1 Roll Size Sensor

PCB 44 PW3597 DC Translation PCB P PW3597 Roll Deck 2 Roll Size Sensor



PCB

E NTERRE SET

→*

44

43

45 46

K115sm4e2.doc 4-15

4. 2. 2 High Voltage Power Supplies & Transformer (Top side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 HVP1 HV1 High Voltage Power

Supply KHKG-063 Supplies the high voltage to the

Image Corona. 2 HVP5 HV5 High Voltage Power

Supply AHKG-067 Supplies the high voltage to the

Cleaning Roller.

1

2

K115sm4e2.doc 4-16

(Left side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 3 HVP3 HV_TR High Voltage Power

Supply BHKG-070 Supplies the high voltage to the

Transfer Corona. 4 HVP4 HV_AC High Voltage Power

Supply FHKG-046 Supplies the high voltage AC to

the Separation Corona. 5 HVP6 HV6 High Voltage Power

Supply KHKG-065 Supplies the high voltage to the

Grid Plate. 6 BIAS Bias Power Supply KHKG-062 Supplies the Developer Bias to each

roller in the Developer Unit. Output 1 : Toner Supply Roller Output 2 : Developer Roller Output 3 : Regulation Roller (Center) Output 4 : Regulation Roller (Both sides)

3

4

5

6

K115sm4e2.doc 4-17

(Rear side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 7 T1 Insulation Transformer KCT-01B

(EUR & USA) Converts the inputted AC into 24VAC for Dehumidify Heater of Roll 1 and 2

7

K115sm4e3.doc 4-18

4. 2. 3 DC Power Supplies (Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 DCP1 DC Power Supply ZWS240PAF-

24/J Supplies +24VDC (240W).

1

K115sm4e3.doc 4-19

(Top side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 2 DCP2 DC Power Supply LEA150F-5 Supplies +5VDC (150W) to sensors,

LED Head, DC Controller and so on.

2

K115sm4e3.doc 4-20

(Rear side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 3 DCP3 DC Power Supply ZWS150PAF-

36/J Supplying +36VDC (150W) to the Drum Motor (M1).

4 DCP4 DC Power Supply ZWS150PAF-36/J

Supplying +36VDC (150W) to Paper Feed Motor (M2), Cutter Motor (M3) and Fuser Motor (M5).

5 DCP5 DC Power Supply ZWS5-5/J Supplying +5VDC (5W) to the PC Controller PCB 2.

3

4

5

K115sm4e3.doc 4-21

4. 2. 4 Motors (Left side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 M1 DRMTR DC Motor

(Drum Motor) TL1142 Drives both the Drum and the

Developer Unit. 2 M2 PFMTR DC Motor

(Paper Feed Motor) TL0314 Drives the roll feeding mechanism.

3 M3 CUTMTR Stepping Motor (Cutter Motor)

KT56LM4G-004

Drives the Cutter Unit.

4 M4 DPMTR DC Motor (Developer Positioning Motor)

DU2422-1 Presses the Developer Unit to the Drum, and also separates the Developer from the Drum.

5 M5 FUMTR DC Motor (Fuser Motor)

TL0314 Drives the Fuser Roller.

6 M10 T_MTR DC Motor (Bypass Feeding Motor)

DME37B6H30B

Drives the cut sheet media feeding mechanism.

(Fuser unit)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 7 M11 W_MTR Synchronous Motor

(Web Motor) D125J45-34 Drives the Web. (This is an

optional part.)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

K115sm4e3.doc 4-22

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 8 M6 HOP_MTR2 DC Motor

Toner Supply Motor 2 DU2711-3 Drives the Toner Hopper to

supply the toner to the Developer Unit.

9 M8 DC Motor (LED Cleaning Motor)

LA20-282BD Drives the Cleaning Pad to clean the LED Head.

8

9

K115sm4e3.doc 4-23

(Image Corona)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 10 M9 DC Motor

(Wire Cleaning Motor) LA20-282BD Drives the Cleaning Pad to

clean the Image Corona Wire.

10

K115sm4e3.doc 4-24

(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 11 M7 HOP_MTR1 DC Motor

(Toner Supply Motor 1)

DME34B50G96B

Drives the Toner Cartridge to supply the toner to the Toner Hopper.

11

K115sm4e4.doc 4-25

4. 2. 5 Blowers & Fans (Rear side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 BL1 SEPBLW Sirocco Fan

(Separation Fan) TA0409 Inhales the air from the bottom of

Internal Transportation Unit to help paper separation. 4 Ozone Filters are provided.

2 BL17, 18 & 19

EXBLW3 Fan Motor (Exhaust Fan 3)

CNDC24B7-027

Exhausts the inside air. An Ozone Filter is provided to each of them.

3 FM2 Fan Motor (Cooling Fan 2)

FBA09A24H Cools down both the DCP3 and the DCP4.

2

13

K115sm4e4.doc 4-26

(Rear side : Fuser section)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 4 BL2 & BL3 EXBLW_L

EXBLW_H Sirocco Fan (Exhaust Blower)

FAL-14C4RH Cools down the top of the Fuser.

4 4

K115sm4e4.doc 4-27

(Inside of Rear Upper Cover)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 5 BL4 A-D

BL5 A-D BL6 A-D BL7 A-D

PRESBLW_L PRESBLW_H

Fan (Pressure Blowers)

D04R24TH33 Blows the air from the top so as to help the paper goes into the Fuser Area easily.

5 5 5 5

K115sm4e4.doc 4-28

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 6 BL8 A-D

BL9 A-D COOL_FAN1 Fan

(LED Cooling Fans 1) D04R24TH33 Cools down the LED Head.

7 BL10 A-D BL11 A-D

COOL_FAN2 Fan (LED Cooling Fans 2)

D04R24TH33 Cools down the LED Head.

6 7 76

K115sm4e4.doc 4-29

(Process frame)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 8 BL14 SEPBLW2 Sirocco Fan

(Separation Assist Blower 2) E0515H24B7AZ-13

Helps paper’s separation from the Drum. It works always during print regardless of the paper size.

9 BL13 & BL15 SEPBLW3 Sirocco Fan (Separation Assist Blower 3)

E0515H24B7AZ-13

Helps paper’s separation from the Drum. They work if the paper is 364mm (17") or wider.

10 BL12 & BL16 SEPBLW4 Sirocco Fan (Separation Assist Blower 4)

E0515H24B7AZ-13

Helps paper’s separation from the Drum. They work if the paper is 841mm (30") or wider.

10 109 98

K115sm4e4.doc 4-30

(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 11 FM1 Fan Motor

(Cooling Fan 1) FBA09A24H Cools down the DCP1.

(Left side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 12 FM3 Fan Motor

(Cooling Fan 3) FBA06T24H Cools down the Cutter Motor

Controller PCB (PW7756). 13 FM4 Fan Motor

(Cooling Fan 4) FBA06T24H Cools down the Cutter Motor (M3)

11

12

13

K115sm4e5.doc 4-31

4. 2. 6 Clutches & Brakes (Left side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 MC1 RP_CL Electromagnetic Clutch

(Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1) BJ-3.5-160

2 MC2 RP_CL2 Electromagnetic Clutch (Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2)

BJ-3.5-160


BJ-3.5-160


BJ-3.5-160

5 MC5 P_GATE Electromagnetic Clutch (Paper Gate Clutch)

BJ-3.5-160

6 MC10 PG_BK Electromagnetic Brake (Paper Gate Brake)

BB-3.2-E01

7 MC6 RP_FEED Electromagnetic Clutch (Paper Feed Clutch)

AMC20

8 MC9 PF_BK Electromagnetic Brake (Paper Feed Brake)

BB-3.2-E01

1

3

2

4

6

5

8

7

K115sm4e5.doc 4-32

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 9 MC7 MF_CL Electromagnetic Clutch 2

(Bypass Feed Clutch) BJ-3.5-E06

10 MC8 RP_CL1 Electromagnetic Clutch (Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch)

BJ-3.5-166

9 10

K115sm4e5.doc 4-33

(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 11 MC11 HOPPER Electromagnetic Clutch 1

(Toner Supply Clutch) BJ-3.5-E07

11

K115sm4e5.doc 4-34

4. 2. 7 Solenoids (Fuser Unit)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 SL1 FU_SL Solenoid G1247

(Fuser Solenoid) G1247 Moves the Fuser Entrance Guide

Plate up and down. This solenoid is locked and does not function presently.

(Cutter Unit)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 2 SL2 CT0_SL Solenoid

(Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid) G1253-K7 Moves the oil pad to lubricate the

Cutter Blade.

1

2

K115sm4e5.doc 4-35

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 3 SL3 T_SL1 Solenoid

(Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid)

G-1053-K12 Moves the Bypass Feeding Roller up and down.

3

K115sm4e5.doc 4-36

(Inside of Bypass Feeder)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 4 SL4 T_SL2 Solenoid

(Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid)

G-1053-K12 Moves the Bypass Reversal Roller up and down.

4

K115sm4e6.doc 4-37

4. 2. 8 Heaters & SSR (Fuser Unit)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 H1 F_LAMP1 IR Lamp QIR220-

1750KIC (EUR & USA)

Heats up the center of the Fuser Roller.

2 H2 F_LAMP2 IR Lamp QIR220-1350KIAG (EUR & USA)

Heats up both sides of the Fuser Roller.

2

1

K115sm4e6.doc 4-38

(Left side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 3 SSR1 Solid State Relay S5N-225HV Turns on and off the IR Lamp (H1). 4 SSR2 Solid State Relay S5N-225HV Turns on and off the IR Lamp (H2).

3

4

K115sm4e6.doc 4-39

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 5 H3 Heater

(Dehumidify Heater) Dehumidifies the roll media in the

Roll 3 (Left side). 15W (3.5 kilo ohm)

6 H4 Heater (Dehumidify Heater)

Dehumidifies the roll media in the Roll 3 (Right side). 15W (3.5 kilo ohm)


Dehumidifies the roll media in the Roll 4 (Left side). 15W (3.5 kilo ohm)


Dehumidifies the roll media in the Roll 4 (Right side). 15W (3.5 kilo ohm)

65

87

K115sm4e6.doc 4-40

(1st Roll Deck) (2nd Roll Deck)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 9 H7 Heater

(Dehumidify Heater) Dehumidifies the roll media in the

Roll 2. 15W (38 ohm)


Dehumidifies the roll media in the Roll 1. 15W (38 ohm)

9

10

K115sm4e6.doc 4-41

4. 2. 9 Terminal Block, Switches, Breaker & Counters (Left side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 TB1 Terminal Block UF1005-30A-

2P

2 CB1 Circuit Protector IEG-6-11-62-20A-M

1

2

K115sm4e6.doc 4-42

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 3 S1 Power Supply Switch

(Main Switch) AJ8R2004ZZC01

Turns on the printer.

3

K115sm4e6.doc 4-43

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 4 S2 Power Supply Switch

(Dehumidify Heater Switch) SDDJE1 Turns on the Dehumidify Heaters.

4

K115sm4e6.doc 4-44

(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 5 CNT B CPY_CNT Electromagnetic Counter 2

(Counter B) SCM-2470SK Counts the number of prints.

(Counting unit is changeable in the Service Mode.) It has 3 pins on the junction connector.

6 CNT A LNG_CNT Electromagnetic Counter 1 (Counter A)

SCM-2470SK Counts the length of total print. (Counting unit is changeable in the Service Mode.) It has 2 pins on the junction connector.

5

6

K115sm4e7.doc 4-46

4. 2.10 Relays (Rear side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 RY1 Relay

(Relay 1) G7L-2A-BUB AC200-240

Supplies the power to DCP1, DCP2 and Filter PCB (PW2215) of H2. (Does not shut it off even if the Interlock is open.)

2 RY2 Relay (Relay 2)

G7L-2A-BUB DC24

Supplies the power to Filter PCB (PW2215) of H1. (Shuts it off if the Interlock is open.)


G7L-2A-BUB DC24

Supplies the power from Filter PCB (PW2215) to H2. (Shuts it off if the Interlock is open.)


G7L-2A-BUB DC24

Supplies the power to DCP3 and DCP4. (Shuts it off if the Interlock or any Roll Deck is open.)


G2R-1-T-DC5 Supplies the power to DCP1. (Shuts it off when in the Cold Sleep.)

5

34

21

K115sm4e7.doc 4-47

(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 6 RY4 Relay

(Relay 4) JC2aF-TM-DC24V

Supplies the DC power to the following parts. It is shut off if the Interlock or any Roll Deck is open. (1) HVP1, 3, 4 & 6 (2) BIAS (3) M10 (4) BL4, 5, 6 & 7 (5) FM3 & FM4 (6) Pre-transfer LED


JC2aF-TM-DC24V

Supplies the DC Power to the following parts. It is shut off if the Interlock is open. (1) HVP5 (2) M6 & 7 (3) MC1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 & 10 (4) BL1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18 & 19 (5) SL1, 2, 3 & 4 (6) CNT1 & 2 (7) Surface Potential Sensor PCB (8) Eraser PCB C & I (Separation Lamp)

6

7

K115sm4e7.doc 4-48

4. 2.11 Micro Switches (Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 DS1

RIGHT_SW1 Door Switch

(Right Side Door Switch) D2VW-5L3-1HS-191

Opens RY2, RY3, RY4, RY5 and RY6 when DS1 is open. (Interlock Switch)

2 DS2 RIGHT_SW1_ Status

Door Switch (Right Side Door Switch)

D2VW-01L3-1HS

Status signal of “Right Door Open”

1

2

K115sm4e7.doc 4-49

(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 3 DS5 RIGHT_SW2 Door Switch

(Toner Cover Switch) D2VW-5L3-1HS-191

Shuts of the power for Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7), Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6), Toner Supply Clutch (MC11) and Transmission PCB (PW7750) when DS8 is open.

4 DS6 RIGHT_SW2_ Status

Door Switch (Toner Cover Switch)

D2VW-01L3-1HS

Status signal of “Toner Cover Open”

34

K115sm4e7.doc 4-50

(Rear side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 5 DS3 EXIT_SW Door Switch

(Exit Cover Switch) D2VW-5L3-1HS-191

Opens RY2, RY3, RY4, RY5 and RY6 when DS3 is open.

6 DS4 EXIT_SW_ Status

Door Switch (Exit Cover Switch)

D2VW-01L3-1HS

Status signal of “Exit Cover Open”

5

6

K115sm4e8.doc 4-51

4. 2.12 Paper Sensors, Thermistor, Thermostat, Toner Sensors & SPS

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 SPS1 Surface Potential Sensor ES2A-6007 Detecting the potential of the Drum 2 PH44 Density Sensor GP2Y40010KOF Detects the density of toner image

on Drum for Automatic Density Control.

1

2

K115sm4e8.doc 4-52

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 3 PH22 CUTHP_O Cutter Home Position

Sensor PW2285 Detects the Home Position of the

Cutter Blade 4 PH24 PFUNIT_ST Photo Interrupter

(Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor)

GP1A73 Detects whether the Internal Transportation Unit is closed or not.

3

4

K115sm4e8.doc 4-53

(Process Unit)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 5 PH25 DEVE_HP Photo Interrupter

(Developer Unit Position Sensor)

LG283 Detects the position of the Developer Unit (Pressed or released)

6 TLS1 DEV_TNR1 Toner Sensor (Hopper Toner Sensor)

TS15D20-37 Detects the existence of the toner in the Hopper

5

6

K115sm4e8.doc 4-54

(Developer Unit)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 7 PH42 TNR_LED Toner Sensor (Illuminator) KB876-

KD12LF Detects the existence of toner in the Developer Unit. This throws light.

8 PH43 TNR_SENSOR Toner Sensor (Receiver) KB874-KD22LF

Detects the existence of toner in the Developer Unit. This receives light.

78

K115sm4e8.doc 4-55

(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 8 PH45 RFID IC Tag Reader &

Writer PCB ARWBT-RF01 Detects the Toner Cartridge.

8

K115sm4e8.doc 4-56

(On the Internal Transportation Unit)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 9 PH12 PA_ENT Photo Interrupter

(Leading Edge Sensor) GP2A25 Places the roll media to the print start

position. 10 PH18 P_SEPR Actuator 2 Assy

(Separation Sensor) GP1S74P Detects the Separation Jam.

EXP-CLEAN

WIRE-CLEAN

D1

MF

D2

D3

D4

EXIT

PF

COPY DENSITYMENU

ENTER RESET

→←

*

PAPER DECK

CUTSELECT

1 2 3 4

9

10

K115sm4e8.doc 4-57

(Fuser Unit)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 11 TH1 Thermistor NC-F1B Controls the temperature of the

Fuser Roller (Non-contacting type) 12 TH2 Thermistor ES2U1.3B6-

20031 Shuts off the RY2 and RY3 before the Thermostat opens when over temperature is detected. (Contacting type)

13 TS1 INT1 Thermostat Assy Protects the Fuser from over heating

11 1213

K115sm4e8.doc 4-58

(Fuser Unit)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 14 LS2 P_EXIT Lead Switch

(Exit Sensor) RS-801EA Detects the Exit Jam.

15 PH40 Web Sensor GP1A73 Detects the feeding of web

14

K115sm4e8.doc 4-59

(Rear side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 15 PH40 Web Sensor GP1A73 Detects the feeding of web

15

K115sm4e8.doc 4-60

4. 2.13 Sensors in Roll Decks (Roll Deck 1)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 PH1 RP_SET1 Photo Interrupter

(Roll Set Sensor 1) GP2A25 Detects the existence of roll media.

Detects 210mm, 9” & 8.5” roll media also

2 PH5A SZDATA0 Photo Interrupter (Paper Size Sensor 0)

GP2A25 Detects 880mm, 890mm & 900mm roll media


GP2A25 Detects 420mm, 18” and 17” roll media


GP2A25 Detects 515mm & 22” roll media








GP2A25 Detects 36” roll media

9 PH41 Photo Interrupter (Paper Size Sensor)

GP2A25 Detects 15” roll media

10 PH13 RF_CLK1 Photo Interrupter (Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1)

GP1A73 Detects the clock pulse generated by Roll 1(No pulse : Roll end)

ENTE RR ESET

→*

1

2

3 4

6

5 7 8 9

10

K115sm4e8.doc 4-61

(Roll Decks 2, 3 & 4)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 PH2 RP_SET2 Photo Interrupter

(Roll Set Sensor 1) GP2A25 Detects the existence of roll media.

Detects 210mm, 9” & 8.5” roll media also

2 PH3 RP_SET3 Photo Interrupter (Roll Set Sensor 1)

GP2A25 Detects the existence of roll media. Detects 210mm, 9” & 8.5” roll media also

3 PH4 RP_SET4 Photo Interrupter (Roll Set Sensor 1)

GP2A25 Detects the existence of roll media. Detects 210mm, 9” & 8.5” roll media also

4 PH5B, C & D SZDATA0 Photo Interrupter (Paper Size Sensor 0)

GP2A25 Detects 297mm, 12” & 11” roll media PH5B : Roll Deck 2 PH5C : Roll Deck 3 PH5D : Roll Deck 4


GP2A25 Detects 420mm, 18” & 17” roll media PH6B : Roll Deck 2 PH6C : Roll Deck 3 PH6D : Roll Deck 4


GP2A25 Detects 515mm & 22” roll media PH7B : Roll Deck 2 PH7C : Roll Deck 3 PH7D : Roll Deck 4





9 PH10B, C & D

SZDATA5 Photo Interrupter (Paper Size Sensor 5)


10 PH11B, C & D

SZDATA6 Photo Interrupter (Paper Size Sensor 6)

GP2A25 Detects 36” roll media PH11B : Roll Deck 2 PH11C : Roll Deck 3 PH11D : Roll Deck 4


GP1A73 Detects the clock pulse generated by Roll 2 (No pulse : Roll end)


GP1A73 Detects the clock pulse generated by Roll 3 (No pulse : Roll end)


GP1A73 Detects the clock pulse generated by Roll 4(No pulse : Roll end)

ENTER

RESET

→*

2 3 1

6 4

5 7 8 9 10

12

13

11

B D C

K115sm4e8.doc 4-62

4. 2.14 Sensors in Bypass Feeder (Bypass Feeder & Roll 1)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function 1 PH20 MP_SRT Photo Interrupter

(Bypass Start Sensor) GP2A25 Places a large cut sheet media at the

print start position. (Large means 841mm, 30”, 34” and 36”.)

2 PH31 Photo Interrupter (Cut Sheet Set Sensor)

GP2A25 (GP2A28)

Detects the existence of cut sheet media on the Bypass Feeder It also detects 8.5”.

3 PH32, 33 & 34

T_SIZE0 Photo Interrupter (Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0)

GP2A25 (GP2A28)

Detects the size of the cut sheet media PH32 : 297mm & 9” PH33 : 420mm & 17” PH34 : 18”

4 PH35, 36 & 37

T_SIZE1 Photo Interrupter (Cut Sheet Size Sensor 1)

GP2A25 (GP2A28)

Detects the size of the cut sheet media PH35 : 22” PH36 : 594mm & 24” PH37 : 841mm, 30”, 34” & 36”

1

2 3 4

K115sm4e9.doc 4-63

4. 2.15 Fuses (Left side) (Left side) F101 and F102 are on the AC Circuit Board B (PW4210).

Item Symbol Name Rate Type Caution for replacement 1 F101 Fuse 250V / 2A 218002 When fuse (F101) is to be replaced,

use the following specified one. Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC. Type : 218002 (250V / 2A) CAUTION : DOUBLE POLE / NEUTRAL FUSING

2 F102 Fuse 250V / 2A 218002 When fuse (F102) is to be replaced, use the following specified one. Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC. Type : 218002 (250V / 2A) CAUTION : DOUBLE POLE / NEUTRAL FUSING

2 1

K115sm4e9.doc 4-64

(Rear side)


use the following specified one. Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC. Type : 218002 (250V / 2A)

4 F241 Fuse 250V / 3.15A 2153.15 Protects the outlet for controller When fuse (F241) is to be replaced, use the following specified one. Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC. Type : 2153.15 (250V / 3.15A)

4

3

K115sm4e9.doc 4-65

(Top side) F551 and F552 are on the DC Driver PCB (PW7755).


use the following specified one. Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC. Type : 215005 (250V / 5A)

6 F551 Fuse 250V / 0.5A 215.500 7 F552 Fuse 250V / 0.25A 215.250 8 F571 Fuse 250V / 3.15A 9 F572 Fuse 250V / 3.15A

6

57

8

9

K115sm4e9.doc 4-66

(Right side) (Left side)

Item Symbol Name Rate Type Caution for replacement 10 F5 Fuse 250V / 4A 215004 11 F6 Fuse 250V / 4A 215004 12 F7 Fuse 250V / 4A 215004 13 F8 Fuse 250V / 4A 215004

Protects 24VDC from DCP1. When fuses (F3 to F6) are to be replaced, use the following specified one. Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC. Type : 215004 (250V / 4A)

10 11 12 13

K115sm4ea.doc 4-67

4. 3 Checking & Adjustment of Analog Output from HVP & BIAS

4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog output After replacing High Voltage Power Supplies (HVP) or Bias PCB (BIAS), or when abnormal image is printed out, check if each PCB outputs correct voltage or current. The followings are the items need to be checked and readjusted. See each “Reference page” for the operation procedure.

Checking Item Reference page HVP1 (Image Corona) 4-68 HVP3 (Transfer Corona) 4-70 HVP4 (Separation Corona) 4-73 HVP5 (Cleaning Roller) 4-76 HVP6 (Grid Plate) 4-79 BIAS (Developer Unit) 4-83

K115sm4ea.doc 4-68

4. 3. 2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1 (Image Corona) The standard value of current supplied from the HVP1 is -2.0mA +/-0.05mA. Check and adjust the HVP1 in the following way. 1. Remove the Drum from the machine for the safety. The Drum will be damaged if not removed! 2. Find “OUTPUT MONITOR” pins on the HVP1, and connect “+” of multi-meter to the “+” pin and “-” to the “COM.” pin. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 3. Enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and select the Signal Code “A0” (HV1 : Image Corona Control Signal).

OUTPUT

VR1

VR2 VR3

COM. +

MONITOR

Multi-meter(DC volt range)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm4ea.doc 4-69

4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output from the HVP1. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of current is -2.0mA +/-0.05mA. 5. If the current from HVP1 does not satisfy -2.0mA +-/0.05mA, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust the HVP1 current, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the Item No.1A (Current setting for the Image Corona Wire).

• Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation] on the page 8-36 for how to change the setting value. • Refer to [(20) Current setting for the Image Corona Wire (No.1A)] on the page 8-62 for the

detail of this setting.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

CAUTION Do not adjust the HVP1 current by rotating the VR on HVP1 positively as it is properly adjusted before shipment!

NOTE If the multimeter shows “2.0V”, it means “-2.0mA”. (Replace “+” with “-“, and replace “V” with “mA”.)

K115sm4ea.doc 4-70

4. 3. 3 Checking & Adjustment of HVP3 (Transfer Corona) The standard values of current supplied from the HVP3 are specified for each media type as follows. Plain paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA Tracing paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA Film 1.4mA +/-0.02mA Check and adjust the HVP3 in the following way. 1. Remove the Drum from the machine for the safety. The Drum will be damaged if not removed! 2. Disconnect the connector that exists on the cable between HVP3 and Socket for the Transfer / Separation Corona. Connect “+” of the DC Current Meter to the cable from HVP3, and connect “-” to the cable from the Socket. Put a Urethane Pad under the DC Current Meter for your safety!

NOTE A DC Current Meter must be connected directly to the HVP3 to measure the HVP3 output current. (Multimeter is not able to measure the intensity.) CAUTION It is very dangerous to check the Transfer Current as the DC Current Meter muse be connected directly to the HVP3. For the safety, put a thick insulation pad such as urethane form under the DC Current Meter, and also use a high voltage lead wire.

VR1

VR2 VR3

mA

Transfer Corona

DC Current Meter

Socket

K115sm4ea.doc 4-71

3. Enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and select the Signal Code “A2” (HV_TR : Transfer Corona Control Signal). 4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output from the HVP3. Measure the voltage with DC Current Meter. (It is required to be careful about the “target media type” of output current at this time. See the following NOTE.) Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard values of Transfer Current are as follows. Plain paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA Tracing paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA Film 1.4mA +/-0.02mA

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE As known generally, the transfer current (HVP3 output current) can be set separately to each media type (plain paper, tracing paper and film). The transfer current output by Service Mode 3-A2 will target one of 3 media types that was selected at the latest print opportunity. (If tracing paper was used in the latest printing, the transfer current will target the tracing paper if outputted by Service Mode 3-A2.) The target media type can not be changed even if you change the switch selection of Media Type Selector. To change the target media type, do as follows. (1) Select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and select any of Item No.1C, 1d and 1E according to the necessity. (Select “1C” if you will check the transfer current for plain paper for example.) 1C : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (PPC) 1d : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (Tracing) 1E : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (Film) (2) Change and decide the setting value by usual way in the selected Item No. The target media type is changed according to the “target media type” of selected setting item if the value is decided. (If any new value is decided in item “1d” (for tracing paper) for example, the target media type applied in Service Mode 3-A2 will change to tracing paper.) (3) Select the Service Mode 3-A2 and output from the HVP3. The HVP3 will output the transfer current for proper media type.

K115sm4ea.doc 4-72

5. If the current from HVP3 does not satisfy the following values, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust the HVP3 current, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the Item No.1C, 1d and 1E. 1C : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (PPC) 1d : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (Tracing) 1E : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (Film)

• Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation] on the page 8-36 for how to change the setting value. • Refer to [(22) Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (No.1C to 1E)] on the page 8-

63 as for the contents of the setting.

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm4ea.doc 4-73

4. 3. 4 Checking & Adjustment of HVP4 (Separation Corona) The standard values of DC Component outputted from HVP4 are as follows. DC Component : Plain paper -250V +/-3V Tracing paper -300V +/-3V Film -10V +/-3V Check and adjust the HVP4 in the following way. 1. Remove the Drum from the machine for the safety. The Drum will be damaged if not removed! 2. To check the DC Component, connect “+” of multi-meter to “R42” or “R43” (either one is OK) and “-” the ground. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 3. Enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and select the Signal Code “A1” (HV_AC : Separation Corona Control Signal).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

VR1

VR2

VR3C

UR

RE

NT

CH

EC

Kblue

blue

white

R42R43


GND

Connect to either R42 or R43.

K115sm4ea.doc 4-74

4) Press the [ENTER] KEY to output from the HVP4. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. (It is required to be careful about the “target media type” of DC Component at this time. See the following NOTE.) Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of DC Component for each media type is as follow. Plain paper -250V +/-3V Tracing paper -300V +/-3V Film -10V +/-3V

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE As known generally, the DC Component (HVP4 output voltage) can be set separately to each media type (plain paper, tracing paper and film). The DC Component current output by Service Mode 3-A1 will target one of 3 media types that was selected at the latest print opportunity. (If tracing paper was used in the latest printing, the DC Component will target the tracing paper if outputted by Service Mode 3-A1.) The target media type can not be changed even if you change the switch selection of Media Type Selector. To change the target media type, do as follows. (1) Select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and select any of Item No.1F, 20 and 21 according to the necessity. (Select “1F” if you will check the DC Component for plain paper for example.) 1F : Separation Corona DC component (PPC) 20 : Separation Corona DC component (Tracing) 21 : Separation Corona DC component (Film) (2) Change and decide the setting value by usual way in the selected Item No. The target media type is changed according to the “target media type” of selected setting item if the value is decided. (If any new value is decided in item “20” (for tracing paper) for example, the target media type applied in Service Mode 3-A1 will change to tracing paper.) (3) Select the Service Mode 3-A1 and output from the HVP4. The HVP4 will output the DC Component for proper media type.

K115sm4ea.doc 4-75

5. If the voltage from HVP4 does not satisfy the following values, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust the HVP4 voltage, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the Item No.1F, 20 and 21. 1F : Separation Corona DC component (PPC) 20 : Separation Corona DC component (Tracing) 21 : Separation Corona DC component (Film)

• Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation] on the page 8-36 for how to change the setting value. • Refer to [(23) Separation Corona DC component (No.1F to 21)] on the page 8-64 as for

the contents of the setting.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm4ea.doc 4-76

4. 3. 5 Checking & Adjustment of HVP5 (Cleaning Roller) The standard value of positive/negative Cleaning Roller Bias outputted from the HVP5 are as follows. Positive Cleaning Roller Bias +800V +/-3V Negative Cleaning Roller Bias -500V +/-3V Check and adjust the HVP5 in the following way. 1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “OUTPUT” pin on the HVP5 and “-” to the ground. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

1

CN

502

1

VR

1V

R2

OU

TP

UT


GND

CN

501

K115sm4ea.doc 4-77

2. Output both positive Cleaning Roller Bias (outputted during Print Cycle) and negative one (outputted during Toner Collection Process). Measure both positive and negative voltages with multi-meter. (Refer to the following NOTE for the way to output both Bias.) The standard value of positive Cleaning Roller Bias and negative one are as follows. Positive Cleaning Roller Bias +800V +/-3V Negative Cleaning Roller Bias -500V +/-3V 3. If the negative Cleaning Roller Bias does not satisfy -500V +-/3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust the negative Cleaning Roller Bias, rotate the VR1 on the HVP5 with a screwdriver.

NOTE The polarity of Cleaning Roller Bias is “positive” normally. (1) To output the positive Cleaning Roller Bias, enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and then select the Signal Code “74” (HV5 : Cleaning Roller Bias Control Signal). Press the [ENTER] Key to output the positive Bias. (2) It is impossible to output the negative Cleaning Roller Bias for checking purpose as the Service Mode does not have such item. Make a print (including test print) and measure the negative Cleaning Roller Bias that is outputted for a short period when the printer is in almost final stage of print cycle. (This is only the way to measure the negative bias.)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

1

CN

502

1

VR

1V

R2

OU

TP

UT


GND

CN

501

K115sm4ea.doc 4-78

4. If the positive Cleaning Roller Bias does not satisfy +800V +-/3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust the positive Cleaning Roller Bias, rotate the VR2 on the HVP5 with a screwdriver.

1

CN

502

1

VR

1V

R2

OU

TP

UT


GND

CN

501

K115sm4ea.doc 4-79

4. 3. 6 Checking & Adjustment of HVP6 (Grid Plate of Image Corona) The standard value of the Grid Bias outputted from HVP6 is -780V +/-20V (About 12.2V on the Test Pin). Check and adjust the HVP6 in the following way. 1. Remove the Drum from the machine for the safety. The Drum will be damaged if not removed! 2. There is a connector “CN501” on the HVP6. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to the white cable (Test Pin) of CN501, which is the 2nd cable from the top of CN501. Connect “-” to the ground. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 3. Enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and select the Signal Code “A6” (HV6 : Grid Bias Control Signal).

VR1

VR2OUTPUT

①

CN501


GND

White cable (Test Pin)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm4ea.doc 4-80

4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Grid Bias from HVP6. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value on the Test Pin is about 12.2V. 5. If the voltage on the test pin (2nd pin on CN501) does not show about 12.2V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust it, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the Item No.1b (Current setting for the Grid Plate).

• Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation] on the page 8-36 for how to change the setting value. • Refer to [(21) Current setting for the Grid Plate (No.1b)] on the page 8-63 as for the

contents of the setting.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm4ea.doc 4-81

6. After re-adjustment, it is necessary to confirm the actual voltage outputted from the “OUTPUT” Pin on the HVP6. To confirm it, connect “+” of the multi-meter to “OUTPUT” and “-“ to the ground. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 7. Select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and select the Signal Code “A0” (HV1 : Image Corona Control Signal). 8. Press the [ENTER] Key to output from HVP6. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of output voltage on “OUTPUT” is -780V +/-20V.

VR1

VR2OUTPUT

①

CN501


GND

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE Do not select the Signal Code “A6” (Grid Bias Control Signal) this time as it outputs only analog voltage WITHOUT outputting high voltage from “OUTPUT” to the Grid Plate. Signal Code “A0” (HV1 : Image Corona Control Signal) is suitable for measurement as it outputs the high voltage to both Image Corona Wire and Grid Plate.

K115sm4ea.doc 4-82

9. If the voltage from HVP6 does not satisfy -780V +/-20V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust the HVP6 voltage, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the Item No.1b.

• Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation] on the page 8-36 for how to change the setting value. • Refer to [(21) Current setting for the Grid Plate (No.1b)] on the page 8-63 as for the

contents of the setting.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm4ea.doc 4-83

4. 3. 7 Checking & Adjustment of BIAS (For Developer Unit) Each roller in the Developer Unit is supplied with its own necessary voltage respectively in the Print Cycle. These kinds of voltage supplied in the Print Cycle are called “Negative Developer Bias”. The following list shows the value of “Negative Developer Bias” to each roller.

Supplied to ; Voltage (Against the ground)

Voltage (Against the voltage of Developer Roller)

Output Pin on the BIAS

Adjustment VR on the BIAS

Developer Roller -250V +/-3V - Output 2 - (Service Mode)

Toner Supply Roller - -350 +/-3V Output 1 VR8 Regulation Roller (Center) - -100V +/-3V Output 3 VR6 Regulation Roller (Side) - +365V +/-3V Output 4 VR4

On the other hand, each of these rollers is supplied with its own necessary voltage respectively in the Toner Collection Process, which is different from the voltage supplied in the Print Cycle. These voltages supplied in the Toner Collection Process are called “Positive Developer Bias”. The following list shows the value of “Positive Developer Bias” to each roller.

Supplied to ; Voltage (Against the ground)

Voltage (Against the voltage of Developer Roller)

Supplied from ; (Output Pin on the BIAS)

Adjustment VR (VR on the BIAS)

Developer Roller +350V +/-3V - Output 2 VR1 Toner Supply Roller - -350V +/-3V Output 1 VR7 Regulation Roller (Center) - -100V +/-3V Output 3 VR5 Regulation Roller (Side) - +365V +/-5V Output 4 VR3

Regulation Roller (Side) Regulation Roller (Center) Developer Roller Toner Supply Roller

K115sm4ea.doc 4-84

4. 3. 7. 1 Negative Developer Bias adjustment (Print Cycle) (1) Negative Developer Bias for Developer Roller The standard value of Negative Developer Bias outputted to the Developer Roller is -250V +/-3V against the ground when the Auto Density Control is set to OFF. Developer Roller Check and adjust it in the following way. 1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 2” on the BIAS and “-“ to the ground. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


GND

K115sm4ea.doc 4-85

2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and select the Item No.CA (Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias). If this item is set to “1” (Variable control), set it to “0” (Constant control) before starting the adjustment. 3. Select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.8 (Developer Bias [Negative] Adjustment Mode). 4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of Developer Unit. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller is -250V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE If No.CA is set to “1”, the Bias is occasionally adjusted to the best value according to the temperature detected by the temperature sensor. (between 10 to 20 degrees centigrade) This situation is not suitable when the output from the BIAS PCB is to be checked. The Bias will be always same regardless of the temperature if No.CA is set to “0”, which is suitable for checking.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm4ea.doc 4-86

5. If the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to Developer Roller does not satisfy -250V +/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust it, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the Item No.19 (Developer Bias).

• Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation] on the page 8-36 for how to change the setting value. • Refer to [(19) Developer Bias (applied when Auto Density Control is set to OFF) (No.19)]

on the page 8-62 as for the contents of the setting.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

CAUTION Do not adjust the Negative Developer Bias by rotating the VR2 on BIAS positively as it is properly adjusted before shipment!

K115sm4ea.doc 4-87

(2) Negative Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller The standard value of Negative Developer Bias outputted to the Toner Supply Roller is -350V +/-3V against the Negative Developer Bias of Developer Roller. Toner Supply Roller Check and adjust it in the following way. 1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 1” on the BIAS and “-“ to the “Output 2”. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-88

2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and select the Item No.CA (Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias). If this item is set to “1” (Variable control), set it to “0” (Constant control) before starting the adjustment. 3. Select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.8 (Developer Bias [Negative] Adjustment Mode). 4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of Developer Unit. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller is -350V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm4ea.doc 4-89

5. If the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to Toner Supply Roller does not satisfy -350V +/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust it, rotate the VR8 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-90

(3) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center) The standard value of Negative Developer Bias supplied to the Regulation Roller (Center) is -100V +/-3V against the Negative Developer Bias of Developer Roller. Regulation Roller (Center) Check and adjust it in the following way. 1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 3” on the BIAS and “-“ to the “Output 2”. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-91

2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and select the Item No.CA (Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias). If this item is set to “1” (Variable control), set it to “0” (Constant control) before starting the adjustment. 3. Select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.8 (Developer Bias [Negative] Adjustment Mode). 4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of Developer Unit. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Regulation Roller (Center) is -100V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm4ea.doc 4-92

5. If the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to Regulation Roller (Center) does not satisfy -100V +/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust it, rotate the VR6 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-93

(4) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Side) The standard value of Negative Developer Bias supplied to Regulation Roller (Side) is +365V +/-3V against the Negative Developer Bias of the Developer Roller. Regulation Roller (Side) Check and adjust it in the following way. 1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 4” on the BIAS and “-“ to the “Output 2”. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-94

2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and select the Item No.CA (Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias). If this item is set to “1” (Variable control), set it to “0” (Constant control) before starting the adjustment. 3. Select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.8 (Developer Bias [Negative] Adjustment Mode). 4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of Developer Unit. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Regulation Roller (Side) is +365V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm4ea.doc 4-95

5. If the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to the Regulation Roller (Side) does not satisfy +365V +/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust it, rotate the VR4 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-96

4. 3. 7. 2 Positive Developer Bias adjustment (Toner Collection Process) (1) Positive Developer Bias for Developer Roller The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Developer Roller is +350V +/-3V against the ground. Developer Roller Check and adjust it in the following way. 1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 2” on the BIAS and “-“ to the ground. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


GND

K115sm4ea.doc 4-97

2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.7 (Developer Bias [Positive] Adjustment Mode). 3. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of Developer Unit. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller is +350V +/-3V. 4. If the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to Developer Roller does not satisfy +350V +/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust it, rotate the VR1 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


GND

K115sm4ea.doc 4-98

(2) Positive Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Toner Supply Roller is -350V +/-3V against the Positive Developer Bias of the Developer Roller. Toner Supply Roller Check and adjust it in the following way. 1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 1” on the BIAS and “-“ to the “Output 2”. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-99

2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.7 (Developer Bias [Positive] Adjustment Mode). 3. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of Developer Unit. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Toner Supply Roller is -350V +/-3V. 4. If the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to Toner Supply Roller does not satisfy -350V +/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust it, rotate the VR7 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-100

(3) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center) The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Regulation Roller (Center) is -100V +/-3V against the Positive Developer Bias of the Developer Roller. Regulation Roller (Center) Check and adjust it in the following way. 1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 3” on the BIAS and “-“ to the “Output 2”. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-101

2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.7 (Developer Bias [Positive] Adjustment Mode). 3. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of Developer Unit. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Regulation Roller (Center) is -100V +/-3V. 4. If the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to the Regulation Roller (Center) does not satisfy -100V +/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust it, rotate the VR5 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-102

(4) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Side) The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Regulation Roller (Side) is +365V +/-5V against the Positive Developer Bias of the Developer Roller. Regulation Roller (Side) Check and adjust it in the following way. 1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 4” on the BIAS and “-“ to the “Output 2”. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-103

2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.7 (Developer Bias [Positive] Adjustment Mode). 3. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of Developer Unit. Measure the voltage with multi-meter. Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished. Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Regulation Roller (Side) is +365V +/-5V. 4. If the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to the Regulation Roller (Side) does not satisfy +365V +/-5V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement. To adjust it, rotate the VR3 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3Output 4

VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5

CN401 CN402 CN4031 1 1


K115sm4ea.doc 4-104

4. 4 Compensation of Analog Outputs by Service Mode 4-0d (Necessary after replacing DCP2) This operation is needed only after replacing the DC Power Supply 2 (DCP2). [Technical operation] The Main Controller PCB needs to be supplied with 5Vdc from the DC Power Supply 2 (DCP2), but in actual case there are many cases that the power from DCP2 to Main Controller PCB is lower than 5Vdc (as “4.99Vdc” or “4.98Vdc”). In such case the Analog Outputs from the High Voltage Power Supplies (HVP1-6) and Bias Power Supply (BIAS) are very slightly smaller than what they are needed to be. The Service Mode 4-0d (Compensation of Analog Outputs) compensates those Analog Outputs to the needed levels automatically. For example if the current actual input to Main Control PCB is “4.98V” and it is input to the Service Mode 4-0d, the KIP9000 firmware takes an internal process to “increase” the actual input (4.98Vdc) to the needed input (5Vdc), and the Analog Outputs from HVP (1-6) and BIAS are increased as well consequently. The input voltage to Main Control PCB has been measured and correctly input to the Service Mode 4-0d before shipment. If the DC Power Supply 2 (DCP2) is replaced in the field, it is required to measure the actual input and input to the Service Mode 4-0d. (KIP9000 firmware takes necessary compensation automatically if only the actual value of input voltage is set on 4-0d.) [Operation] 1. Find J-201 on the Main Controller PCB, and measure the DC voltage between J201-3 (yellow) and J201-4 (blue) with multi-meter. This is the actual input voltage to Main Controller PCB. 2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.0), and select the Sub Mode No.0d. Input the actual value input voltage to Main Controller PCB.

J-201

J201-4

J201-3

K115sm4eb.doc 4-105

4. 5 Location of Connectors

4. 5. 1 Process Unit

J46

J181J178J92

J313 J314J312J311J302J303

J301

J56J179

J180

J182

J183

K115sm4eb.doc 4-106

4. 5. 2 Base of machine

J17 J18J7

J15 J16J8

K115sm4eb.doc 4-107

4. 5. 3 Back of machine

J 3-2B

J 3-2A

J3-1B

J 3-1A

J 72

J127

J 137J 136

J 901A

J 135J134

CN1D CN2D

CN1E CN2E

J13RY6-0

RY6-1

J 155

J 19 J 9

RY6-4 RY6-5

RY6-6 RY6-8

J52J341C

J911

RY1-2RY1-4RY1-6RY1-8

RY1-0

RY1-1


RY2-0

RY2-1

RY3-0

RY3-1

J 6


TB151B

TB150B

TB152BTB153B

TB154B

TB151A

TB150A

TB152ATB153A

TB154A

TB112TB113

TB111TB110

J 27

CN2G

CN 1G

J 241J242

J 244

J 172

RY7-3 RY7-4

RY7-5RY7-1

K115sm4eb.doc 4-108

4. 5. 4 Top of machine

J29 J125 J30 J126

J91

J28

J31

J66

J94

J63J84

CN1J

TB581

J581

J557J556

J555J558

J554

J552J551

J85

CN2FCN3F CN1F CN1A

J67

J710

CN1CCN2C

CN3C

J571

J59

J58

J97J60

J87

OUT

CN501ACN502A

J138

J158A

J86

J902

J901

CN2Z

CN1Z

J573A

J571A

J572A

K115sm4eb.doc 4-109

4. 5. 5 Left side of machine

J24

J2 J3J1 J21

J51 J53

SSR2-1SSR2-2SSR2-3SSR2-4

SSR1-4SSR1-3SSR1-2 SSR1-1

CN1B

CN301

J40

J45

J154

CN2I

CN1I

J12

S2-2 S2-1

CN501

M10-1 M10-2

CN2

CN3CN1

CN401 CN403CN402

J562

J159

J561

J563

J253

J252

J251

J8J158

CN2HCN1H

J39 J38

J37J36

J44

J41

J47

J62J35

J160

J56

J26

J402

J102J103TB101

J104

J101J106

J107

CB1-1b

CB1-2b

CB1-2a

CB1-1a

TB1-N

TB1-L

J7

J173

K115sm4eb.doc 4-110

4. 5. 6 Right side of machine

DS3-COM

DS3-NO

DS4-COMDS4-NO

J96

J25

J5 J4

J95

J32

J69UI-INUI-OUT

RY4-1

RY4-2RY4-3

RY4-6

RY4-5 RY4-4

RY5-3RY5-2RY5-1

RY5-6

RY5-5RY5-4

J721J992J993

J994J991

J801A

J201J214 J801 J802

J203

J64

J202

J204

J205

J206

J207J65

J208

J209 J210J211

J216

J54

J55

J803

J215

J212

J71

J48

J34

J33

J49DS2-NO

DS2-COMDS1-NO

DS1-COM

J70

J98 J99

J700DS5-NODS5-COM

J501

J158

J701C

J157

J701B

J701A J156

DS6-NODS6-COM

177 177A

J176A

J176

F5 F6 F7 F8-2

-1

-2

-1

-2

-1

-2

-1

J161

J174

K115sm4eb.doc 4-111

4. 5. 7 Bypass Feeder Unit

J67

J901J902

J148J147J146J145J144J143

J140

J142

K115sm4eb.doc 4-112

4. 5. 8 Top Drawer Unit

J43 J42

J88A J92A J90A J89A J68 J73 J91A J93A J972AJ971A

J94AJ70

J11

J74 J751A

J175

K115sm4eb.doc 4-113

4. 5. 9 Middle Drawer Unit

J90B J88B J76 J89B J91B J92B J93B J94BJ71

J751B

J77

J971BJ972B

J10

K115sm4eb.doc 4-114

4. 5.10 Bottom Drawer Unit

J971DJ972D J72

J971CJ972C

J75D

J83

J94DJ93DJ92DJ91DJ89DJ82J88DJ90D

J94CJ93CJ92CJ91CJ89CJ79J88CJ90C

J80

J751C

K115sm5e1.doc 5-1

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems Page 5.1 Process Unit 5- 3 5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit 5- 3 5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit 5- 6 5.1.3 Replacing Eraser Lamp A & B 5-11 5.1.4 Replacing Separation Assist Blowers (BL12 to BL16) 5-12 5.1.5 Replacing Developer Unit Position Sensor (PH25) 5-13 5.2 Image Corona 5-15 5.2.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Image Corona (Corona Wire 1 Assembly, Grid Plate & Wire Cleaning Units) 5-15 5.2.2 Replacing Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) 5-20 5.3 Drum Assembly 5-21 5.3.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Drum Assembly (Photo Conductive Drum & 178T Gear) 5-21 5.4 Toner Hopper 5-23 5.4.1 Replacing Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1) 5-23 5.5 Developer Unit 5-24 5.5.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Developer Unit 5-24 5.5.2 Replacing Toner Sensor (Illuminator) 5-43 5.5.3 Replacing Toner Sensor (Receiver) 5-46 5.6 Cutter Unit 5-47 5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit 5-47 5.6.2 Replacing Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (SL2) 5-49 5.6.3 Lubrication / Replacement of Stay Assembly 5-51 5.6.4 Adjusting Home Position of Cutter Blade 5-53 5.6.5 Adjusting angle of Cutter Unit 5-56 5.7 Fuser 5-58 5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit 5-58 5.7.2 Replacing IR Lamps & Fuser Roller 5-62 5.7.3 Replacing Pressure Roller 5-70 5.7.4 Replacing Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & BL3) 5-75 5.7.5 Replacing Thermistor 5-78 5.7.6 Replacing Thermostat 5-81 5.7.7 Replacing Stripper Finger Assemblies 5-84 5.7.8 Replacing Separation Fingers 5-86 5.7.9 Replacing Exit Sensor (LS2) 5-90 5.7.10 Replacing Pressure Blowers (BL4 to BL7) 5-92 5.8 Roll Decks 5-95 5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck 5-95 5.8.2 Replacing Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) & Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (MC8) (1st Roll Deck) 5-96 5.8.3 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1), Paper Size Sensors (PH5A to PH11A) & Bypass Start Sensor (PH20) (1st deck) 5-97 5.8.4 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 2 (PH2) & Paper Size Sensors (PH5B to PH11B) (2nd deck) 5-100

K115sm5e1.doc 5-2

5.8.5 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 3 (PH3) & Paper Size Sensors (PH5C to PH11C) (3rd deck) 5-103 5.8.6 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 4 (PH4) & Paper Size Sensors (PH5D to PH11D) (4th deck) 5-107 5.8.7 Replacing Paper Feed Clock Sensors (PH13 to PH16) (Common for all decks) 5-112 5.8.8 Replacing 501-3M Belt (Common for all decks) 5-115 5.8.9 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (1st & 2nd decks) 5-117 5.8.10 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (3rd & 4th decks) 5-119 5.8.11 Replacing Spool Brake 5-121 5.9 Bypass Feeder 5-122 5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit 5-122 5.9.2 Replacing Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (SL4) 5-123 5.9.3 Replacing Cut Sheet Set Sensor (PH31) & Cut Sheet Size Sensors (PH32 to PH37) 5-125 5.9.4 Replacing Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (SL3) 5-128 5.10 Internal Transportation Unit 5-132 5.10.1 Replacing Belt 2 5-132 5.10.2 Replacing Separation Sensor (PH18) 5-136 5.10.3 Removing Internal Transportation Unit 5-140 5.11 Transfer / Separation Corona 5-151 5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona 5-151 5.11.2 Replacing Corona Wire 2 Assemblies 5-153 5.11.3 Replacing Mylar 5-158 5.11.4 Adjustment of gap between Drum & Corona Housing 5 5-159 5.12 LED Head 5-165 5.12.1 Removing LED Head 5-165 5.12.2 Replacing Pad Assembly 2 5-170 5.12.3 Replacing LED Cleaning Motor (M8) 5-171 5.13 Main Frame 5-172 5.13.1 Replacing Drum Motor (M1) & Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 5-172 5.13.2 Replacing Paper Feed Motor (M2) 5-181 5.13.3 Replacing Fuser Motor (M5) 5-183 5.13.4 Replacing Developer Positioning Motor (M4) 5-187 5.13.5 Replacing Cutter Motor (M3), Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22) & Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (PH24) 5-188 5.13.6 Replacing Bypass Feeding Motor (M10) 5-195 5.13.7 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6) 5-201 5.13.8 Replacing Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10) 5-203 5.13.9 Replacing Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) & Paper Feed Brake (MC9) 5-206 5.13.10 Replacing Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) 5-210 5.13.11 Replacing SSR1 and SSR2 5-212 5.13.12 Replacing LED Cooling Fans (BL8 to BL11) 5-215 5.13.13 Replacing Leading Edge Sensor (PH12) 5-217 5.13.14 Replacing Pre-transfer LED 5-220 5.13.15 Adjustment of gap between Drum & Transfer Guide Plate 5-223 5.13.16 Replacing Ozone Filters 5-229 5.13.17 Replacing Separation Fan (BL1) 5-231 5.14 Toner Cartridge Driving Part 5-234 5.14.1 Replacing Transmission PCB (PW7750) & Receiver PCB (PW7751) 5-234 5.14.2 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7) & Toner Supply Clutch (MC11) 5-238 5.15 Web (Option) 5-247 5.15.1 Replacement of Web Roll 5-247 5.15. 2 Installation of Web Kit 5-254

K115sm5e2.doc 5-3

5.1 Process Unit

5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit 1) Open the Toner Cover (1) and the Toner Cartridge Cover (2). 2) Rotate the Toner Cartridge (3) half revolution to move the opening (4) to the top position. Then, close both Toner Cover (1) and Toner Cartridge Cover (2).

1

2

NOTE There is a Shutter under the opening (4). Even if you draw out the Process Unit without moving the opening (4) to the top, it will catch the spilt toner. But if too much toner is caught, it will spill into the machine in the end. Please do not forget to move the opening to the top.

3

4

K115sm5e2.doc 5-4

3) Open the Right Side Door (5). 4) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (6) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (7) counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (8). 5) Remove 4 pieces of black M4x14 screws (9) which are inside of Sponges.

5

7

6

8

9

9

NOTE Even if you remove black M4x14 screws (9), sponges will hold them so as not to lose.

K115sm5e2.doc 5-5

6) Hold both Handles (10) firmly, and draw out the Process Unit (11) from the machine.

10

11

K115sm5e2.doc 5-6

5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit 1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3. 2) Disconnect the connector (2), remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (3), and then remove the Image Corona (4) holding both plastic corona heads (5).

1

2

3

3

5

4

K115sm5e2.doc 5-7

3) Catch the shaft of Cleaning Roller (6), bring it up (bring up driving side first then driven side) to remove the bearings (7) from the brackets. As there are notches (8) near the setting position, fit the bearings (7) to put the Cleaning Roller (6) temporarily. (Driving side) (Driven side)

668

7

8 7

NOTE Please put back the Cleaning Roller to the setting position before you close the Process Unit. If you close the unit without putting back the roller, roller will touch the plate and its surface will be broken!

K115sm5e2.doc 5-8

4) Catching both sides, move the Drum Assembly (9) upward along the Drum Guide in the Process Unit and remove from the machine. Keep the Drum Assembly in the Package Box if it should be out of the machine for a long time. Or stand it on the attached Drum Stand (10) temporarily if you put it back within a short time. 5) Disconnect the connector (11) of the Hopper Toner Sensor.

9

10

9

11

K115sm5e2.doc 5-9

6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (12), and then bring up and remove the Toner Hopper (13). 7) Disconnect the connector (14) of the Developer Toner Sensor.

12

12

13

13

NOTE There are many holes on the bottom of the Toner Hopper and the toner will spill out. Please lay a large paper under the Process Unit before you remove the Toner Hopper.

14

K115sm5e2.doc 5-10

8) Remove 2 pieces of Developer Release Brackets (15) removing 1 tooth washer screw (16) for each one. 9) Holding black side plates (17) on both sides, bring up and remove the Developer Unit (18).

15

16

17

18

18

K115sm5e2.doc 5-11

5.1.3 Replacing Eraser Lamp A & B 1) Remove each Image Corona (1), Cleaning Roller (2) and Drum Assembly (3) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 2) Disconnect 2 connectors (4), remove 6 pieces of bind head screws (5) and remove both Eraser Lamps A & B (6). Replace Eraser Lamps A & B (6) with the new ones.

1

2

3

4 45 5 6

NOTE Do not put the Cleaning Roller (2) temporarily on the Process Unit, but please remove it completely and put it on the paper.

K115sm5e2.doc 5-12

5.1.4 Replacing Separation Assist Blowers (BL12 to BL16) 1) Remove each Image Corona (1), Cleaning Roller (2) and Drum Assembly (3) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 2) Disconnect the connector (4), remove 2 pieces of bind head screws (5) and remove each Separation Assist Blower (6). Replace the Separation Assist Blower (6) with the new one.

1

2

3

NOTE Do not put the Cleaning Roller (2) temporarily on the Process Unit, but please remove it completely and put it on the paper.

4

5 6

K115sm5e2.doc 5-13

5.1.5 Replacing Developer Unit Position Sensor (PH25) 1) Remove each Image Corona (1), Drum Assembly (2), Toner Hopper (3) and Developer Unit (4) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 2) Disconnect the connector (5) in the Process Unit. 3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screws (6) out of the Process Unit to remove the Bracket 102 (7) with the sensor.

12

3 4

5

6 7 7

K115sm5e2.doc 5-14

4) Press and release the Stoppers (8), and then remove the Developer Unit Position Sensor (9). Replace the Developer Unit Position Sensor (9).

8

9

K115sm5e2.doc 5-15

5.2 Image Corona

5.2.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Image Corona (Corona Wire 1 Assembly, Grid Plate & Wire Cleaning Units) 1) Remove the Image Corona (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6.

NOTE Image Corona has the following Periodical Replacement parts. Corona Wire 1 Assembly (2 pieces) 100,000m Grid Plate (1 piece) 100,000m Wire Cleaning Unit (2 pieces) 100,000m This section instructs you to replace all of these parts as one sequent work.

1 1

K115sm5e2.doc 5-16

2) Pick the lever of each Wire Cleaning Unit (2) to release, move the unit as the arrow mark and remove from the Image Corona. Replace the Wire Cleaning Units (2) with the new ones.

2

2

NOTE After installing the new Wire Cleaning Unit, confirm the Corona Wire is caught between pads of Wire Cleaning Unit, and also the Corona Wire is straight. If the Corona Wire is out of pads or if it is bent, it will exert a bad effect on the image quality as the height of Corona Wire is not correct. Pads

K115sm5e2.doc 5-17

3) Loosen 5 pieces of screws (3) to remove each Bracket 220 (4). 4) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screws (5) on the motor side to remove the Electrode Plate (6). 5) Remove the Grid Spring (7) to remove the Hook (8).

3

4

4

5

6 6

7

8

8

7

K115sm5e2.doc 5-18

6) Remove the Grid Plate (9) and replace it with the new one 7) Remove the Pan Head Screw (10) to remove the Front Housing Cover (11) on the motor side.

NOTE Grid Plate has flat plate areas at both sides, and one side is wider than the other side. This wider side must be installed on the spring side of the Image Corona. (You do not have to care about front / back.) Wide Narrow

9

10

11

11

K115sm5e2.doc 5-19

8) Remove the Pan Head Screw (12) to remove the Rear Housing Cover (13). 9) Remove Springs (14), and then remove each Corona Wire 1 Assembly (15). Replace the Corona Wire 1 Assemblies (20) with the new ones.

12 13 13

14 15 15

NOTE When you stretch the new Corona Wire 1 Assembly, make sure to fit its anti-vibration bead (16) into the necessary space in the Corona Heads, and also make sure to fit the wire into the grooves (17).

17

16

17

K115sm5e2.doc 5-20

5.2.2 Replacing Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) 1) Remove the Image Corona (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 2) Expanding the Hooks (2) outward, remove the Motor Cover (3). 3) Remove the Wire Cleaning Motor (4).

1 1

2

3 3

4

NOTE Please direct the label face outward when you put back the Wire Cleaning Motor.

K115sm5e2.doc 5-21

5.3 Drum Assembly

5.3.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Drum Assembly (Photo Conductive Drum & 178T Gear) 1) Remove the Drum Assembly (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. Stand the removed Drum Assembly on the attached Drum Stand (2) with its gear side down. 2) Remove 3 pieces of hexagon head bolt (3) to remove the Flange B (4).

1

1

2

NOTE Drum Assembly has the following Periodical Replacement parts. Photo Conductive Drum (1 piece) 200,000m 178T Gear (1 piece) 500,000m This section instructs you to replace all of these parts as one sequent work.

3

3

4

K115sm5e2.doc 5-22

3) Turn over the Drum Assembly to make the gear side up. 4) Pull out the Stay Assembly (5) from the Photo Conductive Drum (6). Replace the Photo Conductive Drum (6) with the new one. 5) Remove 3 pieces of each hexagon head cap screw (7) and spring washer (8) to remove the 178T Gear (9). Replace the 178T Gear with the new one.

56

7

79

8

79

K115sm5e2.doc 5-23

5.4 Toner Hopper

5.4.1 Replacing Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1) 1) Remove the Toner Hopper (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the Hopper Toner Sensor (3). Replace the Hopper Toner Sensor (3) with the new one.

1

2

3

3

K115sm5e3.doc 5-24

5.5 Developer Unit

5.5.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Developer Unit 1) Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the Process Unit seeing [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6.

NOTE (1) The following Periodical Replacement Parts are included in the Developer Unit. Developer Roller 1 piece Bracket 581 1 Counter Roller 2 Side Seal 4 Side Seal 12 3 Seal 13 2 Seal 14 2 Seal 19 2 Seal 555 2 Seal 18 1 Seal 17 1 Seal 15 1 Seal 16 1 This section instructs you to replace all of these parts as one sequent work. (2) Remove all the toner from the Developer Unit before replacing the above parts.

1 1

K115sm5e3.doc 5-25

2) Remove 4 M4x8 tooth washer screws (2) to remove the Stay 1 (3).

2 2

3

NOTE When installing the Stay 1 (3), tighten the screws (2) with pressing Stay 1 in the direction of arrow to contact the cleaning blade surely to the Regulation Roller.

K115sm5e3.doc 5-26

3) Remove 7 M4x6 tooth washer screws (4) to remove the Bracket 581 (5) and the Holder Spring (6). Replace the Bracket 581 (7) with the new one.

NOTE (1) The rubber plate of the Bracket 581 (5) touches the Regulation Roller and scrapes off the toner. Please provide a little toner onto the edge of rubber plate when you install the new Bracket 581 (5), as it can reduce the friction between rubber plate and Regulation Roller. If you do not, the rubber plate may be turned over by the friction and may be broken. (2) Screw holes of the Bracket 581 (5) are oval. Please tighten the screws (4) at the center of each oval hole. If not tightened at the center (Bracket 581 is shifted to either side), the rubber plate may be bent because it touches the Developer Side Plate, which results in a poor cleaning. (3) Before putting back the Developer Unit to the Process Unit, please confirm that the rubber plate of Bracket 581 (5) surely scrapes off the toner from the Regulation Roller. Also, please confirm the rubber plate is not turned over by the friction even if you rotate the Regulation Roller.

4 4

5

6

Rubber plate

K115sm5e3.doc 5-27

4) Remove 7 M4x6 tooth washer screws (7) to remove the Guide Plate 1 (8).

7

7

8

K115sm5e3.doc 5-28

5) Remove 3 M4x6 bind screws (9) to remove the Terminal Cover (10). 6) Remove 2 M4x10 bind screws (11), Insulation Collars (12), Insulation Collars 3 (13), and Bracket 500 (14). 7) Remove 3 M3x12 bind screws (15), Bias Terminal 4 (16), Bias Terminal 3 (17), 3 Collars (18) and 3 Collars (19)

9

9

10

11 11

12

1314

NOTE Install the Collars (18) and (19) as the right.

15

16

17

18

19

16

17

18

19

K115sm5e3.doc 5-29

8) Remove the C Ring (20), 56T Gear (21), Parallel Pin (22) and Counter Roller (23). Replace the Counter Roller (23) with the new one. 9) Remove the Stud (24), M4x10 screw (25), M4x12 screw (26) to remove the Guide Bracket (27).

22

23

21

20

NOTE When reassemble, install Counter Roller in proper direction. The face with 6 bosses should be installed inside of Developer Unit. Bosses Bosses

25

24

26

27

K115sm5e3.doc 5-30

10) Remove the Thrust Washer (28), C Ring (29), 22T Gear (30) and Sliding Key (31). 11) Remove the C Ring (32), 33T Gear (33), Parallel Pin (34) and Collar (35). 12) Remove the Thrust Washer (36), 2 Ball Bearings (37) and Double Gear 39-33 (38).

29

28

3031

30

2928

35

32

34

33

37

36

38

38

K115sm5e3.doc 5-31

13) Remove the C Ring (39) and Counter Roller (40). Replace the Counter Roller (40) with the new one. 14) Remove 2 M4x6 tooth washer screws (41) and Plate (42).


39

40

41 42

K115sm5e3.doc 5-32

15) Remove the Thrust Washer (43), Double Gear 34-18 (44) and 2 Ball Bearings (45) & (46). 16) Remove M5x12 Hexagon Bolt (47), 29T Gear (48) and Thrust Washers (49). 17) Remove the E Ring (50), 30T Gear (51) and Parallel Pin (52). 18) Remove the Spring 2 (53), M4x8 tooth washer screws (54), M3x5 bind screw (55), Stud (56) and 2 M4x6 tooth washer screws (57).

43

44

46

4543

44

43

48

49

48

50

52

5151

54

5655

53 57

K115sm5e3.doc 5-33

19) Remove both Blade Arm B (58) and Bracket 9 (59) together. 20) Replace the Seal 555 (60) with the new one, which is on the Bracket 9 (59). 21) Remove the Stud (61) to make the Bias Terminal Lead (62) free. 22) Remove 3 M4x6 bind screws (63) and Bracket 8 (64) together with its inside bearing.

59

58

5958

60

61

62

62

63

64

63

K115sm5e3.doc 5-34

23) Replace the Seal 555 (65) with the new one, which is on the Bracket 6 (64). 24) Remove the Spring 1 (66), C Ring (67) and Thrust Washer (68). 25) Remove the M4x16 bind screw (69), M4x6 bind screw (70) and Plate 2 (71). 26) Remove the M3x5 bind screw (72), M4x6 bind screw (73), Collar 4 (74) and Blade Arm A (75).

65

67

66

6867

66

69

71

70

71

75

74

7372

75

K115sm5e3.doc 5-35

27) Holding the shafts on both sides, move each Developer Roller (76) and Regulation Roller (77) along the guides, and remove them from the unit. Replace the Developer Roller (76) with the new one.

76

77

76

77

NOTE (1) When installing the Developer Roller (76) and Regulation Roller back to the developer unit, place their longer shaft to the driving side (left side) of unit. (See next page as some more notes are described.)

K115sm5e3.doc 5-36

NOTE If the Development Roller or Regulation Roller is installed incorrectly, the Seal 13 and Seal 14 on the Developer Side Plate may be deformed abnormally, which will cause spilling out of the toner from the unit. To avoid spilling out of toner, place each roller to its own installation position then bring it up and down once to get rid of the deform of seals. Seal 13 Seal 14 Wrong installation (Seals are deformed.) Good installation

K115sm5e3.doc 5-37

28) Strip off each seal from the inside of Developer Left Side Plate, clean the surface, and paste new seals. See NOTE on page 5-39 as there are some points you need to take care. Seal 16 (78) Seal 19 (79) Seal 17 (80) Seal 13 (81) Seal 14 (82) Side Seal (83)

78 79 80

81

83

82

78 79 80

81

83

82

K115sm5e3.doc 5-38

29) Strip off each seal from the inside of Developer Right Side Plate, clean the surface, and paste new seals. See NOTE on page 5-39 as there are some points you need to take care. Seal 15 (84) Seal 19 (85) Seal 18 (86) Seal 13 (87) Seal 14 (88) Side Seal (89)

848586

87

89

88

86 85 84

87

89

88

K115sm5e3.doc 5-39

NOTE (1) There is a projection beside the installation position of Regulation Roller. Align the edge of this projection with the ends of Seal 13 and Seal 14. It is no problem even if another ends of Seal 13 ad Seal 14 are not aligned with each other. (2) When pasting the Seal 13, put it on the Seal 14 without stripping off the protection paper, place it at its correct position, strip off the protection paper to reveal the sticky face, and firmly paste it onto the Seal 14. (There is very small space between “triangle” and Seal 14. If you strip off the protection paper first then try to set the Seal 13, it will be very difficult to place the Seal 13 correctly as the “triangle” forces the sticky side of Seal 13 to contact on the Seal 14.) Place the Seal 13 at the correct position first. After that strip off the protection paper. Seal 13

Align here.

Projection

Not necessary to align here.

Triangle

Seal 14

K115sm5e3.doc 5-40

NOTE (3) Paste the Seal 13 and Seal 14 first, and paste the Seal 19 with taking care not to have any space between Seal 13 and Seal 19. (4) Do not paste the new Side Seals (83 & 89) at this point of time. It will be better to paste them after reassembling the Developer Unit completely. (5) When pasting the Side Seals (83 & 89), align their short edges with each inside faces of the roller guide.

Seal 14

Seal 13

Seal 19

Have no space

Have no space

8389

83 & 89

83 & 89

Align here

K115sm5e3.doc 5-41

30) Remove the Ball Bearing (90) and 2 pieces of Side Seal 12 (91) on the left. Replace the Side Seals 12 (91) with the new ones.

9190

90

NOTE (1) 2 pieces of Side Seal 12 are used on the left of unit. (2) Push in the 1st one to the deepest position using something like a stick. (3) Then fit the 2nd one. (4) After fitting the 2nd one, move the roller shaft up and down several times. The Side Seals 12 are automatically placed into their correct installation positions.

K115sm5e3.doc 5-42

31) Remove the C Ring (92), Ball Bearing (93) and 1 piece of Side Seal 12 (94) on the right. Replace the Side Seal 12 (94) with the new ones.

NOTE (1) 1 piece of Side Seal 12 is used on the right of unit. (2) After fitting the Side Seal 12, move the roller shaft up and down several times. The Side Seal 12 is automatically placed into its correct installation positions.

94

92

93

K115sm5e3.doc 5-43

5.5.2 Replacing Toner Sensor (Illuminator) 1) Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 2) Remove 3 M4x6 bind screws (2) to remove the Terminal Cover (3). 3) Remove 2 M4x10 bind screws (4), Insulation Collars (5), Insulation Collars 3 (6), and Bracket 500 (7).

1 1

2

2

3

4 4

5

67

K115sm5e3.doc 5-44

4) Remove 3 M3x12 bind screws (8), Bias Terminal 4 (9), Bias Terminal 3 (10), 3 Collars (11) and 3 Collars (12) 5) Remove the C Ring (13), 56T Gear (14), Parallel Pin (15) and Counter Roller (16).

NOTE Install the Collars (18) and (19) as the right.

10

11

12

10

11

12

15

16

14

13


8

9

9

K115sm5e3.doc 5-45

6) Remove the Stud (17), M4x10 screw (18), M4x12 screw (19) to remove the Guide Bracket (20). 7) Remove 2 M3x5 bind screws (21) and disconnect the connector (22) 8) Remove the M3x8 flush head screw (23), and replace the Toner Sensor (24) with the new one.

18

17

19

20

21

22

23

24

K115sm5e3.doc 5-46

5.5.3 Replacing Toner Sensor (Receiver) 1) Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 2) Remove 2 M3x5 bind screws (2) to remove the Sensor Bracket (3). 3) Remove the M3x8 flush head screw (4), and replace the Toner Sensor (5) with the new one.

1 1

2

3

5

4

K115sm5e4.doc 5-47

5.6 Cutter Unit

5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit 1) Open the Right Side Door. 2) Remove the Bolt (2) which fixes the Cutter Unit from the bottom, and also remove Washer (3), Collar (4) and Spring (5).

1

2

2

3

4

5

K115sm5e4.doc 5-48

3) Disconnect the connector (6) of the Solenoid. 4) Catching the Cutter Handle (7), bring up the Cutter Unit (8) a little and pull it out from the machine.

6

7

8

8

K115sm5e4.doc 5-49

5.6.2 Replacing Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (SL2) 1) Remove the Cutter Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit] on the page 5-47. 2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2), release the wire from the Mini Clamp (3), and remove the Stopper (4).

1

1

3

2

4

4

NOTE When you put back the Stopper (4), tighten the screws (2) pressing the Stopper (4) toward the arrow mark.

K115sm5e4.doc 5-50

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Solenoid Mount Plate (6). 4) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (7) to remove the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (8). Replace the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (8) with the new one.

5

6

7

8

NOTE Fit the boss (9) of the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid to the hole (10) of the Solenoid Mount Plate. Fit the boss to the hole.

910

K115sm5e4.doc 5-51

5.6.3 Lubrication / Replacement of Stay Assembly 1) Remove the Cutter Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit] on the page 5-47. 2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the Lower Paper Guide Plate (3).

1

1

NOTE Lubricate the Stay Assembly every 6 months. Use the sewing machine oil for lubrication.

2 3 2 3

3

K115sm5e4.doc 5-52

3) Remove 1 piece of E Ring (E3) (4) on the handle side. Remove E Ring (E5) (5) and Oilless Metals (6) at both sides to remove the Supporting Shaft 1 (7). As you will find the Stay Assembly, lubricate it at this time. If you will replace the Stay Assembly, go to the next step. 4) Remove E Ring (E5) (8) and Oilless Metals (9) at both sides, remove the Spring (10) on the handle side, and then remove the Stay Assembly (11). Replace the Stay Assembly (11) with the new one.

5 5

4

5

6 7 5

6 7

4

NOTE Do not remove the Side Plates of Cutter Unit when you remove the Stay Assembly. If you remove Side Plates, it is necessary to re-adjust the home position of Cutter Blade.

K115sm5e4.doc 5-53

5.6.4 Adjusting Home Position of Cutter Blade 1) Remove the Cutter Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit] on the page 5-47. 2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the Lower Paper Guide Plate (3). Remove a screw (4) on the pin side to remove the Paper Exit Guide Plate 2 (5).

NOTE If you have “Cutter Jam” frequently, please check whether the home position of Cutter Blade is properly adjusted or not. And if necessary, please adjust in the following way. You need the following exclusive tools to check and adjust. HP Adjustment Assembly (3508560021) HP Adjustment tool 2 (3108500020)

1

1

2 2

35

4

K115sm5e4.doc 5-54

3) Remove the Stay Assembly (6) making reference to [5.6.3 Lubrication / Replacement of Stay Assembly] on the page 5-51. 4) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (7) which fix the Joint A (8). 5) Fit the HP Adjustment Assembly (9) firmly to 3 Pins of the Cutter Side Plate. Insert the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10) under the Cutter Blade and place it at the nearest position to the Cutter Side Plate.

6

7

8

9

10 9 10

K115sm5e4.doc 5-55

6) Rotate the Cutter Handle until the cutting point (11) of Cutter Blade touches the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10). When the cutting point (11) touches the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10), fix the Joint A (8) tightening Set Screws (7). The gap between cutting point and base of Cutter Unit becomes 16mm by this operation. When you have tightened the Set Screws (7), remove only the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10). (Leave the HP Adjustment Assembly (9) as it is.) 7) Loosen 2 pieces of bind head screw (12) which fix the Cutter Handle. Rotate the Cutter Handle until the green area can be seen in the notch (13). When the green area can be seen in the notch (13), tighten the bind head screws (12). 8) Remove the HP Adjustment Assembly (9). Then, reassemble the Cutter Unit in the reversed order.

11

10

7

8

16mm

9 10

12

13

K115sm5e4.doc 5-56

5.6.5 Adjusting angle of Cutter Unit 1) Print out an A0 paper, and then fold it at the central line. 2) Measure the difference of paper length between left and right. It must be 2.5mm or shorter.

NOTE If you replace the Cutter Unit with the new one, make sure to check whether or not the paper can be cut in a right angle. If not, please adjust in the following way.

Should be 2.5mm or shorter

K115sm5e4.doc 5-57

3) It is necessary to adjust the angle of Cutter Unit if the difference is longer than 2.5mm. If you loosen 2 pieces of screw (1), you can shift the Cutter Unit left or right. If the right side of print is longer than left side, slide the whole Cutter Unit to the right. If the left side of print is longer than right side, slide the whole Cutter Unit to the left.

1

1

K115sm5e5.doc 5-58

5.7 Fuser

5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit 1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit Cover (2). 2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3). 3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

1

2

3

4

K115sm5e5.doc 5-59

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7). 5) Disconnect 3 connectors (8). 6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (9) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (10).

55 67

8

8

9 910 10

10

K115sm5e5.doc 5-60

7) Slide both the Shaft 4 (11) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover Assembly (12) 8) Remove tooth washer screws (13) at both sides to remove the Frame Assembly (14).

11 11 12 12

12

13 13

14 14

K115sm5e5.doc 5-61

9) Remove Hexagon Head Bolts (15) at both sides which fix the Fuser Unit. Also, disconnect 4 connectors (16). 10) Remove 7 pieces of tooth washer screw (17) which fix the Fuser Unit from the bottom. 11) Remove the Fuser Unit (18) from the machine.

15 15

16

16

17 17

18

18

K115sm5e5.doc 5-62

5.7.2 Replacing IR Lamps & Fuser Roller 1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit Cover (2). 2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3). 3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

NOTE Fuser Roller is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 200,000m.

1

2

3

4

K115sm5e5.doc 5-63


55 67

8

8

9 910 10

10

K115sm5e5.doc 5-64

7) Slide both the Shaft 4 (11) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover Assembly (12) 8) Remove a tooth washer screw (13) to remove each Lamp GP (14) with Lamp Mounts (15) at both sides to make the IR Lamps free. Also, disconnect 4 connectors (16) of IR Lamps.

11

11

12

12

12

13

14

13

14

14 15 14

15

16 16

K115sm5e5.doc 5-65

9) Pull out the IR Lamps (17) gently. Replace the IR Lamps (17) with the new ones.

17

17

NOTE (1) There are 2 kinds of IR Lamp. One has a black wire and another has a white one. Make sure to install the black one to the upper position. (2) There is a projection on the mid glass part of each IR Lamp. When the projections of both IR Lamps touch each other, IR Lamps will be broken because of the vibration. Make sure to direct these projections to the other directions when you install the IR Lamps.

Black

White

Projections OK OK NG

K115sm5e5.doc 5-66

10) Remove tooth washer screws (18) at both sides to remove the Frame Assembly (19).

18 18

19 19

K115sm5e5.doc 5-67

11) Pull the Levers L/R (20) at both sides to decompress the Fuser Roller. Then, remove Spring Hooks 3 (21), Spring Hooks 1/2 Assembly (22) and Extension Springs A (23) at both sides.

20

20

21

21

22

23

NOTE When you pressurize the Fuser Roller, confirm the Levers L/R are fitted to the inside of Pin. No good (Lever is out of the Pin.) Good (Lever is inside of the Pin.)

Pin Pin

20

22 23

21 20

22 23

K115sm5e5.doc 5-68

12) Remove 2 pieces of Pan Head Screw (24) to remove 50T Spur Gear (25), 3 pieces of Spacer (26), 2 pieces of Wave Washer (27) and 2 pieces of Collar (28). 13) Remove 2 pieces of Pan Head Screw (29) to remove 50T Spur Gear (30) and Collar 1 (31). 14) Remove 4 pieces (2 pieces on each side) of tooth washer screw (32) to remove Collars (33), Ball Bearings (34) and Isolate Bushings (35) at both sides

24

25

25

26

27

28 27

26

29

30

30

31

32 32

33

34

35

K115sm5e5.doc 5-69

15) Remove the Fuser Roller (36) pulling out to your side. Remove both the Collar E (37) and Collar 4 (38) from one side (driving side of machine) of the Fuser Roller. Replace both the Fuser Roller (36) and the Collar E (37) with the new ones.

NOTE (1) You do not have to be care about the direction (left or right) of the Fuser Roller when you install the new one. However, please install the side having Collar E and Collar 4 to the driving side of machine. (2) Collar E (37) is not a Periodical Replacement Part, so basically you do not have to replace if it is not broken. But the Collar E will be strongly fixed to the Fuser Roller after a long term of usage, so it will be broken in many cases if you try to remove from the Fuser Roller. Please replace with the new one if it is broken.

33

K115sm5e5.doc 5-70

5.7.3 Replacing Pressure Roller 1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit Cover (2). 2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3). 3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

NOTE Pressure Roller is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 200,000m.

1

2

3

4

K115sm5e5.doc 5-71


55 67

8

8

9 910 10

10

K115sm5e5.doc 5-72

7) Slide both the Shaft 4 (11) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover Assembly (12) 8) Remove tooth washer screws (13) at both sides to remove the Frame Assembly (14).

11

11

12

12

12

13 13

14 14

K115sm5e5.doc 5-73

9) Pull the Levers L/R (15) at both sides to decompress the Fuser Roller.

15

NOTE When you pressurize the Fuser Roller, confirm the Levers L/R are fitted to the inside of Pin. No good (Lever is out of the Pin.) Good (Lever is inside of the Pin.)

Pin Pin

15

K115sm5e5.doc 5-74

10) Remove the Pressure Roller (16) pulling out to your side. Remove C rings (17), Ball Bearings (18) and Isolate Bushing (19) from both sides of the Pressure Roller. Replace the Pressure Roller (16) with the new one.

16

16

17

18

19

NOTE (1) You do not have to be care about the direction (left or right) of the Pressure Roller when you install the new one. (2) You can adjust the fusing pressure by adjusting the gap between Spring Hook 1 (20) and Spring Hook 2 (21). It is 2.5mm in usual case. The width of “Nip” is 8 to 9mm at the center and 10 to 11mm at both sides (10mm from side edges of A0 or 36” paper).

20

21

10mm 10mm

10 to 11mm 8 to 9mm 10 to 11mm

2.5mm

K115sm5e6.doc 5-75

5.7.4 Replacing Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & BL3) 1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit Cover (2). 2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3). 3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

1

2

3

4

K115sm5e6.doc 5-76


55 67

8

8

9 910 10

10

K115sm5e6.doc 5-77

7) Open the Licking Wire Saddle (11) to release the wire, and then remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screws (12) to remove each Exhaust Blower (13). Replace the Exhaust Blower (13) with the new one.

11

12

12

13

K115sm5e6.doc 5-78

5.7.5 Replacing Thermistor 1) Remove the Fuser Unit from the machine making reference to [5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit] on the page 5-58. 2) Loosen 4 tooth washer screws (2), and then remove the Cover 5 (3).

1

1

2

3 3

K115sm5e6.doc 5-79

3) Remove 5 pieces of bind head screws to remove Nylon Clamps (4) which fix the wire of Thermistor. Pull out the connector (5) from the installation hole of plate, and then pull out the wire (6) from the hole (7). 4) Remove the tooth washer screw (8) to remove the Fitting Plate 1 (9) with the Thermistor.

4 4

6

5

6

7

8

9

K115sm5e6.doc 5-80

5) Remove the tooth washer screw (10) to remove the Thermistor (11). Replace the Thermistor (11) with the new one.

K115sm5e6.doc 5-81

5.7.6 Replacing Thermostat 1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit Cover (2). 2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3). 3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

1

2

3

4

K115sm5e6.doc 5-82


55 67

8

8

9 910 10

10

K115sm5e6.doc 5-83

7) Remove the tooth washer screw (11), and then pull out the Fitting Plate 2 (12). 8) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screws (13) to remove the Thermostat (14). Replace the Thermostat (14) with the new one.

11

12

13

14

K115sm5e6.doc 5-84

5.7.7 Replacing Stripper Finger Assemblies 1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit Cover (2). 2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3). 3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

1

2

3

4

K115sm5e6.doc 5-85

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7). 5) Slide both the Shaft 4 (8) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover Assembly (9) 6) Remove the screw (10) to remove each Stripper Finger Assembly (11). Replace the Stripper Finger Assembly (11) with the new one.

55 67

8 8 9 9

9

10

11

11

K115sm5e6.doc 5-86

5.7.8 Replacing Separation Fingers 1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit Cover (2). 2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3). 3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

1

2

3

4

K115sm5e6.doc 5-87

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7). 5) Slide both the Shaft 4 (8) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover Assembly (9)

55 67

8 8 9

9

9

K115sm5e6.doc 5-88

6) Remove tooth washer screws (10) at both sides to remove the Frame Assembly (11).

10 10

11 11

K115sm5e6.doc 5-89

7) Remove 8 pieces of tooth washer screws (12) to remove the Frame (13). 9) Remove the Extension Spring (14) to remove each Separation Finger (15). Replace the Separation Finger (15) with the new one.

12

12

13

15

14

K115sm5e6.doc 5-90

5.7.9 Replacing Exit Sensor (LS2) 1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit Cover (2). 2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3). 3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

1

2

3

4

K115sm5e6.doc 5-91

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Cover 3 (6). 5) Remove 2 pieces of screw (7), disconnect the connector (8) and remove the Exit Sensor (9). Replace the Exit Sensor with the new one.

5 6

7

8

9

K115sm5e6.doc 5-92

5.7.10 Replacing Pressure Blowers (BL4 to BL7) 1) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1). 2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (2) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (3).

1

2

2 3

3

K115sm5e6.doc 5-93

3) Remove 9 pieces of tooth washer screws (4) to remove the Cover 2 (5). 4) Disconnect each connector (6).

4

4

5

6

K115sm5e6.doc 5-94

5) Remove 4 pieces of screw (7) to remove each Pressure Blower (8). Replace the Pressure Blower with the new one.

7

8

K115sm5e7.doc 5-95

5.8 Roll Decks

5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck 1) Draw out the necessary Roll Deck (1). 2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (2) which fix the Roll Deck to the Rails. 3) Remove the Roll Deck (3).

NOTE You can remove all Roll Decks in the same way.

1

2 2

3

K115sm5e7.doc 5-96

5.8.2 Replacing Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) & Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (MC8) (1st Roll Deck) 1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck (1). 2) Disconnect each connector (2). 3) Expanding the stopper lever (3) outward, pull out each Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (4) and Bypass Feed Clutch (5) from the shaft. Replace each Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (4) and Bypass Feed Clutch (5) with the new one.

1

2

3

4

5 4

5

K115sm5e7.doc 5-97

5.8.3 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1), Paper Size Sensors (PH5A to PH11A) & Bypass Start Sensor (PH20) (1st deck) 1) Remove the Top Roll Deck (1) from the machine making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck] on the page 5-95. 2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Harness Cover (3). 3) Remove the bind head screw (4), disconnect the connector (5) and remove the Bypass Start Sensor (6). Replace the Bypass Start Sensor (6) with the new one.

1

2 3

4 5 6

K115sm5e7.doc 5-98

4) Loose 2 pieces of tooth washer screws (7) to remove the Cover 370 (8). 5) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screws (9), and then turn over the Stay 344 (10).

7 8

9

10

10

K115sm5e7.doc 5-99

6) Remove the bind head screw (11), disconnect the connector (12), and remove each Roll Set Sensor 1 and Paper Size Sensors (13). Replace each Roll Set Sensor 1 and Paper Size Sensors (13) with the new one.

11

12

12

13

K115sm5e7.doc 5-100

5.8.4 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 2 (PH2) & Paper Size Sensors (PH5B to PH11B) (2nd deck) 1) Draw out the Middle Roll Deck (1). 2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Sensor Cover (3).

1

2

3

K115sm5e7.doc 5-101

3) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (4). 4) Turn over the Bracket (5), and you will find the sensors.

4 4

5

5

K115sm5e7.doc 5-102


6

7

8

K115sm5e7.doc 5-103

5.8.5 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 3 (PH3) & Paper Size Sensors (PH5C to PH11C) (3rd deck) 1) Draw out the Bottom Roll Deck (1). 2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (2) to remove the Lower Cover (3).

1

2 2

3

K115sm5e7.doc 5-104

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4).

4

4

K115sm5e7.doc 5-105

4) Turn over the Stay 346 (5), and you will find the sensors.

5

5

K115sm5e7.doc 5-106


6

7

8

K115sm5e7.doc 5-107

5.8.6 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 4 (PH4) & Paper Size Sensors (PH5D to PH11D) (4th deck) 1) Remove the Bottom Roll Deck (1) from the machine making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck] on the page 5-95. 2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Lower Harness Cover (3).

1

2 3

K115sm5e7.doc 5-108

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) and 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (5).

4

5

4

5

K115sm5e7.doc 5-109

4) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (6) to remove the Rear Cover (7).

6

7

K115sm5e7.doc 5-110

5) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then turn over the Stay 346 (9).

8 9 8 9

9

K115sm5e7.doc 5-111

6) Remove the bind head screw (10), disconnect the connector (11), and remove each Roll Set Sensor 4 and Paper Size Sensors (12). Replace each Roll Set Sensor 4 and Paper Size Sensors (12) with the new one

10 11

12

K115sm5e7.doc 5-112

5.8.7 Replacing Paper Feed Clock Sensors (PH13 to PH16) (Common for all decks) 1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck 1 (1). 2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Heater Cover (3).

NOTE You can remove the Paper Feed Clock Sensor in each Roll Deck in almost same way. This section shows you how to remove the Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 in the Top Roll Deck as an example.

1

2 2

3

K115sm5e7.doc 5-113

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Cover 1 (5). 6) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (6) to remove the Upper Sensor Mount (7).

4

5

6

7

7

6

K115sm5e7.doc 5-114

7) Disconnect the connector (8), and then press the stopper hooks (9) inward to remove the Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 (10) from the Mount. Replace the Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 (10) with the new one.

8 9

10

K115sm5e7.doc 5-115

5.8.8 Replacing 501-3M Belt (Common for all decks) 1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck 1 (1). 2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Gear Cover 384 (3).

NOTE You can remove the 501-3M Belt in each Roll Deck in almost same way. This section shows you how to remove the 501-3M Belt in the Top Roll Deck as an example.

1

2

3

K115sm5e7.doc 5-116

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Pulley (5) with its plate. Then, remove the 501-3M Belt (6). Replace the 501-3M Belt (6) with the new one.

4

56

5

6

NOTE Tighten the tooth washer screws (4) pressing down the Pulley (5) to give a tension to the 501-3M Belt (6).

K115sm5e7.doc 5-117

5.8.9 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (1st & 2nd decks) 1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck 1 (1). 2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Heater Cover (3).

NOTE You can remove both the Dehumidify Heaters (H8 : Roll 1 & H7 : Roll 2) in the same way. This section shows you how to remove the Dehumidify Heater (H8) for the Top Roll Deck as an example.

1

2 2

3

K115sm5e7.doc 5-118

3) Disconnect the connector (4), remove 2 pieces of screw (5), and then remove the Dehumidify Heater (6). Replace the Dehumidify Heater (6) with the new one.

45

6

6

K115sm5e7.doc 5-119

5.8.10 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (3rd & 4th decks) 1) Remove both the Middle Roll Deck and the Bottom Roll Deck making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck] on the page 5-95. 2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove each Cover 341 (2).

1 12

K115sm5e7.doc 5-120

3) Disconnect the connector (3), remove 2 pieces of screw (4), and then remove each Dehumidify Heater (5). Replace the Dehumidify Heater (5) with the new one.

3

3

4

4

44

5

K115sm5e7.doc 5-121

5.8.11 Replacing Spool Brake 1) Remove the Roll Spool (1) from each Roll Deck. 2) Remove E Ring (2), Gear 454 (3), Thrust Washer (4) and Oil-less Bearing (5). 3) Remove E Ring (6) and Spool Brake (7). Replace the Spool Brake (7) with the new one.

1

2

23

4 5

66

7

K115sm5e8.doc 5-122

5.9 Bypass Feeder

5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit 1) Draw out the Bypass Feeder Unit (1). 2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) which fix the Bypass Feeder Unit from the bottom. 3) Slide the Bypass Feeder (1) along the Rails and remove it.

1

2 2

1

K115sm5e8.doc 5-123

5.9.2 Replacing Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (SL4) 1) Remove the Bypass Feeder Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit] on the page 5-122. 2) Loosen 5 pieces of tooth washer screws (2), and then slide and remove the Cover 2 (3).

1

2

3

K115sm5e8.doc 5-124

3) Disconnect the connector (4). 4) Remove 2 pieces of screw (5) to remove the Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (6). Replace the Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (6) with the new one.

4

5

6

6

NOTE Tighten the screws (5) at the center of oval holes.

K115sm5e8.doc 5-125

5.9.3 Replacing Cut Sheet Set Sensor (PH31) & Cut Sheet Size Sensors (PH32 to PH37) 1) Remove the Bypass Feeder Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit] on the page 5-122. 2) Loosen 5 pieces of tooth washer screws (2), and then slide and remove the Cover 2 (3).

1

2

3

K115sm5e8.doc 5-126

3) Remove the screw (4) to remove the Bracket 239 (5), and also remove 2 pieces of screw (6) to remove the Bracket 232 (7).

43

5

7

K115sm5e8.doc 5-127

4) Remove the screw (8) and disconnect the connector (9) to remove each Cut Sheet Set Sensor and Cut Sheet Size Sensors (10). Replace each Cut Sheet Set Sensor and Cut Sheet Size Sensors (10) with the new one.

8 910

10

10

K115sm5e8.doc 5-128

5.9.4 Replacing Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (SL3) 1) Open both the Top Roll Deck (1) and the Bypass Feeder Unit (2). (They are removed in the later procedure.) 2) Loosen the tooth washer screw (3) on the bottom, and remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Cover (5).

1

2

3

4

5

K115sm5e8.doc 5-129

3) Remove the Tension Spring (6). As the Spring (7) easily drops off, remove it for the safety.

6

7

K115sm5e8.doc 5-130

4) Disconnect the connector (8), remove 2 pieces of screw (9), and remove the Bracket 557 (10) with the solenoid.

89 9

10

K115sm5e8.doc 5-131

5) Remove the E Ring (E5) (11) and 2 pieces of screw (12) to remove the Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (13) from the Bracket. Replace the Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (13) with the new one.

1112

13

K115sm5e9.doc 5-132

5.10 Internal Transportation Unit

5.10.1 Replacing Belt 2 1) Draw out the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3. Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to avoid the light. 2) Remove the Fuser Unit from the machine making reference to [5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit] on the page 5-58. 3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1), and disconnect the connector (2).

1 1 2

K115sm5e9.doc 5-133

4) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Cover 305 Assembly (4). 5) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (5) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (6) counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (7).

3 3

4

5

6 7

5

K115sm5e9.doc 5-134

6) Remove 6 pieces of tooth washer screw (8) which fix the Belt Unit. 7) Slide the Belt Unit (9) from the driving side to the driven side to pull out both the roller shaft (10) and Duct (11), and then remove the Belt Unit (9) from the machine.

8

8

9 10

11

9

K115sm5e9.doc 5-135

8) Remove 2 pieces of each E Ring (E10) (12) and Ball Bearing (13), and then remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (14) to remove the Bracket 1 (15). 9) Remove 2 pieces of each E Ring (E7) (16), Washer (17) and Ball Bearing (18), and then remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (19) to remove the Bracket 2 (20). 10) Slide each Belt 2 (21) outward to remove from the unit. Replace the Belt 2 (21) with the new one.

12 12

14 14 1513

13

16

19

17

1820

17 18

21

K115sm5e9.doc 5-136

5.10.2 Replacing Separation Sensor (PH18) 1) Draw out the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3. Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to avoid the light. 2) Remove the Fuser Unit from the machine making reference to [5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit] on the page 5-58. 3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1), and disconnect the connector (2).

1 1 2

K115sm5e9.doc 5-137

4) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Cover 305 Assembly (4). 5) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (5) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (6) counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (7).

3 3

4

5

6 7

5

K115sm5e9.doc 5-138

6) Disconnect the connector (8), and then remove the wire from Wire Saddle (9) and Edge Saddle (10). 7) Loosen the screw (11), and the remove the Bracket 228 (12) with the sensor.

89

10

11

12

K115sm5e9.doc 5-139

8) Pressing the Stopper Hooks (13) inward, remove the Separation Sensor (14) from the bracket. Replace the Separation Sensor (14) with the new one.

13

13

14

K115sm5eA.doc 5-140

5.10.3 Removing Internal Transportation Unit 1) Remove the Drum Assembly (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 2) Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1) from the machine making reference to [5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-151. 3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (3), and then remove the Left Side Cover (4).

1

2

2

4

3 3

K115sm5eA.doc 5-141

4) Remove the Duct (5) removing 8 pieces of tooth washer screw. 5) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (6). 6) Open the Right Side Door (7).

5

6

7

K115sm5eA.doc 5-142

7) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then remove the Cover (9). 8) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (10). Remove 3 pieces of tooth screws (11) to remove the Gear Assembly (12). 9) Open the Top Rear Cover (13), and then loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (14).

8

8

9

10

11

1112

13

14

K115sm5eA.doc 5-143

10) Close the Top Rear, and then remove the Fuser Cover (15). 11) Remove a tooth washer screw (16) from each Cover, and then remove Cover 3 (17) and Cover 4 (18). 12) Disconnect 3 connectors (19).

15

16

16

17 18

19

19

K115sm5eA.doc 5-144

13) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (20), open the Exit Cover (21), and then remove the Cooling Fan Unit (22). 14) Remove 5 pieces of tooth washer screw (23) which fix the Fuser Unit from the bottom.

20

20

22

21 22

23 23

23

K115sm5eA.doc 5-145

15) Remove Hexagon Head Bolts (24) at both sides which fix the Fuser Unit. Also, disconnect 4 connectors (25). 16) Remove the Fuser Unit (26) from the machine. 17) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (27) and 7 pieces of tooth washer screw (28) to remove the Rear Cover (29). (Fixing Brackets inside the Rear Cover will be removed also.)

24 24

25 25

26

2729

28

K115sm5eA.doc 5-146

18) Loosen 4 pieces of tooth washer screw inserting a screwdriver from the holes (30), and remove each Base 2 (31) and Base 3 (32). 19) Remove Transmission PCB (33) and Reception PCB (34). (Put them aside as the following right photo, otherwise you will break them when you remove the Inner Transport Assembly.) 20) Disconnect 4 connectors (35) on the Left Side Plate. Then, pull the harnesses from the windows (36) into the machine.

30

30

32

30

30

31

34 33

35

36 36

K115sm5eA.doc 5-147

21) Remove Retaining Ring K and Flat Washers (37) at both sides. 22) Prepare the Gas Spring Jigs (38). Gas Spring Jigs : 7708560070 23) Fit the notch (39) of each Gas Spring Jig to the shaft of Inner Transport Lock Lever.

37 37

38 38

39

K115sm5eA.doc 5-148

24) Bring down the Inner Transport Assembly to shorten the Gas Spring Hinges (40), and then bring up the Gas Spring Jigs (38) to cover the Gas Spring Hinges. 25) Pull out each Gas Spring Hinge from the shaft while bringing up the Inner Transport Assembly a little.

38

40

NOTE Gas Spring Hinges will not extend more than required because the Gas Spring Jigs restrict their extension, so it will be easy to set the hinges when you reassemble. If you do not use the jigs, hinges will extend fully and it will be very hard to set them again.

NOTE Be careful not to make the Gas Spring Hinge come out from the stopper plate (41) of Gas Spring Jig. It will be very dangerous because the Gas Spring Hinge extends momentarily.

41

K115sm5eA.doc 5-149

26) Remove the Retaining Ring E and Ball Bearing (42) on the Left Side Plate. 27) Remove the Retaining Ring E (43). 28) Remove Retaining Ring E (44).

42

43

44

K115sm5eA.doc 5-150

29) Shift the Shafts (45) inward until they are pulled out from the Side Plates. 30) Remove the Inner Transport Assembly (46) from the machine.

45 45

46

K115sm5eB.doc 5-151

5.11 Transfer / Separation Corona

5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona 1) Open the Right Side Door (1). 2) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (2) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (3) counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (4).

1

3

2

4

4

K115sm5eB.doc 5-152

3) Rotate the Knob (5) counter-clockwise to unlock, and then pull out the Transfer / Separation Corona (6) from the machine.

5

6

6

K115sm5eB.doc 5-153

5.11.2 Replacing Corona Wire 2 Assemblies 1) Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1) from the machine making reference to [5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-151. 2) If you press down the Stopper Hooks (2), you can remove each Corona Guards A/B (3). Remove all Corona Guards A/B (3) from the housing.

NOTE Corona Wire 2 Assembly is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 100,000m.

1

1

3

2

2

K115sm5eB.doc 5-154

3) Remove 2 pieces of screw (4) at both sides, and remove the Corona Housing 5 (5) and several sheets of Spacers 1 (6) from both sides. 4) Remove the Flash Head Screw (7) to remove each Head Cover 3 (8) and Head Cover 4 (9).

NOTE As the Spacers 1 (6) adjust the height of Corona Housing 5 (5), the number of them used is different among unit. Do not lose or add them without any reason as the height will change. Also, please remember how many sheets were used on each side because the number may be different between both sides.

4 5 4 5

6 6

77

89

K115sm5eB.doc 5-155

5) Removing the Extension Springs (10) on each Corona Block, remove each Corona Wire 2 Assembly (11). Replace the Corona Wire 2 Assembly (11) with the new one. 6) Put back both Cover 3 (8) and Cover 4 (9).

10

11

10

11

NOTE When you stretch the new Corona Wire 2 Assembly, make sure to fit its anti-vibration bead (12) into the necessary space in the Corona Heads, and also make sure to fit the wire into the grooves (13) of the Height Adjuster.

13

12

13

12

89

K115sm5eB.doc 5-156

7) Put back both Spacers 1 (6) and Corona Housing 5 (5).

56 5 6

NOTE It is necessary to put back both Spacers 1 (6) and Corona Housing 5 (5) before adjusting the height of Transfer Corona Wire.

K115sm5eB.doc 5-157

8) Measure the height of each Corona Wire 2 Assembly, and compare with the values written in the label which is pasted inside the Right Side Door. (The values in the right figure are simply the standards.) 9) If the height is not proper, adjust it rotating the screws (14) on the back of the Corona.

(10.2mm) 14.0mm

15.0mm

14 14

K115sm5eB.doc 5-158

5.11.3 Replacing Mylar 1) Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1) from the machine making reference to [5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-151. 2) Strip off the Mylar (2) from the Corona Housing 5. Replace the new Mylar (2) with the new one

1

1

2

NOTE Align the edges of Mylar with the front face and side faces of TR Guides B (3). Align the short edge with this side face. Align the long edge with these front faces.

3

K115sm5eB.doc 5-159

5.11.4 Adjustment of gap between Drum & Corona Housing 5 1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3.

NOTE In case you have replaced the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit with the new one, make sure to check the gap between Drum and Corona Housing 5 using an exclusive Jig. And adjust the gap properly if necessary. The proper gap between Drum and Corona Housing 5 is 0.4mm to 1.0mm. To measure the gap, use the exclusive Jig shown in the right photo. Drum Gauge for Transfer Corona (7708560021)

0.4mm to 1.0mm

1

K115sm5eB.doc 5-160

2) Remove each Image Corona (2), Drum Assembly (3), Toner Hopper (4) and Developer Unit (5) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (6).

23

4 5

NOTE If you take checking or adjustment of gap without removing the Developer Unit, you may damage the surface of Development Roller with the tip of Pin of the Drum Gauge

6

K115sm5eB.doc 5-161

4) Disconnect the connector (7), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then remove the Cover 305 Assembly (9). 5) Fit the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Corona” (10) into the Drum Shaft (11).

8 8

7

99

10 10

11

K115sm5eB.doc 5-162

6) Close the Process Unit, and then fix it with 4 pieces of screw (12). 7) Bring up the Internal Transportation Unit (13) and lock it at the operation position.

12

12

13

NOTE Make sure to close and lock both the Process Unit and the Internal Transportation Unit before measurement. If these units are not locked at the correct positions, it is impossible to measure the gap correctly.

K115sm5eB.doc 5-163

8) Swing the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Corona” forward and backward to check whether or not its pins touch the Mylar (14) on the Corona Housing 5. One of 2 pins marked with 0.4mm (15) should not touch the Mylar (14). Another pin marked with 1.0mm (16) should touch the Mylar (14) slightly. If the above conditions are satisfied, the gap is between 0.4mm and 1.0mm. 1.0mm pin should touch the Mylar slightly. 0.4mm pin should not touch the Mylar.

1415

16

0.4mm pin

1.0mm pin

Diameter of Drum

0.4mm pin 1.0mm pin

Diameter of Drum

Mylar Mylar

NOTE Please check not at one point but entirely along the Drum Shaft.

K115sm5eB.doc 5-164

9) If the gap is out of the correct range, adjust the height of Corona Housing 5 by adding or removing Spacer 1 (17). If you add 1 sheet of Spacer 1, the height of Corona Housing 5 gets 0.2mm higher. Spacer 1 (7705104090)

17 17

K115sm5eC.doc 5-165

5.12 LED Head

5.12.1 Removing LED Head 1) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1). 2) Disconnect the connector (2), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3), and then remove the Cover 305 Assembly (4).

1

3 3

2

44

K115sm5eC.doc 5-166

3) Draw out the Process Unit (5) from the machine making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3. Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to avoid the light. 4) Disconnect 4 connectors (6). 5) Remove 2 pieces of M4x10 black screws (7).

5

6

7

K115sm5eC.doc 5-167

6) Catch both sides of the LED Head, and then move the driven side of it as the arrow marks in the photo show in order to make the Pin (8) comes out from the Slit (9) of the Side Plate. 7) Pull out the Positioning Pins on the driving side from the Positioning Slits (10), and then remove the LED Head (11) from the machine.

8

8

9

1011

NOTE (1) The wire (12) of LED Cleaning Motor may be broken if it is loaded. Please put the LED Head on the table as the right figure shows so as not to give a load to the wire. Please read the next page as some more notes are mentioned.

12

K115sm5eC.doc 5-168

NOTE Make sure to close the Process Unit without tightening the M4x10 screws (7). The Positioning Bars of the LED Head are fitted into the slits of the Process Unit. These Positioning Bars are curved upward, and the LED Head is smoothly moved up when the bars are fitted into the slits. By this, a proper gap can be kept between LED Head and Drum. If you close the Process Unit when the LED Head is not movable being fixed with the M4x10 screws, the gap between LED Head and Drum is not adjusted properly. Or you may bend the Positioning Bars in the worst case.

Slits Positioning Bars

Process Unit

Drum

LED Head

Bar

Slit

Proper gap

Bar is bent.

Gap is not proper

Tightened

7

K115sm5eC.doc 5-169

NOTE After installing the LED Head, please check the Ground Plates (13) are not deformed. Because they easily hook somewhere on the LED Head and are deformed. No Good (Ground Plate is bent.) Good

13 13

K115sm5eC.doc 5-170

5.12.2 Replacing Pad Assembly 2 1) Remove the LED Head (1) from the machine making reference to [5.12.1 Removing LED Head] on the page 5-165. 2) Loosen the screw (2) and remove the Pad Assembly 2 (3). Replace the Pad Assembly 2 (3) with the new one.

NOTE Pad Assembly 2 is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 100,000m.

1

1

2

3

3

K115sm5eC.doc 5-171

5.12.3 Replacing LED Cleaning Motor (M8) 1) Remove the LED Head (1) from the machine making reference to [5.12.1 Removing LED Head] on the page 5-165. 2) Remove the screw (2) and remove the Bracket 222 (3) with the motor. 3) Remove 2 pieces of screw (4) to remove the LED Cleaning Motor (5). Replace the LED Cleaning Motor (5) with the new one.

1

1

2 3

3

4

5

K115sm5eD.doc 5-172

5.13 Main Frame

5.13.1 Replacing Drum Motor (M1) & Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2). 2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to make the Bracket 316 (4) with PCB free. As the Bracket 316 (4) is preventative for the later works, tape it as the photo shows. Tape the Bracket 316.

1

1

2

3

4

4

K115sm5eD.doc 5-173

3) Remove 2 pieces of Nuts (5), remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (6), and remove 2 pieces of Flat Washer (7), Tension Spring (8), Shaft 207 (9) and Bracket 217 (10).

5

5

7

7

6

6

8

9

10

NOTE You can adjust the tension of Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 by measuring the distance between both Flat Washers (7). Keep 100mm between both inside of Flat Washers (7).

100mm (Inside to inside)

K115sm5eD.doc 5-174

4) Remove the tooth washer screw (11) to remove the Contact Plate (12). 5) Remove the C Ring (13), and then remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (14) to remove both Ball Bearing (30x55x13) (15) and Holder (16). Remove the E Ring (E9) (17) to remove the Ball Bearing (12x28x8) (18).

11

12

13

14

14 17

13

15

16

17

18

K115sm5eD.doc 5-175

6) Open 2 pieces of Locking Wire Saddle (19) to make the harness free, and then remove 7 pieces of tooth washer screw (20) to remove the Bracket (21).

1920 20

20 21

K115sm5eD.doc 5-176

7) Remove the E Ring (E8) (22), and remove the Idler Assembly (23).

23

22

K115sm5eD.doc 5-177

8) Remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Cap Screw (24), and then remove both 72T Pulley (25) and Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 (26). Replace the Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 (26) with the new one.

24

25

26

24

26

K115sm5eD.doc 5-178

9) Remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Cap Screw (27), and then remove the 24T Pulley (28). Disconnect the connector (29).

27 28

27

29

NOTE There may be the case that some abnormal sound is generated during operation if the Drum Shaft or Shaft 204 is short of grease. If you feel they are not greased enough when you re-assembly, please grease them. Drum Shaft Shaft 204

K115sm5eD.doc 5-179

10) Remove 8 pieces of tooth washer screw (30) to remove the Motor Bracket (31) with motor.

30

30 30

30

31

K115sm5eD.doc 5-180

11) Remove 3 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (32) and 1 piece of Flush Head Screw (33) to remove the Motor Assembly. 12) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (34), and then pull out the 50T Gear (35) from the shaft of Drum Motor (36). Replace the Drum Motor (36) with the new one.

32

33

34

34

35

35

36

K115sm5eD.doc 5-181

5.13.2 Replacing Paper Feed Motor (M2) 1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2). 2) Disconnect the connector (3), and open the Wire Saddles (4) to make the wires free.

1

1

2

34

K115sm5eD.doc 5-182

3) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Motor Base (6) with motor. 4) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (7), and then pull out the 40T Gear (8). 5) Remove 3 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (9) to remove the Paper Feed Motor (10). Replace the paper Feed Motor (10) with the new one.

55

6

7

8

910

K115sm5eD.doc 5-183

5.13.3 Replacing Fuser Motor (M5) 1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2). 2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to make the Bracket 316 (4) with PCB free. As the Bracket 316 (4) is preventative for the later works, tape it as the photo shows. Tape the Bracket 316.

1

1

2

3

4

4

K115sm5eD.doc 5-184

3) Open 3 pieces of Wire Saddle (5) to make the wires free. 4) Disconnect the connector (6), and then remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (7) to remove the Side Plate Assembly (8) with motor.

5

6

7

7

8

K115sm5eD.doc 5-185

5) Remove the E Ring (E7) (9) to remove the Ball Bearing (10). Remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (11) to divide the Side Plate Assembly into Side Plate 1 (13) and Side Plate 2 (14).

9

11

11

9

10

12

13

K115sm5eD.doc 5-186

6) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (14), and remove the 26T Spur Gear (15). Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (16) to remove the Fuser Motor (17). Replace the Fuser Motor (17) with the new one.

14

16

16

1517

K115sm5eE.doc 5-187

5.13.4 Replacing Developer Positioning Motor (M4) 1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2). 2) Disconnect the connector (3), and then remove 3 pieces of Pan Head Screw (4) to remove the Developer Positioning Motor (5). Replace the Developer Positioning Motor (5) with the new one.

1

1

2

3

4

5

5

K115sm5eE.doc 5-188

5.13.5 Replacing Cutter Motor (M3), Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22) & Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (PH24) 1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2). 2) Disconnect the connector (3), and then remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Cooling Fan 4 (5) with its bracket.

1

1

2

3

45

5

K115sm5eE.doc 5-189

3) Loosen 2 pieces of screw (6), and put the Bracket (7) with PCB aside as it is preventative for later works. 4) Remove the Spring 211 (8), and then remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (9) to remove the 15T Sprocket Assembly (10).

6 7

8

9

10

K115sm5eE.doc 5-190

5) Disconnect 3 connectors (11), and then remove 2 pieces of each tooth washer screw (12) and Hexagon Head Bolt (13) to remove the 15T Sprocket Assembly (14).

NOTE When reassembly, put back the 15T Sprocket Assembly (10) with the Hexagon Head Bolts (9) loosed, hook the Spring 211 (8) as it was, then tighten the Hexagon Head Bolts (9). You do not have to give any tension to the Roller Chain especially but only the tension of Spring 211 (8) is enough.

8

9

10

11

12

13

12

13

14

K115sm5eE.doc 5-191

6) Remove 5 pieces of tooth washer screw (15) and 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (16) to remove the Motor Bracket (17) with motor.

15

15

16

17

K115sm5eE.doc 5-192

7) Remove the tooth washer screw (18), disconnect the connector (19), and remove the Bracket 14 (20) with sensor. 8) Pressing the Stopper Hooks (21) inward, remove the Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (22) from the bracket. Replace the Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (22) with the new one.

18 19

20

20

21

22

K115sm5eE.doc 5-193

9) Remove the tooth washer screw (23) to remove the Mount (24). 10) Disconnect the connector (25), and then remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (26) to remove the Cutter Home Position Sensor (27). Replace the Cutter Home Position Sensor (27) with the new one. 11) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (27) to remove the Joint B (28).

23

24

24 25

26

27

28

NOTE Lock the Set Screws (27) with the locking paint when you reassemble.

K115sm5eE.doc 5-194

12) Remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (29) to remove the Cutter Motor (30). Replace the Cutter Motor (30) with the new one.

29 29

30

K115sm5eE.doc 5-195

5.13.6 Replacing Bypass Feeding Motor (M10) 1) Remove both the Top Roll Deck (1) and the Bypass Feeder Unit (2) making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck] on the page 5-95 and [5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit] on the page 5-122. 2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Side Cover L (4). Remove 6 pieces of tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Cover 324 (6).

12

3 45

6

K115sm5eE.doc 5-196

3) Disconnect 3 connectors (7). 4) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (8) to remove the Drum Motor Controller PCB (9).

7

88

9

K115sm5eE.doc 5-197

5) Loosen the tooth washer screw (10) on the bottom, and remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (11) to remove the Cover (12).

10

11

12

K115sm5eE.doc 5-198

6) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (13) to remove the Cover 308 (14).

13

14

K115sm5eE.doc 5-199

7) Disconnect 2 connectors (15), remove 4 pieces of screw (16), and then pull out the Bypass Feeding Motor (17) to the inside of machine. Replace the Bypass Feeding Motor (17) with the new one.

15

1616

17

K115sm5eE.doc 5-200

NOTE (1) When reinstalling the Bypass Feeding Motor, tighten the screws while pressing the motor so that there exists no space between Counter Rollers of motor side and that of machine side. (2) A red circular seal is pasted on the Bypass Feeding Motor. Connect the connector of orange cable to this red seal side. Red seal Orange cable

Counter Roller of motor side

Counter Roller of machine side

K115sm5eE.doc 5-201

5.13.7 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6) 1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3. Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to avoid the light. 2) Remove the LED Head (2) from the machine making reference to [5.12.1 Removing LED Head] on the page 5-165. 3) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Bracket 69 (4).

1

2

3

4

K115sm5eE.doc 5-202

4) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (5), disconnect the connector (6), and then take out the Motor Bracket (7) with motor from the machine. 5) Remove 3 pieces of Pan Head Screw (8) to remove the Toner Supply Motor 2 (9). Replace the Toner Supply Motor 2 (9) with the new one.

55

7

6

77

8 8

9

K115sm5eF.doc 5-203

5.13.8 Replacing Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10) 1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2). 2) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (3), and remove the rotary side of Paper Gate Brake (4).

1

1

2

3

4

4

K115sm5eF.doc 5-204

3) Remove the connector (5), and then remove 3 pieces of screw (6) to remove the fixed side of Paper Gate Brake (7). Replace the Paper Gate Brake (both rotary side and fixed side) (4 &7) with the new one.

5

6

5 7

7

7 4

NOTE When you install the new Paper Gate Brake, keep 0.2mm of space between rotary side and fixed side. Fixed side Rotary side Keep 0.2mm.

K115sm5eF.doc 5-205

4) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer (8), disconnect the connector (9), and then remove the Clutch Plate (10). Pull out both the Thrust Washer (11) and Spacer (12) from the shaft. 5) Expanding the stopper lever (13) outward, pull out the Paper Gate Clutch (14) from the shaft. Replace the paper Gate Clutch (14) with the new one.

8

8

9

10 11

10

11

12

13

14

14

K115sm5eF.doc 5-206

5.13.9 Replacing Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) & Paper Feed Brake (MC9) 1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2). Draw out the Middle Roll Deck (3). 2) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (4), and remove the rotary side of Paper Feed Brake (5).

1

1

2

4

5

5

3

K115sm5eF.doc 5-207

3) Disconnect the connector (5), and then remove 3 pieces of screw (6) to remove the fixed side of Paper Feed Brake (7). Replace the Paper Feed Brake (both rotary side and fixed side) (4 &7) with the new one.

NOTE When you install the new Paper Feed Brake, keep 0.2mm of space between rotary side and fixed side. Fixed side Rotary side Keep 0.2mm.

5

6

7 4

7

7

6

K115sm5eF.doc 5-208

4) Remove 3 pieces of screw (8), disconnect the connector (9), and then remove the Mount 1 (10). 5) Pull out the Collar (11), and then pull out the Paper Feed Clutch Assembly (12) from the shaft and remove the Sliding Key (13).

8

9

10

8

10

11 12

12

13

K115sm5eF.doc 5-209

6) Remove 3 pieces of screw (14) to remove the 50T Spur Gear (15) from the Paper Feed Clutch (16). Replace the Paper Feed Clutch (16) with the new one.

14 15

16

NOTE Please check whether or not the Paper Feed Clutch is properly installed or not in the following ways. (1) Draw out the Middle Roll Deck, and then try to move the Paper Feed Roller left and right by hand whether or not there is a play. If there is a play, please put the Thrust Washer between Paper Feed Clutch and Paper Feed Brake. (If you do not remove the play, it will cause improper cut length.) (2) Rotate the Paper Feed Roller by hand. If you feel it is heavy to rotate, remove the Thrust Washer. Use the following kinds of Thrust Washer according to the necessity. 10.1 x 16 x 0.2 10.1 x 16 x 0.5 10.1 x 16 x 1.0 Paper Feed Roller Thrust Washer

K115sm5eF.doc 5-210

5.13.10 Replacing Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) 1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2). 2) If you will replace either Roll Paper Feed Clutch 3 or Roll paper Feed Clutch 4, loosen 2 pieces of screw (3), and put the Bracket (4) with PCB aside as it is preventative for later works.

1

1

2

3

4

4

K115sm5eF.doc 5-211

3) Disconnect the connector (5), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (6), and then remove each Clutch Mount (7) with clutch. 4) Pull out the connector (8) from the Clutch Mount. Expanding the stopper lever (9) outward, pull out the Roll Paper Feed Clutch (9) from the shaft. Replace the Roll Paper Feed Clutch (10) with the new one.

5

6

67

7

7

8

9

10

K115sm5eF.doc 5-212

5.13.11 Replacing SSR1 and SSR2 1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2). 2) Remove 8 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Duct Assembly (4).

1

1

2

33

4

33

K115sm5eF.doc 5-213

3) Disconnect 4 connectors (5), remove 2 pieces of screw (6), and then remove each SSR (7). Replace the SSR with the new one,.

6

6

5

7

K115sm5eF.doc 5-214

NOTE Each connector of SSR is labelled independently. Connect them to the correct position making reference to the following photo. 2-1 2-2 2-4 2-3 1-3 1-4 1-2 1-1

K115sm5eF.doc 5-215

5.13.12 Replacing LED Cooling Fans (BL8 to BL11) 1) Remove both the Top Roll Deck (1) and the Bypass Feeder Unit (2) making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck] on the page 5-95 and [5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit] on the page 5-122. 2) Loosen the tooth washer screw (3) on the bottom, and remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Cover (5).

12

3

4

5

K115sm5eF.doc 5-216

3) Remove the connector (6), remove 4 pieces of screw (7), and then remove each LED Cooling Fan (8). Replace the LED Cooling Fan (8) with the new one.

6 7 7

78

8

K115sm5eF.doc 5-217

5.13.13 Replacing Leading Edge Sensor (PH12) 1) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1). 2) Disconnect the connector (2), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3), and then remove the Cover 305 Assembly (4).

1

3 3

2

44

K115sm5eF.doc 5-218

3) Draw out the Process Unit (5) from the machine making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3. Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to avoid the light. 4) Loosen the screw (6) to make the Bracket 207 (7) free.

5

6

7

K115sm5eF.doc 5-219

5) Disconnect the connector (8), and remove the bracket with sensor. 6) Remove the screw (9) top remove the Slit Plate (10). Remove the screw (11) to remove the Leading Edge Sensor (12). Replace the Leading Edge Sensor (12) with the new one.

8

9 10

11 12 10

K115sm5eG.doc 5-220

5.13.14 Replacing Pre-transfer LED 1) Open the Right Side Door (1). 2) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (2) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (3) counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (4).

1

3

2

4

K115sm5eG.doc 5-221

3) Rotate the Knob (5) counter-clockwise to unlock, and then pull out the Bracket (6) with Pre-transfer LED. 4) Remove the Cover 6 (7), and then remove both screw (8) and nut (9) to make the wire (10) free.

5

6

7 8

7 8

9

10

K115sm5eG.doc 5-222

5) Remove both screw (11) and nut (12) to make one more wire (13) free. 6) Remove 6 pieces of each bind head screw (14) and Collar (15), and then divide the lamp into 2 pieces of Pre-Transfer LED PCB (16) disconnecting the connector (17). Replace the Pre-transfer LED PCB (16) with the new one.

11 11 12

13

14 1417

16 1415

K115sm5eG.doc 5-223

5.13.15 Adjustment of gap between Drum & Transfer Guide Plate 1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3.

NOTE In case you have replaced or removed the Transfer Guide Plate for some reason, make sure to check the gap between Drum and Transfer Guide Plate using an exclusive Jig. And adjust the gap properly if necessary. The proper gap between Drum and Transfer Guide Plate is 0.75mm to 1.25mm. To measure the gap, use the exclusive Jig shown in the right photo. Drum Gauge for Transfer Guide (7708560011)

0.75mm to 1.25mm

1

K115sm5eG.doc 5-224

2) Remove each Image Corona (2), Drum Assembly (3), Toner Hopper (4) and Developer Unit (5) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. 3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (6).

23

4 5

NOTE If you take checking or adjustment of gap without removing the Developer Unit, you may damage the surface of Development Roller with the tip of Pin of the Drum Gauge

6

K115sm5eG.doc 5-225

4) Disconnect the connector (7), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then remove the Cover 305 Assembly (9). 5) Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (10) from the machine making reference to [5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-151.

8 8

7

99

10

10

K115sm5eG.doc 5-226

6) Fit the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Guide” (11) into the Drum Shaft (12). 7) Close the Process Unit, and then fix it with 4 pieces of screw (13). 8) Bring up the Internal Transportation Unit (14) and lock it at the operation position.

11 11

12

13

13

14

NOTE Make sure to close and lock both the Process Unit and the Internal Transportation Unit before measurement. If these units are not locked at the correct positions, it is impossible to measure the gap correctly.

K115sm5eG.doc 5-227

9) Swing the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Guide” forward and backward to check whether or not its pins touch the Transfer Guide Plate (15). One of 2 pins marked with 0.75mm (16) should not touch the Transfer Guide Plate (15). Another pin marked with 1.25mm (17) should touch the Transfer Guide Plate (15) slightly. If the above conditions are satisfied, the gap is between 0.75mm and 1.25mm. 1.25mm pin should touch the Transfer 0.75mm pin should not touch the Transfer Guide Plate slightly. Guide Plate.

1516

17

0.75mm pin

1.25mm pin

Diameter of Drum

0.75mm pin 1.25mm pin

NOTE Please check not at one point but entirely along the Drum Shaft.

Diameter of Drum

Transfer Guide Plate Transfer Guide Plate

K115sm5eG.doc 5-228

10) If the gap is out of the correct range, loosen 5 pieces of screw (18) one by one and move the Transfer Guide Plate up or down.

18

K115sm5eG.doc 5-229

5.13.16 Replacing Ozone Filters 1) Remove 14 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) and 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the Cover 1 (3).

NOTE Ozone Filters are Periodical Replacement Parts, and their life are 200,000m or 1 year.

1

1

2

1

1

2 3

K115sm5eG.doc 5-230

2) Remove 2 pieces of screw (4) to remove the Cover 2 (5). 3) Remove 4 pieces of Ozone Filter (6). Replace the Ozone Filters (6) with the new ones. 4) Remove 3 pieces of Ozone Filter (7). Replace the Ozone Filters (7) with the new ones.

4

4

5

6

6

7 7

K115sm5eG.doc 5-231

5.13.17 Replacing Separation Fan (BL1) 1) Remove 14 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) and 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the Cover 1 (3).

1

1

2

1

1

2 3

K115sm5eG.doc 5-232

2) Remove 2 pieces of each screw (4) and Flat Washer (5) to remove the Cover 1 (6).

4

4 6

5

5

6

4

K115sm5eG.doc 5-233

3) Disconnect the connector (7), and then remove 3 pieces of screw (8) to remove the Separation Fan (9). Replace the Separation Fan (9) with the new one.

7

8

4

K115sm5eH.doc 5-234

5.14 Toner Cartridge Driving Part

5.14.1 Replacing Transmission PCB (PW7750) & Receiver PCB (PW7751) 1) Open the Toner Cover (1) and the Toner Cartridge Cover (2). 2) Rotate the Toner Cartridge (3) half revolution to move the opening (4) to the top position. Then, remove the Toner Cartridge (3). 3) Open the Right Side Door (5).

1

2

3

4

5

K115sm5eH.doc 5-235

4) Remove 4 pieces of screw (6) to remove the Cover (7). 5) Disconnect the connector (8), and then remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Screw (9) to remove the Transmission PCB (10). Replace the Transmission PCB (10) with the new one. 6) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (11) to remove the Toner Cover (1).

6

6

7

8

9

9

10

11

11

1

K115sm5eH.doc 5-236

7) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (12) to remove the Bracket 562 (13). 8) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (14) to make the Switch (15) free.

12

12

13

14 14 15

K115sm5eH.doc 5-237

9) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (16), disconnect the connector (17), and remove the Bracket (18). 10) Remove 4 pieces of screw (19) and 2 pieces of self-tapping screw (20) to remove the Receiver PCB (21). Replace the Receiver PCB (20) with the new one.

16

17

18

18

19

19

21

16

20

K115sm5eH.doc 5-238

5.14.2 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7) & Toner Supply Clutch (MC11) 1) Open the Toner Cover (1) and the Toner Cartridge Cover (2). 2) Rotate the Toner Cartridge (3) half revolution to move the opening (4) to the top position. Then, remove the Toner Cartridge (3). 3) Open the Right Side Door (5).

1

2

3

4

5

K115sm5eH.doc 5-239

4) Disconnect the connector (6), and then remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (7) to remove the Toner Cover (1). 5) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (8) to remove the Bracket 562 (9).

6

7

7

1

8 8

9

K115sm5eH.doc 5-240

6) Remove the screw (10) to remove the Cover (11). Disconnect 2 connectors (12).

10 11

12

K115sm5eH.doc 5-241

7) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (13) to remove the Cartridge Driving Unit (14).

13

14

K115sm5eH.doc 5-242

8) Remove 2 pieces of Set Screw (15).

15

NOTE When reassemble, keep a 0.5mm of space between plastic part (16) of clutch and Pin (17), and then tighten the Set Screw (15). Keep 0.5mm of space.

1516

17

K115sm5eH.doc 5-243

9) Remove the E Ring (E7) (18) to remove the Oilless Metal (19). Remove the E Ring (E8) (20).

18

20

18

20

19

K115sm5eH.doc 5-244

10) Remove 2 pieces of each screw (21) and Stud (22), and remove the Toner Supply Motor 1 (23). Replace the Toner Supply Motor 1 (23) with the new one.

21

21

22

23

K115sm5eH.doc 5-245

11) Remove the Bracket 511 (24) and the Oilless Metal (25). 12) Remove the E Ring (E10) (26). 13) Pull the Shaft (27) toward the arrow mark to pull out from the Pin (17).

24

24

25

26

26

27

17

K115sm5eH.doc 5-246

14) Expanding the stopper lever (28) outward, pull out the shaft from the Toner Supply Clutch (29). Replace the Toner Supply Clutch (29) with the new one.

28

29

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-247

5.15 Web (Option)

5.15. 1 Replacement of Web Roll 2. Open the Top Rear Cover (1) 3. Loosen 3 screws (2) then close the Top Rear Cover (1). 4. Remove the Cover 5 (3).

2

1

1

3

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-248

5. Remove the screw (4), and remove the Cover 4 (5) on the right. 6. Remove the screw (6), and remove the Cover 3 (7) on the right. 7. Remove 4 screws (8). 8. Remove the Web Unit (9).

5

4

6

7

8 8

9

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-249

9. Pulling out the Pins (10), remove both rolls of old Web from the unit. 10. Install the large web roll (11) to its setting position. (See the following photo)

10

NOTE Install the large web roll pulling out the Pin (12).

11

12

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-250

11. Install the small web roll (13) of Web Roll to its setting position similarly.

NOTE Install the small web roll pulling out the Pin (14).

14

13

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-251

12. Retrieve the small web roll until the printed number (15) is hidden.

15

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-252

13. Return the Web Unit (9) with new Web to the KIP9000 with 4 screws (8).

NOTE Confirm there is no space between Web Unit and Cover 2 Assy. The driving gears are not engaged Is there is space.

9

8

8

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-253

14. Return both Cover 3 (7) and Cover 4 (5). 15. Return the Cover 5 (3) finally. 16. Turn on the KIP9000, and set the Web Operation Time to “0 hour 0 minute 0 second” in the following Service Mode items.

• 5-9E : Web Operation Time (Hour) • 5-9F : Web Operation Time (Minute) • 5-A0 : Web Operation Time (Second)

17. After setting the Web Operation Time to “0 hour 0 minute 0 second”, press the CUT Key on the operation Panel when in any of the above service modes (5-9E to 5-A0). The Web End Error (and Web Near End Error) can be cleared by this operation.

3

7 5

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-254

5.15. 2 Installation of Web Kit 1. Confirm the following parts are included in the kit.

Item name Picture Item name Picture Web Unit Cover 2 Assy

Web Motor Assy 56/22 Gear Assy

16T Gear Assy Ball Bearing

22T Gear E Ring

Web Oil Pan

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-255

Item name Picture Item name Picture M4x6 tooth washer screw 2 : for Oil Pan 1 : for 56/22 Gear Assy

M4x8 tooth washer screw 4: for Web Unit 4: for Cover 2 Assy

M3x6 bind screw

2. Open the Top Rear Cover (1) 3. Loosen 3 screws (2) then close the Top Rear Cover (1).

2

1

1

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-256

4. Remove the Cover 5 (3). 5. Remove the screw (4), and remove the Cover 4 (5) on the right. 6. Remove the screw (6), and remove the Cover 3 (7) on the right.

3

5

4

6

7

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-257

7. Open the Exit Cover (8). Disconnect 2 connectors (9) on the right and 1 connector (10) on the left. 8. Remove 4 tooth washer screws (11). 9. Remove the Cover 2 Assy (12). (This Cover 2 Assy is no longer reused as it is to be replaced with the one included in the kit.)

10

9

8

11 11

12

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-258

10. Remove the Brackets (13) on both sides removing 2 screws (14) for each one. 11. Remove 4 screws (15). 12. Remove the Reinforcement Plate (16). (Reinforcement Plate is no longer reused.)

13

14

13

14

15 15

16

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-259

13. Install the 56/22T Gear Assy (17) on the left with 1 piece of M4x6 tooth washer screw (18)

17 18

17

18

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-260

14. Prepare 16T Gear Assy (19), 2 Ball Bearings (20), 22T Gear (21) and E Ring (22). Fit 1 Ball Bearing (20) to the shaft of 16T Gear Assy (19), insert the shaft from inside to outside fitting the 22T Gear (21) as the photo, and fix the end of shaft with another Ball Bearing (20) and E Ring (22).

20 22

19 21

19 20

19

20

21

22

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-261

15. Fix the 22T Gear (21) with the set screw (23).

NOTE Fix the 22T Gear where the set screw (23) contacts on the inside step part (24) on the shaft.

23 21

24 23

Contact them

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-262

16. Install the Web Motor Assy (25) with 2 M3x6 bind screws (26).

25

26

25

26 26

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-263

17. Install the Oil Pan (27) with 2 M4x6 tooth washer screw (28). (Tighten the screws with pressing the Oil Pan in the direction of arrow.)

27 28

28

28

27

27

Press to this side

Press to this side

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-264

18. Return the Brackets (13) on both sides and fix them with screws (14).

14

13

14

13

NOTE 2 Brackets (13) are the same parts.

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-265

19. Install the Cover 2 Assy (29) with 4 M4x8 tooth washer screws (30).

30

29

29

30

30

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-266

20. Connect the connector (10) on the left. 21. Connect 2 connectors (9) which were disconnected at the former procedure 7. And connect 1 “added” connector (31).

10

9

31

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-267

22. Prepare the Web Unit (32) and Web Roll (33). 23. Install the large web roll (34) to its setting position. (See the following photo)

32 33

NOTE Install the large web roll pulling out the Pin (35).

34

35

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-268

24. Install the small web roll (36) of Web Roll to its setting position similarly.

NOTE Install the small web roll pulling out the Pin (37).

37

36

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-269

25. Retrieve the small web roll until the printed number (38) is hidden.

38

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-270

26. Install the Web Unit (32) with new Web to the KIP9000 with 4 M4x8 screws (39).

NOTE Confirm there is no space between Web Unit and Cover 2 Assy. The driving gears are not engaged Is there is space.

30

32

39

39

K115sm5eJ.doc 5-271

27. Return both Cover 3 (7) and Cover 4 (5). 28. Return the Cover 5 (3) finally.

3

7 5

K115sm6e1.doc 6-1

Chapter 6

Maintenance / Checking

KIP 9000 Preventative Maintenance Procedure every 80,000 linear feet

Step #1 - Prepare Machine.

Ask user about printer performance / image quality. Print internal test prints 1 & 3. Review Quality. Locate the “KIP 9000 PM Schedule” Form and check off each item completed. Replace noted items as this procedure progresses. Remove drum and place into supplied box. Remove top covers to remove process unit / assemblies.

Step #2 - Corona Units Clean Grid Screen with Simple Green, and then rinse with water. Allow to dry on paper towel. Clean 1st charge wires and case with glass cleaner. Clean transfer / separation wires and case with glass cleaner.

Step #3 - Clean interior of printer Separation fans / air guides. Transport belts. Transfer guide plates etc.

Step #4 - Development Unit Clean spacing rollers. Vacuum toner dust from ends of developer unit. Vacuum around toner hopper inlet. Clean and lubricate gears as needed with G501 grease / Lithium grease.

Step #5 - LED Print Head. Clean fiber optic lens with glass cleaner and a lint-free cloth.

Step #6 - Paper Decks Vacuum paper dust. Inspect media spools for damage.

Step #7 - Air Flow Vacuum ozone filters. Confirm that all fans and blowers are clean and operational.

Step #8 - Fuser Section Clean upper nails. Shift upper nails (left / right / center etc.) Clean lower nails. Clean and lubricate gears as needed with high temperature grease.

Step #9 - Cutter Assembly Clean paper dust. Periodically apply oil to cutter pad.

Step #10 Run test pattern #1 and #3 to verify print quality. Save copies. Step #11 Clean panels and covers. Step #12 Speak with key operator on your evaluation / status.

- Please keep this document with the printer r1- Denote when the maintenance / replacement is performed.

Description / Item Qty Part # Code

80 Com

plet

e

160 Com

plet

e

240 Com

plet

e

320 Com

plet

e

400 Com

plet

e

480 Com

plet

e

560 Com

plet

e

640 Com

plet

e

720 Com

plet

e

800 Com

plet

e

Corona Wire Kit (wires & pads) 1 Z158000010 R RCharge Wires G C C C C C C C C C C

T / S Wires G C C C C C C C C C CLED Head G C C C C C C C C C CGrid Screen 1 7705100150 G C C C C C C C R C CDevelopment Unit 1 Z154690010 R Developer Gears L L L L L L L L L LDeveloper Spacer Discs G C C C CDrum 1 SUP9000-101 RFilter Kit 1 Z158000020 V C C C R C C C R C CFuser Kit (rollers, nails & bearings) 1 Z158000030 R

Upper Fuser Nail C / A C / A C / A C / A C / A C / A C / A C / A C / ALower Fuser Nails C C C C C C C C C

Fuser Gears L L L L L L L L L LKnife V C C C C C Knife Oil Pad I L L L LPaper Supply Rollers C CPaper Drive Gears ( metal collar ) L L L L LVacuum interior / paper decks V C C C C C C C C C CExterior Covers G C C C C C C C C C C

G = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dryV = Clean carefully with vacuum

Linear Feet X 1000

KIP 9000 - Maintenance Schedule

C = CleanI = Inspect

R = ReplaceA = Adjust

L = Lubricate

Serial Number

Page 1

- Please keep this document with the printer r1- Denote when the maintenance / replacement is performed.

Description / Item Qty Part # Code

880 Com

plet

e

960 Com

plet

e

1040 Com

plet

e

1120 Com

plet

e

1200 Com

plet

e

1280 Com

plet

e

1360 Com

plet

e

1440 Com

plet

e

1520 Com

plet

e

1600 Com

plet

e

Corona Wire Kit (wires & pads) 1 Z158000010 R R RCharge Wires G C C C C C C C C C C

T / S Wires G C C C C C C C C C CLED Head G C C C C C C C C C CGrid Screen 1 7705100150 G C C C C C R C C C CDevelopment Unit 1 Z154690010 R Developer Gears L L L L L L L L L LDeveloper Spacer Discs G C C C CDrum 1 SUP9000-101 RFilter Kit 1 Z158000020 V C R C C C R C C C RFuser Kit (rollers, nails & bearings) 1 Z158000030 R

Upper Fuser Nail C / A C / A C / A C / A C / A C / A C / A C / A C / ALower Fuser Nails C C C C C C C C C

Fuser Gears L L L L L L L L L LKnife V C C C C C Knife Oil Pad L L R L L Paper Supply Rollers C C C C CPaper Drive Gears ( metal collar ) L L L L LVacuum interior / paper decks V C C C C C C C C C CExterior Covers G C C C C C C C C C C

G = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dryV = Clean carefully with vacuum I = Inspect A = Adjust

Linear Feet X 1000

KIP 9000 - Maintenance Schedule

C = Clean R = Replace L = Lubricate

Page 2

K115sm7e1.doc 7-1

Chapter 7

Troubleshooting Page 7. 1 Error Codes 7- 3 7. 1. 1 Door Open Errors 7- 3 7. 1. 2 Operator Call Errors 7- 4 7. 1. 3 Service Call Errors 7- 6 7. 2 Measures against Errors 7- 8 7. 2. 1 Measures against Door Open Errors 7- 8 7. 2. 1. 1 “U-01” Top Roll Deck Open 7- 8 7. 2. 1. 2 “U-02” Middle Roll Deck Open 7- 8 7. 2. 1. 3 “U-03” Bottom Roll Deck Open 7- 8 7. 2. 1. 4 “U-04” Internal Transportation Unit Open 7- 8 7. 2. 1. 5 “U-06” Toner Cover Open 7- 9 7. 2. 1. 6 “U-11” Bypass Feeder Open 7- 9 7. 2. 1. 7 “U-12” Right Side Door Open 7- 9 7. 2. 1. 8 “U-13” Top Rear Cover Open 7- 9 7. 2. 1. 9 “U-14” Exit Cover Open 7- 9 7. 2. 2 Measures against Operator Call Errors 7-10 7. 2. 2. 1 “J-01” Roll 1 Jam 7-10 7. 2. 2. 2 “J-02” Roll 2 Jam 7-10 7. 2. 2. 3 “J-03” Roll 3 Jam 7-11 7. 2. 2. 4 “J-04” Roll 4 Jam 7-11 7. 2. 2. 5 “J-05” Bypass Feeder Jam 7-12 7. 2. 2. 6 “J-11” Cutter - Drum Area Jam 7-12 7. 2. 2. 7 “J-12” Separation Area Jam 7-13 7. 2. 2. 8 “J-13” Fuser Entrance Jam 7-14 7. 2. 2. 9 “J-14” Fuser Inside Jam 7-14 7. 2. 2.10 Toner Empty 7-15 7. 2. 2.11 Roll Empty 7-15 7. 2. 3 Measures against Service Call Errors 7-16 7. 2. 3. 1 “E-01” Fuser Temperature Rising Error 7-16 7. 2. 3. 2 “E-02” Fuser Over-heating Error 7-17 7. 2. 3. 3 “E-05” Drum Motor Error 7-18 7. 2. 3. 4 “E-06” Counter A/B Error 7-18 7. 2. 3. 5 “E-07” Cutter Motor Error 7-19 7. 2. 3. 6 “E-09” Web End Error 7-20 7. 2. 3. 7 “E-13” Paper Feed Motor Error 7-20 7. 2. 3. 8 “E-14” Fuser Motor Error 7-21 7. 2. 3. 9 “E-16” Wire Cleaning Error 7-21 7. 2. 3.10 “E-21” Fuser Thermostat Error 7-21 7. 2. 3.11 “E-23” LED Head Cleaning Error 7-22 7. 2. 3.12 “E-26” Surface Potential Control Error 7-22 7. 2. 3.13 “E-27” Density Sensor Error 7-22 7. 2. 3.14 “E-28” Density Control Error 7-22 7. 2. 3.15 “E-30” Developer Disconnection Error 7-23 7. 2. 3.16 “E-43” RFID (IC Tag) Error 7-23 7. 2. 3.17 “E-49” Developer Positioning Motor Error 7-23 7. 2. 3.18 “E-F0” Folder Error 7-23 7. 2. 3.19 “E-Fb” Flash ROM Error 7-24 7. 2. 3.20 “C-01” Toner Cartridge Error 7-24

K115sm7e1.doc 7-2

7. 3 Measures against Image Defects 7-25 7. 3. 1 Standard settings of image process items 7-25 7. 3. 2 Measures against each image defect 7-26 7. 3. 2. 1 Halftone is too light 7-26 7. 3. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light 7-27 7. 3. 2. 3 Every image is too light 7-29 7. 3. 2. 4 Uneven density between left and right 7-31 7. 3. 2. 5 Foggy background 7-31 7. 3. 2. 6 Foggy thick black lines (from LE to TE) 7-32 7. 3. 2. 7 Clear thin black line (from LE to TE) 7-32 7. 3. 2. 8 White lines (from LE to TE) 7-33 7. 3. 2. 9 Image void 7-33 7. 3. 2.10 Dirt on the backside 7-34 7. 3. 2.11 Offset print 7-34 7. 3. 2.12 Weak fusing 7-35 7. 3. 2.13 Leading margin defect (No leading margin) 7-36 7. 3. 2.14 Jitter 7-36 7. 3. 2.15 Unsharpened image (Focus defect) 7-37 7. 3. 2.16 Uneven density between front and rear 7-37 7. 3. 2.17 Completely white 7-38 7. 3. 2.18 Completely black 7-38

K115sm7e1.doc 7-3

7. 1 Error Codes

7. 1. 1 Door Open Errors KIP9000 will show the following Door Open Error when any door or unit is open or unlocked. The user can fix them.

Error Codes

Error name Error condition

U-01 Top Roll Deck Open Top Roll Deck is open. U-02 Middle Roll Deck Open Middle Roll Deck is open. U-03 Bottom Roll Deck Open Bottom Roll Deck is open. U-04 Internal Transportation

Unit Open Internal Transportation Unit is open unlocked.

U-06 Toner Cover Open Toner Cover is open. U-11 Bypass Feeder Open Bypass Feeder is open. U-12 Right Side Door Open Right Side Door is open. U-13 Top Rear Cover Open Top Rear Cover is open. U-14 Exit Cover Open Exit Cover is open.

1 : Top Roll Deck 2 : Middle Roll Deck 3 : Bottom Roll Deck 4 : Internal Transportation Unit 5 : Toner Cover 6 : Bypass Feeder 7 : Right Side Door 8 : Top Rear Cover 9 : Exit Cover

1 2 3

5

7

6

9

4

8

K115sm7e1.doc 7-4

7. 1. 2 Operator Call Errors KIP9000 will show the following Operator Call Error when it has any error that can be fixed by the user.

Error Codes


J-01 Roll 1 Jam 1. Roll Set Sensor 1 Signal (RP_SET1) does not change from H to L within a decided time since the KIP9000 has started transporting the Roll 1 from the wait position. 2. Roll Set Sensor 1 Signal (RP_SET1) does not change from L to H within a decided time since the KIP9000 has started retrieving the Roll 1 back to wait position.




J-05 Bypass Feeder Jam Bypass Start Sensor Signal (MPSRT) does not change from H to L within a decided time since the KIP9000 has started transporting the cut sheet media to the wait position.

J-11 Cutter - Drum Area Jam 1. Leading Edge Sensor Signal (PA_ENT) does not change from H to L within a decided time since the KIP9000 has started transporting the media from the wait position of each media source. (Wait position of each media source means PH1, PH2, PH3, PH4 and PH20). 2. Leading Edge Sensor Signal (PA_ENT) does not change from L to H within a decided time since the Cutter has started the cutting operation.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-5

Error Codes


J-12 Separation Area Jam 1. Separation Sensor Signal (P_SEPR) is L when KIP9000 is turned on. 2. Separation Sensor Signal (P_SEPR) does not change from H to L within a decided time since the KIP9000 has started transporting the media from any of wait positions. (Wait positions mean any of PH1, PH2, PH3, PH4 and PH20).

J-13 Fuser Entrance Jam 1. Exit Sensor Signal (P_EXIT) is L when KIP9000 is turned on. 2. Exit Sensor Signal (P_EXIT) does not change from H to L within a decided time since the KIP9000 has started transporting the media from any of wait positions. (Wait positions mean any of PH1, PH2, PH3, PH4 and PH20).

J-14 Fuser Inside Jam Exit Sensor Signal (P_EXIT) had changed from H to L during printing, but it does not change to L within a decided time although the Leading Edge Sensor Signal (PA_ENT) has changed from L to H.

Toner empty The quantity of toner is smaller than the requirement. LED is lighting : No more print is available. LED is flashing : Some more print is available.

Roll empty 1. Roll media is not installed in the selected Roll Deck. 2. Selected roll media is emptied in the middle of printing or when the KIP9000 is checking the roll size.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-6

7. 1. 3 Service Call Errors KIP9000 will show the following Service Call Error when it has any significant error which the service personnel only can fix. (User can not fit these errors.)

Error Codes


E-01 Fuser Temperature Rising Error

1. Fusing temperature does not rise up to 120oC within a decided time after turning on. 2. Fusing temperature falls down to 70oC after once getting ready.

E-02 Fuser Over-heating Error

Fusing temperature is over 200oC.

E-05 Drum Motor Error Drum Motor Control Signal (DRMTR) and Drum Motor Synchronous Signal (DRMTR_LD) do not synchronize with each other for a decided time.

E-06 Counter A/B Error 1. Counter Control Signal Feed Back (IN_CNT_A or IN_CNT_B) continues to be L for 1 second or longer when the Counter should count up. 2. Counter Control Signal Feed Back (IN_CNT_A or IN_CNT_B) continues to be H for 1 second or longer when the Counter is not counting up.

E-07 Cutter Motor Error 1. Cutter remains at its home position although 0.3 seconds has passed since the Cutter Motor has started the operation. 2. Cutter does not arrive at its home position although 1 second has passed since the Cutter Motor has started the operation. 3. Home position can not be detected for 2 seconds during cutter cleaning.

E-09 Web End Error When Web End is detected. E-13 Paper Feed Motor Error Paper Feed Motor Control Signal (PFMTR) and Paper

Feed Motor Synchronous Signal (PFMTR_LD) do not synchronize each other for a decided time.

E-14 Fuser Motor Error Fuser Motor Control Signal (FUMTR) and Fuser Motor Synchronous Signal (FUMTR_LD) do not synchronize each other for a decided time.

E-16 Wire Cleaning Error Over-current can not be detected although 90 seconds has passed since the Wire Cleaning Motor had started to work.

E-21 Fuser Thermostat Error Thermostat is open-circuited. E-23 LED Head Cleaning

Error Over-current can not be detected although 90 seconds has passed since the LED Cleaning Motor had started to work.

E-26 Surface Potential Control Error

When the Auto SP Control fails in adjusting the surface potential to within the acceptable range.

E-27 Density Sensor Error When the initialization of Density Sensor could not be achieved successfully during Density Lock process.

E-28 Density Control Error When the Auto Density Control fails in adjusting the density to within the acceptable range.

E-30 Developer Disconnection Error

When the connector in Process Unit is disconnected.

E-43 RFID (IC Tag) Error When the FRID PCB is defective. E-49 Developer Positioning

Motor Error Home position of Developer Unit can not be detected although 60 seconds has passed since the Developer Positioning Motor had started the positioning operation.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-7

Error Codes


E-F0 Folder Error 1. Communication between KIP9000 and Folder is abnormal. 2. Folder has any error other than jam.

E-Fb Flash ROM Error Writing to the Flash ROM is failed.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-8

7. 2 Measures against Errors

7. 2. 1 Measures against Door Open Errors 7. 2. 1. 1 “U-01” Top Roll Deck Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Top Roll Deck

1 Is the Top Roll Deck closed firmly?

No Close it firmly.

Yes Check the connector pin J70-32. Top Roll Deck Connector (J70)

2 Is the Connector J70 firmly connected when Top Roll Deck is closed?

No Remove the deck and install the connector (J70) correctly.

Main Control PCB (PW11520)

3 Can the error be fixed by replacing the Main Control PCB?

Yes OK

7. 2. 1. 2 “U-02” Middle Roll Deck Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Middle Roll Deck

1 Is the Middle Roll Deck closed firmly?

No Close it firmly.

Yes Check the connector pin J71-22. Middle Roll Deck Connector (J71)





Yes OK

7. 2. 1. 3 “U-03” Bottom Roll Deck Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Bottom Roll Deck

1 Is the Bottom Roll Deck closed firmly?

No Close it firmly.

Yes Check the connector pin J72-37. Bottom Roll Deck Connector (J72)





Yes OK

7. 2. 1. 4 “U-04” Internal Transportation Unit Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Internal Transportation Unit

1 Is the Internal Transportation Unit closed firmly?

No Close it firmly. (Confirm the lock lever is clicked into place.)

No Reinstall the sensor (PH24) properly.

Internal Transportation Unit Sensor (PH24)

2 Is the light from Photo Interrupter surely interrupted when the Internal Transportation Unit is closed?

Yes 1. Check if the sensor harness is damaged, or check if the connector of sensor harness is surely connected. 2. Replace the sensor (PH24) If the harness is OK.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-9

7. 2. 1. 5 “U-06” Toner Cover Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Toner Cover

1 Is the Toner Cover closed firmly? No Close it firmly.

Toner Cover Switch (DS5 & DS6)

2 Check the voltage at J202-3 on the Main Control PCB. Is it 5VDC when the cover is open and 0VDC when it is closed?

No 1. Check if the harnesses between switch and Main Controller PCB damaged or disconnected. 2. Replace the switches (DS5 & DS6) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK

7. 2. 1. 6 “U-11” Bypass Feeder Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Bypass Feeder

1 Is the Bypass Feeder closed firmly?

No Close it firmly.



Yes OK

7. 2. 1. 7 “U-12” Right Side Door Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Right Side Door

1 Is the Right Side Door closed firmly?

No Close it firmly.

Right Side Door Switch (DS1 & DS2)

2 Check the voltage at J202-2 on the Main Control PCB. Is it 5VDC when the door is open and 0VDC when it is closed?

No 1. Check if the harness between switch and Main Control PCB damaged or disconnected. 2. Replace the switches (DS1 & DS2) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK

7. 2. 1. 8 “U-13” Top Rear Cover Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Top Rear Cover

1 Is the Top Rear Cover closed firmly?

No Close it firmly.

Top Rear Cover Connector (J91)


No 1. Check if the harness between switch and Main Control PCB damaged or disconnected. 2. Replace the connector (J91) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK

7. 2. 1. 9 “U-14” Exit Cover Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Exit Cover

1 Is the Exit Cover closed firmly? No Close the Exit Cover firmly.

Exit Cover Switch (DS3 & DS4)


No 1. Check if the harness between switch and Main Control PCB is damaged or disconnected. 2. Replace the switches (DS3 & DS4) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-10

7. 2. 2 Measures against Operator Call Errors 7. 2. 2. 1 “J-01” Roll 1 Jam

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1)

1 Check the input signal from the Roll Set Sensor 1 (signal code 04) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor and “H” when the media is not on the sensor?

No 1. Check if the sensor harness has any abnormality. 2. Replace the sensor (PH1) if the harness is OK.

Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 (MC1) Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (MC8)

2 Can the following clutches be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode? - Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 (Signal code : 92) - Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (Signal code : 9C)

No 1. Check if the harness of clutch has any abnormality. 2. Replace each clutch (MC1 & MC8) if the harness is OK.

DC Driver PCB (PW7755)

3 Can the error be fixed by replacing the DC Driver PCB?

Yes OK



Yes OK

7. 2. 2. 2 “J-02” Roll 2 Jam




Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 (MC2)

2 Can the Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 (signal code : 93) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of clutch has any abnormality. 2. Replace the clutch (MC2) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-11

7. 2. 2. 3 “J-03” Roll 3 Jam









Yes OK



Yes OK

7. 2. 2. 4 “J-04” Roll 4 Jam









Yes OK



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-12

7. 2. 2. 5 “J-05” Bypass Feeder Jam

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7)

1 Can the Bypass Feed Clutch (signal code : 98) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?


Bypass Feeding Motor (M10)

2 Can the Bypass Feeding Motor (signal code : 3C) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of motor has any abnormality. 2. Replace the motor (M10) if the harness is OK.

Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (SL3)

3 Can the Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (signal code : 3A) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of solenoid has any abnormality. 2. Replace the solenoid (SL3) if the harness is OK.

Bypass Start Sensor (PH20)

4 Check the input signal from the Bypass Start Sensor (signal code 03) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor and “H” when the media is not on the sensor?




Yes OK



Yes OK

7. 2. 2. 6 “J-11” Cutter – Drum Area Jam

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Leading Edge Sensor (PH12)

1 Check the input signal from the Leading Edge Sensor (signal code EE) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor and “H” when the media is not on the sensor?


Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) Paper Feed Brake (MC9)

2 Can the following clutch or brake be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode? - Paper Feed Clutch (Signal code : 91) - Paper Feed Brake (Signal code : 9E)

No 1. Check if the harness of clutch or brake has any abnormality. 2. Replace the clutch (MC6) or brake (MC9) if the harness is OK.

Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) Paper Gate Brake (MC10)

3 Can the following clutch or brake be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode? - Paper Gate Clutch (Signal code : 90) - Paper Gate Brake (Signal code : 9D)

No 1. Check if the harness of clutch or brake has any abnormality. 2. Replace the clutch (MC5) or brake (MC10) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-13

7. 2. 2. 7 “J-12” Separation Area Jam

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Separation Sensor (PH18)

1 Check the input signal from the Separation Sensor (signal code 2E) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor and “H” when the media is not on the sensor?


Separation Corona 2 Can the Separation Corona (signal code : A1) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Clean each housing and wire, and check the wire height. 2. Replace the corona wire. 3. Replace the High Voltage Power Supply (HVP4).

Separation Lamp 3 Can the Separation Lamp (signal code : 7B) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of lamp has any abnormality. 2. Replace the Separation Lamp if the harness is OK.

Pre-transfer LED 4 Can the Pre-transfer LED (signal code : A3) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of LED has any abnormality. 2. Replace the Pre-transfer LED if the harness is OK.

Separation Fan (BL1)

5 Can the Separation Fan (signal code : 7D) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of fan has any abnormality. 2. Replace the fan (BL1) if the harness is OK.

Separation Assist Blowers (BL12, BL13, BL14, BL15 & BL16)

6 Can the Separation Assist Blowres be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode? - BL12 & BL16 (Signal code : 3E) - BL13 & BL15 (Signal code : 3F) - BL14 (Signal code : 99)

No 1. Check if the harness of each blower has any abnormality. 2. Replace the blower (BL12 to 16) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-14

7. 2. 2. 8 “J-13” Fuser Entrance Jam

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Exit Sensor (LS2)

1 Check the input signal from the Exit Sensor (signal code 2F) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor and “H” when the media is not on the sensor?

No 1. Check if the sensor harness has any abnormality. 2. Replace the sensor (LS2) if the harness is OK.

Separation Corona 2 Can the Separation Corona (signal code : A1) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Clean each housing and wire, and check the wire height. 2. Replace the corona wire. 3. Replace the High Voltage Power Supply (HVP4).

Separation Lamp 3 Can the Separation Lamp (signal code : 7B) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of lamp has any abnormality. 2. Replace the Separation Lamp if the harness is OK.

Pre-transfer LED 4 Can the Pre-transfer LED (signal code : A3) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of LED has any abnormality. 2. Replace the Pre-transfer LED if the harness is OK.

Separation Fan (BL1)

5 Can the Separation Fan (signal code : 7D) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of fan has any abnormality. 2. Replace the fan (BL1) if the harness is OK.

Separation Assist Blowers (BL12, BL13, BL14, BL15 & BL16)

6 Can the Separation Assist Blowres be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode? - BL12 & BL16 (Signal code : 3E) - BL13 & BL15 (Signal code : 3F) - BL14 (Signal code : 99)

No 1. Check if the harness of each blower has any abnormality. 2. Replace the blower (BL12 to 16) if the harness is OK.

Pressure Blowers (BL4, BL5, BL6 & BL7)

7 Can the Pressure Blowers (signal codes : 6D & 6F) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No 1. Check if the harness of blower has any abnormality. 2. Replace the blowers (BL4 to 7) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK



Yes OK

7. 2. 2. 9 “J-14” Fuser Inside Jam

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Stripper Finger Ass’y Or Separation Finger

1 Is the tip of Stripper Finger Ass’y or Separation Finger dirty?

Yes Clean their tips.

Exit Sensor (LS2)

2 Check the input signal from the Exit Sensor (signal code 2F) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor and “H” when the media is not on the sensor?

No 1. Check if the sensor harness has any abnormality. 2. Replace the sensor (LS2) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-15

7. 2. 2.10 Toner Empty

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting condition of Toner Cartridge

1 Is the opening of Toner Cartridge directed downward?

No Direct it downward.

Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7)

2 Can the Toner Supply Motor 1 (signal code : A7) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?


Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6)

3 Can the Toner Supply Motor 2 (signal code : 98) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?


Toner Supply Clutch (MC11)

4 Can the Toner Supply Clutch (signal code : 79) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?


Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1)

5 Check the input signal from the Hopper Toner Sensor (signal code 1d) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. Does it show “H” when the Hopper Toner Sensor is under the toner?

No 1. Check if the sensor harness has any abnormality. 2. Replace the sensor (TLS1) if the harness is OK.

Toner Sensor (PH43 & PH44)

6 Can the error be fixed by replacing the Toner Sensors?

Yes OK



Yes OK



Yes OK

7. 2. 2.11 Roll Empty

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Rubber belt in the Roll Deck

1 Is the rubber belt on the right of each Roll Deck surely contacting the bottom of small black roller of Roll Spool? (Belt will be driven by the spool if contacting properly.)

No Install the Roll Spool correctly.

Spool Brake 2 Try to replace the Spool Brake. Paper Feed Clock Sensors (PH13, PH14, PH15 & PH16)

3 Check the input signal from the concerning Paper Feed Clock Sensor in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. - Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 (Signal code : 08) - Paper Feed Clock Sensor 2 (Signal code : 09) - Paper Feed Clock Sensor 3 (Signal code : 0A) - Paper Feed Clock Sensor 4 (Signal code : 0b) Does the input shows “H” and “L” alternately?

No 1. Check if the sensor harness has any abnormality. 2. Replace the concerning sensor (PH13 to 16) if the harness is OK.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-16

7. 2. 3 Measures against Service Call Errors 7. 2. 3. 1 “E-01” Fuser Temperature Rising Error When “E-01” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “00”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Harness 1 Is the harness connected to each

IR Lamps (H1 & H2), SSR (SSR1 & SSR2) and Thermistor (TH1)?

No Connect it.

IR Lamps (H1 & H2) 2 Plug out the KIP9000 and check the resistance of each IR Lamp. Is there any resistance?

No Replace the IR Lamps.

Thermistor 1 (TH1) 3 Check the fuser temperature (data No.00) in the Data Monitoring Mode of Service Mode, and compare it with the setting value of fuser temperature specified in each of the following service mode items. 4-10: Fusing temperature (PPC) 4-11: Fusing temperature (Tracing) 4-12: Fusing temperature (Film) Are the detected temperature and setting temperature greatly different from each other?

Yes 1. Clean the Thermistor 1 and reinstall it correctly. 2. If the error still occurs, replace the Thermistor 1.

Interlock 4 Check the voltage between Terminals 0 and 1 on each Relay 2 and Relay 3. Is it 24V?

No Check if the interlock can correctly open and close.

Temperature Detect PCB (PW7740) Or Thermistor 2 (TH2)

5 Check the voltage at the Terminal 1 on each Relay 2 and Relay 3. Is it 0V?

No 1. Replace the Temperature Detect PCB. 2. If the error still occurs, replace the Thermistor 2.


6 Does the gray lead wire on the coil side of Relay 2 show 24V? And does the orange lead wire on the same place show 0V?

No Replace the DC Driver PCB.

Relay 2 (RY2) 7 Check the voltage between Terminals 4 and 8 on the IR Lamp side of Relay 2. Is it 230VAC?

No Replace the Relay 2.

No Replace the Phase Control PCB 2. Phase Control PCB 2 (PW6125 02) Or SSR (SSR1)

8 Check the voltage at both J253-1 and J253-3 on the Phase Control PCB 2. Does J253-3 show 0V when J253-1 shows 0V?

Yes Replace the SSR1

Relay 3 (RY3) 9 Check the voltage between Terminals 4 and 8 on the IR Lamp side of Relay 3. Is it 230VAC?

No Replace the Relay 3.

No Replace the Phase Control PCB 2. Phase Control PCB 2 (PW6125 02) Or SSR (SSR2)

10 Check the voltage at both J253-2 and J253-4 on the Phase Control PCB 2. Does J253-4 show 0V when J253-2 shows 0V?




Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-17

7. 2. 3. 2 “E-02” Fuser Over-heating Error When “E-02” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “01”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.


IR Lamps (H1 & H2), SSR (SSR1 & SSR2) and Thermistor (TH1)?

No Connect it.

SSR1 2 While checking the fuser temperature (data No.00) in the Data Monitoring Mode of Service Mode, check the voltage at J253-3 on the Phase Control PCB 2 (PW6125 02). Does the temperature gradually rise when the J253-3 shows 24V?

Yes Replace the SSR1.

SSR2 3 While checking the fuser temperature (data No.00) in the Data Monitoring Mode of Service Mode, check the voltage at J253-4 on the Phase Control PCB 2 (PW6125 02). Does the temperature gradually rise when the J253-4 shows 24V?


Thermistor 1 (TH1) 4 Check the fuser temperature (data No.00) in the Data Monitoring Mode of Service Mode, and compare it with the setting value of fuser temperature specified in each of the following service mode items. 4-10: Fusing temperature (PPC) 4-11: Fusing temperature (Tracing) 4-12: Fusing temperature (Film) Are the detected temperature and setting temperature greatly different from each other?

No Replace the Thermistor 1 with the new one.

Phase Control PCB 2 (PW6125 02)

5 1. Check the voltage at both J253-2 and J253-4 on the Phase Control PCB 2. Does J253-4 show 24V when J253-2 shows 5V? 2. Check the voltage at both J253-1 and J253-3 on the Phase Control PCB 2. Does J253-3 show 24V when J253-1 shows 5V?

No Replace the Phase Control PCB 2.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-18

7. 2. 3. 3 “E-05” Drum Motor Error When “E-05” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “04”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.


Drum Motor, Drum Motor Controller PCB and DC Driver PCB?

No Connect it.

Drum Motor (M1) Or Drum Motor Controller PCB (TP1142)

2 Can the Drum Motor (signal code : 85) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No Replace either Drum Motor or Drum Motor Controller PCB.



Yes OK

7. 2. 3. 4 “E-06” Counter A/B Error When “E-06” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “08”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Harness 1 Is the harness connected among

Counter A, Counter B and Main Control PCB?

No Connect it.

Counter A 2 Check the voltage at J209-4 on the Main Control PCB while printing. Does it momently change from 24V to 0V every about 1m of printing?

Yes Replace the Counter A.

Counter B 3 Check the voltage at J209-3 on the Main Control PCB while printing. Does it momently change from 24V to 0V every about 1m of printing?

Yes Replace the Counter B.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-19

7. 2. 3. 5 “E-07” Cutter Motor Error When “E-07” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “07”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.


Cutter Motor, Cutter Motor Controller PCB, Cutter Home Position Sensor and DC Driver PCB?

No Connect it.

Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22)

2 Take test print (or initial cut) while checking the input signal from Cutter Home Position Sensor (signal code : 43) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of service mode Does the status momently change from “L” to “H” (then “H” to “L” soon) when the Cutter operates?

No Replace the Cutter Home Position Sensor.

Cutter Motor (M3) Or Cutter Motor Controller PCB (PW7756)

3 Can the Cutter Motor (signal code : 69) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No Replace either Cutter Motor or Cutter Motor Controller PCB.

Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (SL2)

4 Can the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (signal code : 9F) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No Replace the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid.

Oil Pad 5 Is the Oil Pad of Cutter Unit supplied with enough oil?

No Supply the Oil Pad with oil.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-20

7. 2. 3. 6 “E-09” Web End Error

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Yes Measure the thickness of Web roll,

and input that value in the Service Mode 5-A1.

Web Cleaner 1 Clear the Web End Error in any of Service Modes 5-9E to A0 at first. (See NOTE on the page 8-110 for the detail.) After that check if the web is remaining or not. Is the Web ended?

No Replace the Web. Set the Web Operation Time back to 0hour 0minute 0second in the Service Mode 5-A0.

Harness 2 Is the harness connected to each Web Sensor (PH40) and Main Control PCB (PW11520)?

No Connect it.

Installation of Web roll 3 Is the Web roll correctly installed? No Install it correctly. Web Sensor (PH40) 4 Check the input signal from the

Web Sensor (signal code 36) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. Does the status change when the actuator block the sensor light?

No Replace the Web Sensor.



Yes OK

7. 2. 3. 7 “E-13” Paper Feed Motor Error When “E-13” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “03”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.


Paper Feed Motor, Paper Feed Motor Controller PCB and DC Driver PCB?

No Connect it.

Paper Feed Motor (M2) Or Paper Feed Motor Controller PCB (TP0362)

2 Can the Paper Feed Motor (signal code : 84) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No Replace either Paper Feed Motor or Paper Feed Motor Controller PCB.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-21

7. 2. 3. 8 “E-14” Fuser Motor Error When “E-14” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “05”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.


Fuser Motor, Fuser Motor Controller PCB and DC Driver PCB?

No Connect it.

Fuser Motor (M5) Or Fuser Motor Controller PCB (TP0362)

2 Can the Fuser Motor (signal code : 87) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No Replace either Fuser Motor or Fuser Motor Controller PCB.



Yes OK

7. 2. 3. 9 “E-16” Wire Cleaning Error When “E-16” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “0A”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Harness 1 Is the harness connected between

Wire Cleaning Motor, and DC Driver PCB?

No Connect it.

Wire Cleaning Motor (M9)

2 Can the Wire Cleaning Motor (signal code : 6C) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No Replace the Wire Cleaning Motor.

Screw Shaft of Image Corona

3 Is the Screw Shaft of Image Corona dirty or transformed? (In this case an over load is detected.)

Yes Clean or replace the Screw Shaft.



Yes OK



Yes OK

7. 2. 3.10 “E-21” Fuser Thermostat Error When “E-21” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “02”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.


Thermostat, AC Circuit Board 2 and Main Control PCB?

No Connect it.

Thermostat 2 Is the Thermostat open circuited? Yes Replace the Thermostat. AC Circuit Board 2 (PW4210)

3 Does J107-1 on the AC Circuit Board 2 show 24V? And does J106-7 on the AC Circuit Board 2 show 0V?

No Replace the AC Circuit Board 2.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-22

7. 2. 3.11 “E-23” LED Head Cleaning Error When “E-23” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “0b”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Harness 1 Is the harness connected between

LED Cleaning Motor and DC Driver PCB?

No Connect it.

LED Cleaning Motor (M8)

2 Can the LED Cleaning Motor (signal code : 83) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

No Replace the LED Cleaning Motor.

Screw Shaft of LED Head

3 Is the Screw Shaft of LED Head Dirty or transformed? (In this case an over load is detected.)

Yes Clean or replace the Screw Shaft.



Yes OK



Yes OK

7. 2. 3.12 “E-26” Surface Potential Control Error

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Harness 1 Is the harness connected to

Surface Potential Sensor (SPS1) and Main Control PCB?

No Connect it.

Image Corona Or Drum

2 Set the Auto SP Control to OFF, turn off/on the KIP9000, and take printing. Is any abnormal image printed, such as “too dark”, “with dark background” and “too light”?

No 1. Reinstall the Image Corona correctly. 2. Replace the Drum.

Surface Potential Sensor (SPS1)

3 Can the error be fixed by replacing the Surface Potential Sensor?

Yes OK (Set the Auto SP Control back to ON, and turn off/on the KIP9000.)



Yes OK (Set the Auto SP Control back to ON, and turn off/on the KIP9000.)

7. 2. 3.13 “E-27” Density Sensor Error

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Harness 1 Is the harness connected to the

Density Sensor? No Connect it.

Density Sensor Or LED Head

2 Is the Density Sensor or LED Head dirty with toner?

No Clean them.

Density Sensor (PH44)

3 Can the error be fixed by replacing the Density Sensor?

Yes OK



Yes OK

7. 2. 3.14 “E-28” Density Control Error

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Harness 1 Is the harness connected to

Density Sensor and Main Control PCB?

No Connect it.

Density Sensor Or LED Head

2 Is the Density Sensor or LED Head dirty with toner?

No Clean them.

Density Sensor (PH44)

3 Can the error be fixed by replacing the Density Sensor?

Yes OK



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-23

7. 2. 3.15 “E-30” Developer Disconnection Error

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Harness 1 Is the connector J84 connected?

(Is another end of this cable connected to Main Control PCB?))

No Connect it.



Yes OK

7. 2. 3.16 “E-43” RFID (IC Tag) Error


RFID PCB and Main Control PCB?

No Connect it.

RFID IC Tag Reader & WriterPCB

3 Can the error be fixed by replacing the RFID PCB?

Yes OK



Yes OK

7. 2. 3.17 “E-49” Developer Positioning Motor Error When “E-49” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode. Its Mask Code is “06”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Harness 1 Is the harness connected to the

Developer Positioning Motor? No Connect it.

No Replace the Developer Positioning Motor.

Developer Positioning Motor (M4)

2 Can the Developer Positioning Motor (signal code : 68) be operated properly in the Function Checking Mode of Service Mode?

Yes Reinstall Developer Unit Position Sensor, Sensor Disc and Cam correctly.



Yes OK

Developer Unit Position Sensor (PH25)

4 Check the input signal from the Developer Unit Position Sensor (signal code 2b) in the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. Is the status “L” when the Developer Unit is at the Home Position and “H” when the unit is not at the Home Position?

No Replace the Developer Unit Position Sensor.



Yes OK

7. 2. 3.18 “E-F0” Folder Error

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Communication error 1 Is any error message indicated

on the Operation Panel of Folder?

No This is a communication error. 1. Turn off/on both KIP9000 and folder. 2. Check the cables. 3. Replace the Main Control PCB.

Error of Folder 2 Is any error message indicated on the Operation Panel of Folder?

Yes This is an error of Folder. Turn off/on the Folder. If the error still occurs, ask the service for the Folder.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-24

7. 2. 3.19 “E-Fb” Flash ROM Error

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Defect of Flash ROM 1 Can the error be fixed by

replacing the Flash ROM? Yes OK.

7. 2. 3.20 “C-01” Toner Cartridge Error

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Toner Cartridge 1 Is the KIP Toner Cartridge

installed to KIP 9000, which has already been emptied?

Yes Install the new KIP Toner Cartridge.



Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-25

7. 3 Measures against Image Defects

7. 3. 1 Standard settings of image process items The following list shows standard values of voltage and current supplied to each unit that is related with image creation. When any image defect occurs, check if the following standard values are satisfied on each unit.

Item Standard Voltage for Grid Plate -XV (Not constant)

(The Surface Potential becomes about -650V when Auto SP Control is set to OFF.) Current for Image Corona Wire

-2.0 +/-0.05mA

Current for Transfer Corona

1.4 +/-0.02mA

DC Component for Separation Corona

-250 +/-3V : Plain paper -300 +/-3V : Tracing -10 +/-3V : Film

Developer Roller -YV against Ground (Not constant) (It becomes about -250V +/-3V when Auto Density Control is set to OFF.)

Toner Supply Roller -350 +/-3V against Developer Roller voltage (-YV) Regulation Roller (Center) -100 +/-3V against Developer Roller voltage (-YV)

Developer Bias (Negative Bias)

Regulation Roller (Both sides) +365 +/-3V against Developer Roller voltage (-YV)

10.2mm

14.0mm

15.0mm

K115sm7e1.doc 7-26

7. 3. 2 Measures against each image defect 7. 3. 2. 1 Halftone is too light

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Dirt on LED Head 1 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Take cleaning for the LED Head

pressing [EXP CLEAN] Key. 2. Check if the Pad Ass’y 2 of LED Head is dirty or its life is ended.

Can the issue be fixed if a newly unpacked media is used?

Yes Advise the user to keep the media avoiding the humidity.

Printing media 2

Can the issue be fixed if a supported (specified) media is used?

Yes Explain to the user that a satisfactory image quality may not be achieved if unsupported media is used.

Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean the Corona Wire, Housing and Grid Plate. Replace the Corona Wire and Grid Plate if too dirty.

Is the Corona Wire fitted into the V shape groove of Corona Heads? Or is the Cleaning Pads properly holding the Corona Wire?

No Correct the height of Corona Wire as it is not correct.

Image Corona 3

Does the current show -2.0 +/- 0.05mA, which is supplied from HVP1 to the Image Corona?

No Adjust the current seeing [4.3.2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1 (For Image Corona)] on page 4-68.

Grid voltage 4 Does the voltage show -780 +/-20V, which is supplied from HVP6 to Grid Plate? NOTE : Set the Auto SP Control for measuring the Bias value.

No Adjust the voltage seeing [4.3.6 Checking & Adjustment of HVP6 (For Grid Plate of Image Corona)] on page 4-79.

Eraser Lamp 5 Does the Eraser Lamp light correctly?

No 1. Check if the harness of Eraser Lamp has any abnormality. 2. Replace the Eraser Lamp if the harness is OK.

Is the Transfer/Separation Corona dirty?

Yes Clean the Corona Wire and Housing. Replace the Corona Wire if too dirty.

Transfer/Separation Corona

6

Does the current show -1.4 +/-0.02mA. which is supplied from HVP3 to Transfer Corona?

No Adjust the current seeing [4.3.3 Checking & Adjustment of HVP3 (For Transfer Corona)] on page 4-70.

Contact of Bias Pins and Bias Plate

7 Are the Bias Pins on the Side Plate surely contacted to the Bias Plate of the Developer Unit? And are Bias Pins and Bias Plate provided with enough conductive grease?

No 1. Reinstall the Bias Pins to contact them to the Bias Plate. 2. Lubricate the Bias Pins and the Bias Plate with conductive grease.

Position of Developer Unit against Drum

8 Is the Cam of pressurizing mechanism placed at the correct position for pressing the Developer Unit to the Drum?

No Check if the Developer Positioning Motor or the pressurizing mechanism has any abnormality.

Developer Unit 9 Is the Developer Roller covered with the toner evenly?

No Disassemble the Developer Unit and find the cause.

Bias Power Supply 10 Are the following voltages supplied to the rollers in Developer? Developer Roller : -250 +/-3V Toner Sup. Roller : -350 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center : -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller sides : +365 +/-3V NOTE : Set the Auto Density Control for measuring the Bias value.

No Adjust each output properly seeing the following pages. Developer Roller : Page 4-84 Toner Supply Roller : Page 4-87 Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-90 Reg. Roller Both sides : Page 4-93


11 Perhaps is the output from Bias Power Supply not adjustable in spite of every possible trial?

No Replace the Main Control PCB.

Drum 12 Can the issue be fixed by replacing the Drum?

Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-27

7. 3. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Yes Transfer defect seems to be

the cause of this issue. Go to the following 2.

1 Turn off the KIP9000 in the middle of printing, draw out the Process Unit, and check the toner image on the Drum. Is a normal image created between Developer Unit and Transfer Corona?

No Development defect seems to be the cause of this issue. Go to the following 9.

2 Can the issue be fixed if a newly unpacked media is used?


Printing media

3 Can the issue be fixed if a supported (specified) media is used?


4 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona properly installed?

No Install it properly. Transfer/ Separation Corona 5 Does a leak of high voltage

occur on the Transfer Corona? Yes Clean the whole Transfer

Corona. Replace the Corona Wire if too dirty.

High Voltage Lead Line

6 Is the resistance of High Voltage Lead Line between HVP3 and Transfer Corona about 10 ohms?

No Replace the High Voltage Lead Line.

HVP3 7 Does the current show -1.4 +/-0.02mA. which is supplied from HVP3 to Transfer Corona?


Transfer Defect


8 Perhaps is the output from HVP3 not adjustable in spite of every possible trial?





10 Is the Developer Roller covered with the toner evenly?


Developer Unit

11 Are the Counter Rollers on both sides of Developer Unit correctly contacted to the ends of Drum?

No Reinstall the Developer Unit correctly.




Development defect

Toner Sensor 13 Is there enough toner in the Developer Unit?

No 1. Check if the harness of Toner Sensor has any abnormality. 2. Replace the Toner Sensor if the harness is OK.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-28

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Bias Power Supply

14 Are the following voltages supplied to the rollers in Developer? Developer Roller : -250 +/-3V Toner Sup. Roller : -350 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center : -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller sides : +365 +/-3V NOTE : Set the Auto Density Control for measuring the Bias value.

No Adjust each output properly seeing the following pages. Developer Roller : Page 4-84 Toner Sup. Roller : Page 4-87 Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-90 Reg. Roller Sides : Page 4-93




Development defect


Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-29

7. 3. 2. 3 Every image is too light

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Yes Transfer defect seems to be

the cause of this issue. Go to the following 2.

1 Turn off the KIP9000 in the middle of printing, draw out the Process Unit, and check the toner image on the Drum. Is a normal image created between Developer Unit and Transfer Corona?

No Development defect seems to be the cause of this issue. Go to the following 9.



Printing media



4 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona properly installed?

No Install it properly. Transfer / Separation Corona 5 Does a leak of high voltage

occur on the Transfer Corona? Yes Clean the whole Transfer

Corona. Replace the Corona Wire if too dirty.

High Voltage Lead Line



HVP3 7 Does the current show -1.4 +/-0.02mA. which is supplied from HVP3 to Transfer Corona?


Transfer Defect


8 Perhaps is the output from HVP3 not adjustable in spite of every possible trial?







Developer Unit






Development defect

Toner Sensor 13 Is there enough toner in the Developer Unit?

No 1. Check if the harness of Toner Sensor has any abnormality. 2. Replace the Toner Sensor if the harness is OK.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-30

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Bias Power Supply

14 Are the following voltages supplied to the rollers in Developer? Developer Roller : -250 +/-3V Toner Sup. Roller : -350 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center : -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller sides : +365 +/-3V NOTE : Set the Auto Density Control for measuring the Bias value.

No Adjust each output properly seeing the following pages. Developer Roller : Page 4-84 Toner Sup. Roller : Page 4-87 Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-90 Reg. Roller Sides : Page 4-93




Development defect


Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-31

7. 3. 2. 4 Uneven density between left and right

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Housing

and Grid Plate. Replace the Corona Wire and Grid Plate if too dirty.

Image Corona

2 Is the Corona Wire fitted into the V shape groove of Corona Heads? Or is the Cleaning Pads properly holding the Corona Wire?

No Correct the height of Corona Wire as it is not correct.





Developer Unit

5 Is the thickness of toner in the unit different between left and right?

No Check if the KIP9000 is placed horizontally.

Dirt of LED Head 6 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Take cleaning for the LED Head pressing [EXP CLEAN] Key. 2. Check if the Pad Ass’y 2 of LED Head is dirty or its life is ended.

Eraser Lamp 7 Do all LED of the Eraser Lamp light?

No Replace the Eraser Lamp.


8 Can the issue be fixed by replacing the Main Control PCB?

Yes OK

LED Head 9 Can the issue be fixed by replacing the LED Head?

Yes OK

7. 3. 2. 5 Foggy background

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment 1 Is there any foreign substance on

anywhere as Developer Roller shaft, Bias Pins or Bias Plate, which helps the Bias escaping to the ground?

Yes Remove it. Developer Unit

2 Is there more (or less) toner than required around the Agitator in the Developer Unit?

Yes Check the Toner Sensor.

Image Corona 3 Print out the Test Pattern 4 (White print). Does this print also have the foggy background?

Yes 1. Adjust the output voltage from HVP6 to Grid Plate seeing [4.3.6 Checking & Adjustment of HVP6 (For Grid Plate of Image Corona)] on page 4-79. 2. Adjust the output current from HVP1 to Image Corona seeing [4.3.2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1 (For Image Corona)] on page 4-68.

Developer Bias 4 Are the following voltages supplied to the rollers in Developer? Developer Roller : -250 +/-3V Toner Sup. Roller : -350 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center : -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller sides : +365 +/-3V NOTE : Set the Auto Density Control for measuring the Bias value.

No Adjust each output properly seeing the following pages. Developer Roller : Page 4-84 Toner Supply Roller : Page 4-87 Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-90 Reg. Roller Both sides : Page 4-93





Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-32

7. 3. 2. 6 Foggy thick black lines (from LE to TE)

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Housing

and Grid Plate. Replace the Corona Wire and Grid Plate if too dirty.

2 Is the Cleaning Pad correctly placed at either home position?

No 1. Check the Wire Cleaning Motor. 2. Check if the driving mechanism of wire cleaner has any abnormality.

Image Corona

3 Can wire cleaning operation be completed within about 90 seconds?

No 1. Check the Wire Cleaning Motor. 2. Check if the driving mechanism of wire cleaner has any abnormality. 3. Replace the DC Driver PCB (PW7755).

Developer Unit 4 Is the Developer Roller covered with the toner evenly?


7. 3. 2. 7 Clear thin black line (from LE to TE)

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment 1 Is any foreign substance like

filament jointing the Grid Plate to Drum?

Yes Remove it. Image Corona

2 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Housing and Grid Plate. Replace the Corona Wire and Grid Plate if too dirty.

Existence of foreign substance

3 Is any foreign substance like filament jointing Drum to Corona or LED Head?

Yes Remove it.

Drum 4 Is there any black line or scratch on the Drum of which location is just the same as the location of black line on the print?

Yes 1. In case of the black line on Drum, remove it with a dry cloth or attached “Drum Cleaning Blade”. 2. In case of the scratch, find the cause of scratch first then replace the Drum. (Suspected parts for scratch on Drum are Stripper Finger, Corona, Transfer Guide, and so on.)

NOTE Wipe the Drum by correct way shown in below. Incorrect way will damage the Drum. Correct Correct Incorrect

K115sm7e1.doc 7-33

7. 3. 2. 8 White lines (from LE to TE)

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Image Corona 1 Is any foreign substance like

filament jointing the Grid Plate to Drum?

Yes Remove it.

Dirt of LED Head 2 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Take cleaning for the LED Head pressing [EXP CLEAN] Key. 2. Check if the Pad Ass’y 2 of LED Head is dirty or its life is ended.


3 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona dirty?

Yes Clean each Corona Wire and Housing. Replace the Corona Wire if too dirty.

Entrance of Fuser Unit 4 Is there any foreign substance around the Fuser Entrance, which may possibly scratch unfused image side of printing media?

Yes Remove it.

Drum 5 Is there any vertical scratch on the Drum of which location is just the same as the location of white line on the print?

Yes Find the cause of scratch first then replace the Drum. (Suspected parts for scratch on Drum are Stripper Finger, Corona, Transfer Guide, and so on.)


Yes OK

7. 3. 2. 9 Image void

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Printing media 1 Can the issue be fixed if a newly

unpacked media is used? Yes Advise the user to keep the media

avoiding the humidity. 2 If the voids appear on the same

printed sheet repeatedly from LE to TE having constant interval, measure the interval between voids. Is the interval about 173mm?

Yes Check the surface of Developer Roller. 1. If dirty, clean it with the dry cloth. 2. In damaged, replace the Developer Roller.

Developer Unit

3 Do the voids randomly appear on the same printed sheet?

Yes Check the toner level in the Developer Unit. If it is too small, check the Toner Sensor.

Drum 4 If the voids appear on the same printed sheet repeatedly from LE to TE having constant interval, measure the interval between voids. Is the interval about 565mm?

Yes Check the surface of Drum. 1. In dirty, wipe off the dirt with a dry cloth. 2. In damaged, Find the cause of scratch first then replace the Drum. (Suspected parts for scratch on Drum are Stripper Finger, Corona, Transfer Guide, and so on.)

NOTE The Drum needs to be wiped by correct way for avoiding its damage. See NOTE on former page.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-34

7. 3. 2.10 Dirt on the backside

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Toner Receiver under Developer Roller

1 Is the Toner Receiver under the Developer Roller fully filled with the toner?

Yes Remove the toner from the Toner Receiver. Check if the inside of machine is dirty with the spilt toner as well.

Transfer Guide Plate 2 Is the Transfer Guide Plate dirty? Yes Clean the Transfer Guide. Also check if a proper gap is kept between Drum and Transfer Guide Plate seeing [5.13.15 Adjustment of gap between Drum & Transfer Guide Plate].

Roll Deck or Bypass Feeder

3 Can any dirt be found on the Roll Decks or Bypass Feeder, which might cause the issue?

Yes Wipe off the dirt. And find the cause of dirt.

4 Is the Fuser Entrance Guide Plate dirty?

Yes Clean it. Fuser

5 Is the melted toner sticking around the exit part (Fuser Roller, Pressure Roller, Stripper Fingers and so on)?

Yes Clean it off.

7. 3. 2.11 Offset print (caused by high temperature)

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment 1 Can the issue be fixed if a newly

unpacked media is used? Yes Advise the user to keep the media

avoiding the humidity. Printing media



3 Check the setting values on the following setting items of Adjustment Mode 0. No.4-10: Fusing temperature (PPC) No.4-11: Fusing temperature (Tracing) No.4-12: Fusing temperature (Film) Is the setting value on each item correctly set?

Yes 1. Set it correctly. 2. Or set it appropriately if a special media type is used.

No Install the Web correctly.

Fuser

4 Is the Web contacted on the Fuser Roller correctly? Yes Perhaps the Web is not rotating. Go

to the following 5. Harness 5 Is the harness connected to each

Web Motor (M11), Driver PCB (PW10257), DC Driver PCB (PW7755) and Main Control PCB (PW11520)?

No Connect it.

Installation of Web roll 6 Is the Web roll correctly installed? No Install it correctly. Web Motor (M11) 7 Can the error be fixed by

replacing the Web Motor? Yes OK

Driver PCB (PW10257)

8 Does the voltage between J571-0 and J573-1 on the Driver PCB show 24V?

Yes 1. Replace the Driver PCB. 2. Go to the following 10 if the error still occurs.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-35

7. 3. 2.11 Weak fusing

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment 1 Is the Media Selector set correctly

according to the actual media type?

No Set it correctly.



Printing media



4 Turn on the KIP9000, and check the fuser temperature (Data No.00) in the Data Monitoring Mode of Service Mode. Does the fuser temperature rise normally when in warning up?

No Take troubleshooting for the fuser seeing [7.2.3.1 “E-01” Fuser Temperature Rising Error] on page 7-16.

5 Check the setting values on the following setting items of Adjustment Mode 0. No.4-10: Fusing temperature (PPC) No.4-11: Fusing temperature (Tracing) No.4-12: Fusing temperature (Film) Is the setting value on each item much lower than what it must be?

Yes Increase the setting value properly.

Fuser

6 Is the pressure of Pressure Roller proper?

No Adjust the pressure properly.

NOTE Fusing pressure can be increasing or decreasing the gap between Spring Hook 1 (1) and Spring Hook 2 (2). It is adjusted to 2.5mm in usual case. And the width of “Nip” is adjusted to 8 - 9mm on center and 10 - 11mm on both sides (“Side” means 10mm from side edges of A0 or 36” paper).

1

2

10mm 10mm

10 - 11mm 8 - 9mm 10 - 11mm

2.5mm

K115sm7e1.doc 7-36

7. 3. 2.12 Leading margin defect (No leading margin)

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Setting value of leading margin

1 Check the setting values on the following setting items of Adjustment Modes 0 and 1. 4-bb : Image placement (For 2nd and later copies during multi- print) 5-00 to 0b : Image placement for cut sheet media 5-0C to 17: Image placement for Roll 1 5-18 to 23 : Image placement for Roll 2 5-24 to 2F : Image placement for Roll 3 5-30 to 3b : Image placement for Roll 4 Is a proper setting value specified in each Item Number?

No Change the setting value properly.

Feeding rollers in the Roll Deck

2 Is the surface of feeding rollers worn away as a result of long term use?

Yes Replace the feeding rollers.

Paper Gate Clutch (MC5)

3 Is the Paper Gate Clutch slipping? Yes Replace the Paper Gate Clutch.

7. 3. 2.13 Jitter

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Drum and Drum Driving Part

1 If the jitter appear on the same printed sheet repeatedly from LE to TE having constant interval, measure the interval between voids. Is the interval about 565mm?

Yes 1. Check if any foreign substance is on the 178T Gear or 72T Pulley that drive the Drum. 2. Check if any foreign substance is on the Developer Counter Roller or the end of Drum (to which the Developer Counter Roller contacts).

Developer Roller 2 If the jitter appear on the same printed sheet repeatedly from LE to TE having constant interval, measure the interval between voids. Is the interval about 173mm?

Yes Check the surface of Developer Roller. 1. In , clean it with a dry cloth. 2. In damaged, replace the Developer Roller.

Developer Unit 3 If the jitter appear on the same printed sheet repeatedly from LE to TE having constant interval, measure the interval between voids. Is the interval about 6mm?

Yes 1. Check if either 30T Gear of Developer Unit is damaged. 2. Check if any foreign substance is on the 30T Gear.

Drum Motor (M1) 4 Can the issue be fixed by replacing the Drum Motor?

Yes OK

K115sm7e1.doc 7-37

7. 3. 2.14 Unsharpened image (Focus defect)

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Dirt of LED Head 1 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Take cleaning for the LED Head

pressing [EXP CLEAN] Key. 2. Check if the Pad Ass’y 2 of LED Head is dirty or its life is ended.

Installation of LED Head

2 Is a correct gap (focus distance) kept between LED Head and Drum? (The gap will not be proper if the Positioning Bars of LED Head are bent.)

No Adjust the gap properly.


3 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona dirty?


7. 3. 2.15 Uneven density between front and rear

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Dirt of Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Housing

and Grid Plate. Replace each Corona Wire and Grid Plate if too dirty.

Transfer / Separation Corona

2 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona dirty?


3 Is the LED Head firmly fixed with the screws?

No Fix the LED Head firmly. LED Head

4 If the uneven density appear on the same printed sheet repeatedly from LE to TE having constant interval, measure the interval between voids. Is the interval about 8mm?

Yes Replace the LED Head.

K115sm7e1.doc 7-38

7. 3. 2.16 Completely white

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment Position of Developer Unit against Drum






Connector of LED Head

3 Is any connector of LED Head disconnected?

Yes Connect it.

4 Is the Corona Wire of Transfer Corona broken?

Yes Replace it.

5 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit properly installed?

No Install it properly.

Transfer / Separation Corona

6 Does a leak of high voltage occur on the Transfer Corona?

Yes Clean the whole Transfer Corona. Replace the Corona Wire if too dirty.

7 Is the High Voltage Lead Line connected between HVP3 and Transfer Corona properly?

No Connect it properly. High Voltage Lead Line





Yes OK


Yes OK

7. 3. 2.17 Completely black

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment 1 Is the Corona Wire of Image

Corona broken? Or is the Corona Wire not enough tensioned?

Yes 1. Replace the Corona Wire. 2. Check if the Tension Spring in the Corona Block is deformed.

2 Is the Grid Plate dirty? Yes Clean it. Replace it if too dirty.

Image Corona

3 Is the Grid Plate installed properly?

No Install it properly.

HVP1 4 Does the current show -2.0 +/-0.05mA, which is supplied from HVP1 to Image Corona?

No Adjust the current seeing [4.3.2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1 (For Image Corona)] on the page 4-68.



Yes OK

K115sm8e1.doc 8-1

Chapter 8

Service Mode Page 8. 1 Service Mode 8- 5 8. 1. 1 General operation of Service Mode 8- 5 8. 1. 1. 1 Entering Service Mode 8- 5 8. 1. 1. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode 8- 8 8. 1. 1. 3 Cancelling the Service Mode 8- 9 8. 1. 2 Input Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode 1) 8-10 8. 1. 2. 1 Function 8-10 8. 1. 2. 2 Indication on the Operation panel 8-10 8. 1. 2. 3 Operation 8-11 8. 1. 2. 4 Signal code list 8-12 8. 1. 3 Data Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2) 8-20 8. 1. 3. 1 Function 8-20 8. 1. 3. 2 Indication on the Operation panel 8-20 8. 1. 3. 2 Operation 8-21 8. 1. 3. 4 Description of each Data 8-22 (1) Fuser Temperature (00) 8-22 (2) Input from Paper Size Sensors (01 to 04) 8-23 (3) Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors (05) 8-26 (4) Roll remaining level (06 to 09) 8-28 (5) Humidity of inside the machine (0A) 8-28 (6) Input Voltage from Humidity Sensor (0b) 8-28 (7) Drum Surface Potential (0C) 8-29 (8) Input Voltage from SPS (0d) 8-29 (9) Temperature of inside the machine (0E) 8-29 (10) Toner remaining level Data (10 to 12) 8-30 8. 1. 4 Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3) 8-32 8. 1. 4. 1 Function 8-32 8. 1. 4. 2 Indication on the Operation panel 8-32 8. 1. 4. 3 Operation 8-33 8. 1. 5 Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4) 8-35 8. 1. 5. 1 Function 8-35 8. 1. 5. 2 Indication on the Operation panel 8-35 8. 1. 5. 3 Operation 8-36 8. 1. 5. 4 Setting item list 8-39 8. 1. 5. 5 Description of each setting item 8-46 (1) Metric or Inch (No.00) 8-46 (2) Operation of Interface (No.01) 8-46 (3) Maximum cut length (No.02) 8-47 (4) Trailing margin of long print (No.03) 8-47 (5) Special paper size (No.04) 8-48 (6) Counting unit of Counter A (No.05) 8-49 (7) Counting unit of Counter B (No.06) 8-49 (8) Operation of Dehumidify Heater (No.07) 8-50 (9) Cut length of user Test Print (No.08) 8-50 (10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (No.09 to 0b) 8-51 (11) Cold Sleep ON/OFF (No.0C) 8-57 (12) Compensation of Analog Outputs (No.0d) 8-57

K115sm8e1.doc 8-2

(13) Fusing temperature (No.10 to 12) 8-58 (14) LED strobe time (No.13) 8-58 (15) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (PPC) (No.15) 8-59 (16) Pre-Transfer LED ON / OFF (No.16) 8-60 (17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (No.17) 8-60 (18) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (No.18) 8-61 (19) Developer Bias (applied when Auto Density Control is set to OFF) (No.19) 8-62 (20) Current setting for the Image Corona Wire (No.1A) 8-62 (21) Current setting for the Grid Plate (applied when Auto SP Control is set to OFF) (No.1b) 8-63 (22) Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (No.1C to 1E) 8-63 (23) Separation Corona DC component (No.1F to 21) 8-64 (24) Paper Feed Motor Speed (No.22 to 26) 8-64 (25) Fuser Motor Speed (Bypass feed) (No.27 to 32) 8-65 (26) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 1) (No.33 to 54) 8-66 (27) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 2) (No.55 to 76) 8-67 (28) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 3) (No.77 to 98) 8-68 (29) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 4) (No.99 to bA) 8-69 (30) Image placement (For 2nd and later prints) (No.bb) 8-70 (31) Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) ON timing (No.bC) 8-70 (32) Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) and Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) ON timing (No.bd) 8-71 (33) Paper Gate Brake (MC10) ON timing (No.bE) 8-72 (34) Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (No. BF to C1) 8-73 (35) TE Margin Compensation (No. C2 to C5) 8-74 (36) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (No.C6) 8-76 (37) Image Enhancement Mode Selection (No.C7) 8-77 (38) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Tracing) (No.C8) 8-77 (39) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Film) (No.C9) 8-78 (40) Image Enhancement Level for single pixel (No.CD) 8-79 (41) Image Enhancement Level (No. CE) (applied when IE Mode is OFF, or IE Category is “A1” in any IE Mode) 8-80 (42) Image Enhancement Level (No. CF to d7) (applied when IE Mode is “low”) 8-82 (43) Image Enhancement Level (No. d8 to E0) (applied when IE Mode is “medium”) 8-83 (44) Image Enhancement Level (No. E1 to E9) (applied when IE Mode is “high”) 8-84 (45) LED Gumma setting (No.EA to EC) 8-84 8. 1. 6 Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode 5) 8-85 8. 1. 6. 1 Function 8-85 8. 1. 6. 2 Indication on the Operation panel 8-85 8. 1. 6. 3 Operation 8-86 8. 1. 6. 4 Setting item list 8-89 8. 1. 6. 5 Description of each setting item 8-96 (1) Image placement for cut sheet media (No.00 to 0b) 8-96 (2) Image placement for Roll 1 (No.0C to 17) 8-97 (3) Image placement for Roll 2 (No.18 to 23) 8-98 (4) Image placement for Roll 3 (No.24 to 2F) 8-99 (5) Image placement for Roll 4 (No.30 to 3b) 8-100 (6) TE margin for Roll 1 (No.3C to 47) 8-101 (7) TE margin for Roll 2 (No.48 to 53) 8-102 (8) TE margin for Roll 3 (No.54 to 5F) 8-103 (9) TE margin for Roll 4 (No.60 to 6b) 8-104 (10) Length of image for Roll 1 (No.6C to 77) 8-105 (11) Length of image for Roll 2 (No.78 to 83) 8-106

K115sm8e1.doc 8-3

(12) Length of image for Roll 3 (No.84 to 8F) 8-107 (13) Length of image for Roll 4 (No.90 to 9b) 8-108 (14) TE margin for cut sheet media (Large) (No.9C) 8-109 (15) Web operation mode (No.9d) 8-110 (16) Web operation time (No.9E to A0) 8-110 (17) Web thickness (No.A1) 8-110 (18) Auto SP Control ON/OFF (No.A2) 8-111 (19) Target Surface Potential (No.A3 to A8) 8-111 (20) Acceptable potential range for Auto SP Control (No.A9) 8-111 (21) Auto Density Control ON/OFF (error check level) (No.AA) 8-112 (22) Compensation of Target Density (No.Ab) 8-112 (23) Minimum voltage gap between SP and Bias (No.AC) 8-112 8. 1. 7 Running Mode (Sub Mode 6 : Do not operate) 8-113 8. 1. 7. 1 Function 8-113 8. 1. 8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7) 8-114 8. 1. 8. 1 Function 8-114 8. 1. 8. 2 Indication on the Operation panel 8-115 8. 1. 8. 3 Operation 8-115 8. 1. 9 Test Print Mode (Sub Mode 8) 8-117 8. 1. 8. 1 Function 8-117 8. 1. 8. 2 Indication on the Operation panel 8-117 8. 1. 8. 3 Operation 8-118 8. 1. 8. 4 Description of each Setting Mode 8-122 (1) Print Start Mode (Sub Mode No.0) 8-122 (2) Print Number Setting Mode (Sub Mode No.1) 8-123 (3) Test Pattern Selection Mode (Sub Mode No.2) 8-124 (4) Media Source Selection Mode (Sub Mode No.3) 8-125 (5) Cut Length Selection Mode (Sub Mode No.4) 8-126 (6) Media Type Selection Mode : Bypass Feed only (Sub Mode No.5) 8-127 (7) Interval Print Mode (Sub Mode No.6) 8-127 (8) Negative Mode (Sub Mode No.7) 8-128 (9) Mirror Mode (Sub Mode No.8) 8-128 8. 1.10 Special Operation Mode (Sub Mode 9) 8-129 8. 1.10. 1 Function 8-129 8. 1.10. 2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8-130 8. 1.10. 3 Operation/description of each item 8-131 (1) How to select each item 8-131 (2) Image Corona Wire Cleaning Mode (Item No.00) 8-132 (3) Cutter Cleaning Mode (Item No.01) 8-133 (4) LED Head Cleaning Mode (Item No.02) 8-134 (5) Image Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.03) 8-135 (6) Pre-Transfer LED Adjustment Mode (Item No.04) 8-136 (7) Transfer Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.05) 8-137 (8) Separation Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.06) 8-138 (9) Positive Developer Bias Adjustment Mode (Toner Collection Process) (Item No.07) 8-139 (10) Negative Developer Bias Adjustment Mode (Print Process) (Item No.08) 8-140 (11) Toner Supplying Mode (Item No.09) 8-141 (12) Surface Potential Control Mode : Manual execution of control (Sub Mode 0A) 8-142 (13) Density Lock Mode : Setting of Target Density (0b) 8-143 (14) Density Control Mode : Manual execution of control (0C) 8-144 8. 1.11 Special Setting Mode (Sub Mode A) 8-145 8. 1.11. 1 Function 8-145 8. 1.11. 2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8-145 8. 1.11. 3 Operation/description of each item 8-146 (1) Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.0) 8-146 (2) Software Counter Setting Modes (Item No. from 1 to 4) 8-148

K115sm8e1.doc 8-4

(3) Print interval for continuous long printing (Item No.5) 8-150 (4) Key Card Setting Mode (Item No.6) 8-152 (5) Folder Selection Mode (Item No.7) 8-154 8. 2 User Modes 8-156 8. 2. 1 User Mode 1 (Test Print) 8-157 8. 2. 2 User Mode 2 (Calendar setting) 8-159 8. 2. 3 User Mode 3 (Warm Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting) 8-164 8. 2. 4 User Mode 4 (Cold Sleep Mode timer setting) 8-168 8. 2. 5 User Mode 5 (Automatic paper cut at power ON) 8-171 8. 2. 6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film]) 8-174 8. 2. 7 User Mode 7 (Alarm ON / OFF) 8-177 8. 2. 8 User Mode 8 (Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Plain paper]) 8-180 8. 2. 9 User Mode 9 (Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Tracing paper]) 8-184 8. 2.10 User Mode A (Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Film]) 8-188 8. 2.11 User Mode B (Selection of Image Enhancement Mode) 8-192 8. 2.12 User Mode C (Print on TE margin area) 8-195 8. 2.13 User Mode D (Auto SP Control ON/OFF : Temporal clearance of E-26 error) 8-199 8. 2.14 User Mode E (Auto Density Control ON/OFF : Temporal clearance of E-28 error) 8-202 8. 2.15 User Mode F0 to Fb (Fold settings for Bay Folder) 8-205 8. 3 KIP Diagnostics (Program used on field service) 8-212 8. 3. 1 Having a communication between KIP Diagnostics on service laptop (PC) and KIP9000 8-212 8. 3. 2 Outline of Tabs on KIP Diagnostics 8-217 8. 3. 3 Description of each Tab 8-218 8. 3. 3. 1 Basic Information Tab 8-218 8. 3. 3. 2 Display Tab 8-219 8. 3. 3. 3 Setting Tab 8-221 (1) Changing the setting value of each Item Number 8-222 (2) Saving all present settings in Backup RAM file (Download) 8-224 (3) Uploading the Backup RAM file to KIP9000 8-226 8. 3. 3. 4 History Tab 8-229 (1) Clearance of error / jam histories 8-230 8. 3. 3. 5 Upload ROM Data Tab 8-231 (1) Update of firmware 8-231 8. 3. 3. 6 Test Print Tab 8-234 8. 3. 4 Description of Menu Bar and Tool Bar 8-235 8. 3. 4. 1 File 8-235 8. 3. 4. 2 Setting 8-235 8. 3. 4. 3 Tool 8-236 8. 3. 4. 4 Help 8-236 8. 3. 4. 5 Tool bar 8-236

K115sm8e1.doc 8-5

8. 1 Service Mode

8. 1. 1 General operation of Service Mode 8. 1. 1. 1 Entering Service Mode 1. Press and hold the [ * ] key on the Operation Panel, and press switches in the order as [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] to enter the Service Mode. 2. The [MENU] key lights green and the Status Display indicates present Firmware version when entering the Service Mode. Firmware version

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-6

3. Press the [MENU] key once to move to “LED all lighting mode”. When in “LED all lighting mode”;

• All LED and segments on the Operation Panel light.

• All LED and segments on the Media Indicator light as well at this time.

• All “in use” Indicators light as well.


MF

D1

D2

D3

EXITPAPER DECK

1 2 3 4


D4

PF


1


2


3


4


1


2


3


4

in use


MF

D1

D2

D3

EXITPAPER DECK

1 2 3 4


D4

PF

K115sm8e1.doc 8-7

4. Press the [MENU] key once again to finish “LED all lighting mode”, and it becomes possible to select each Sub Mode. (The Input / Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.1) is selected firstly at this time.) 5. Select the necessary Sub Mode referring to [8.1.1.2 Selecting each Sub Mode] on page 8-8.


MF

D1

D2

D3

EXITPAPER DECK

1 2 3 4


D4

PF


MF

D1

D2

D3

EXITPAPER DECK

1 2 3 4


D4

PF

K115sm8e1.doc 8-8

8. 1. 1. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode Service Mode consists of 10 Sub Modes, and each of them has its own Sub Mode Number. It is possible to access the necessary Sub Mode by indicating the concerning Sub Mode Number on the Status Display.

Sub Mode Number Name of the Sub Mode 1 Input / Output Checking Mode 2 Data Monitoring Mode 3 Function Checking Mode 4 Adjustment Mode 0 5 Adjustment Mode 1 6 Factory Mode 7 Error Check Masking Mode 8 Test Print Mode 9 Special Operation Mode A Special Setting Mode

The far left digit of Status Display indicates the present selection of Sub Mode Number. Sub Mode Number (Example : Input / Output Checking Mode) Press the [ MENU ] Key necessary times until your required Sub Mode Number is indicated.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-9

8. 1. 1. 3 Cancelling the Service Mode Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the Service Mode. The LED of [ MENU ] Key is put out when cancelled.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE Make sure to turn on/off the KIP9000 whenever the Service Mode is cancelled.

K115sm8e1.doc 8-10

8. 1. 2 Input Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode 1) 8. 1. 2. 1 Function The status of input/output signals can be observed while operating the machine as usual Refer to [8.1.2.4 Signal Code List] on and after the page 8-12 for the Signal Codes, the Signal Names and the Description of each Signal. 8. 1. 2. 2 Indication on the Operation panel The 1st digit from the left indicates “1” which is the mode number of “Input / Output Checking Mode”. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected. The 5th digit from the left indicates the status of selected signal. Mode number of Input / Output Checking Mode Signal Code Status of signal

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-11

8. 1. 2. 3 Operation 1. Enter the Service Mode, and indicate the Sub Mode Number “1” on the 1st digit from the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key. Sub Mode Number of Input / Output Checking Mode 2. Both 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected. Indicate the necessary Signal Code pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key. Refer to [8.1.2.4 Signal Code List] on and after the page 8-12. Example : Input signal from the Exit Sensor to be observed. Indicate its Signal Code “2F”. Signal Code of Exit Sensor 3. Print some image from the outer device. (Or make a test print.) The 5th digit indicates the status of signal by either “L” or “H”. The status of input signal sent from the Exit Sensor is “H” normally, and it changes “L” when the sensor detects the paper.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-12

8. 1. 2. 4 Signal code list

Code Signal name IC Port Connector Signal Condition I / O F.C. 00 UPPER_SW U015 P30 J202-1 Top Rear Cover Signal

Top Rear Cover Switch (DS6) detects door open when “H”.

I NO

01 RIGHT_SW1 U015 P31 J202-2 Right Side Door Signal Right Side Door Switch (DS7) detects door open when “H”.

I NO

02 RIGHT_SW2 U015 P32 J202-3 Toner Cover Signal

Toner Cover Switch (DS8) detects door open when “H”.

I NO

03 MP_SRT U015 P33 J202-4 Bypass Start Sensor Signal Bypass Start Sensor (PH20) detects the media when “L”.

I NO

04 RP_SET1 U015 P34 J202-5 Roll Set Sensor 1 Signal

Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1) detects the media when “L”.

I NO



I NO



I NO



I NO

08 RF_CLK1 U015 P20 J202-9 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 Signal

Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 (PH13) generates the clock pulse when the media is fed.

I NO

09 RF_CLK2 U015 P21 J202-10 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 2 Signal


I NO

0A RF_CLK3 U015 P22 J202-11 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 3 Signal


I NO

0b RF_CLK4 U015 P23 J202-12 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 4 Signal


I NO

0C PSEL_DT0 U015 P24 J202-13 Media Selection Signal 0 (Plain paper)

“Plain Paper” of Media Selector is pressed down when “H”.

I NO

0d PSEL_DT1 U015 P25 J202-14 Media Selection Signal 1 (Tracing paper)

“Tracing Paper” of Media Selector is pressed down when “H”.

I NO

0E PSEL_DT2 U015 P26 J202-15 Media Selection Signal 2 (Film)

“Film” of Media Selector is pressed down when “H”.

I NO

0F PSEL_DT3 U015 P27 J202-16 Inch Media Switch Signal (ENG. / ARCH.)

“Engineering” when “L”. “Architecture” when “H”.

I NO

10 SZDATA0 U015 P17 J202-17 Paper Size Sensor Signal 0

Paper Size Sensor 0 (PH5A, 5B, 5C & 5D) detects the media when “L”.

I NO



I NO



I NO



I NO



I NO



I NO



I NO

17 SZDATA7 U015 P24 J202-24 15” Size Sensor Signal Paper Size Sensor (PH41) on Roll 1detects the media when “L”.

I NO

NOTES 1. I / O means input signal or output signal. 2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode). If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable in the Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the page 8-32.) If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.

K115sm8e1.doc 8-13

Code Signal name IC Port Connector Signal Condition I / O F.C.

18 PFMTR_LD U015 P70 J204-9 Paper Feed Motor Synchronous Signal

Paper Feed Motor (M2) is rotating when “L”.

I NO

19 TNR_BTL U015 P71 J204-10 Toner Remaining Level Detection Signal

Toner Remaining Level Sensor detects “No toner” when “L”. (Receives the light)

I NO

1A FUMTR_LD U015 P72 J204-11 Fuser Motor Synchronous Signal

Fuser Motor (M5) is rotating when “L”.

I NO

1b ------- U015 P73 J204-12

1C DEV_TNR2 U015 P74 J204-13 Toner Detection Signal 2 (Developer Toner Sensor)

Developer Toner Sensor (TLS2) detects “No toner” when “L”.

I NO

1d DEV_TNR1 U015 P75 J204-14 Toner Detection Signal 1 (Hopper Toner Sensor)

Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1) detects “No toner” when “L”.

I NO

1E MP_SW U015 P79 J204-15 Bypass Feeder Switch Signal

Bypass Feeder is open when “H”.

I NO

1F EXIT_SW U015 P77 J204-16 Exit Cover Switch Signal

Exit Cover Switch (DS5) detects door open when “H”.

I NO

20 ------- U015 P80 J203-1

21 SW_DATA0 U015 P81 J203-2 Switch Data Signal 0

I NO

22 SW_DATA1 U015 P82 J203-3 Switch Data Signal 1

I NO

23 SIG_IN U015 P83 J203-4 Reception PCB input Signal

Communicating : Pulse Not communicating : H

I NO

24 ------- U015 P84 J203-5

25 DECK_SW1 U015 P85 J203-6 Roll Deck Switch Signal 1

Roll Deck Switch 1 (DS1) detects “Top Roll Deck open” when “H”.

I NO

26 DECK_SW2 U015 P86 J203-7 Roll Deck Switch Signal 2

Roll Deck Switch 2 (DS2) detects “Middle Roll Deck open” when “H”.

I NO

27 DECK_SW3 U015 P87 J203-8 Roll Deck Switch Signal 3 Roll Deck Switch 3 (DS3) detects “Bottom Roll Deck open” when “H”.

I NO

28 ------- U015 P90 J203-9

29 ------- U015 P91 J203-10

2A T_SIZE0 U015 P92 J203-11 Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0 Signal

Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0 (PH31, 33, 35 & 37) detects the media when “L”.

I NO

2b DEVE_HP U015 P93 J203-12 Developer Unit Position Sensor Signal

Developer Unit Position Sensor (PH25) detects the Developer Unit is pressed to the Drum when “L”.

I NO

2C PFUT_ST U015 P94 J203-13 Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor Signal

Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (PH24) detects the Internal Transportation Unit is set when “H”.

I NO

2d T_SIZE1 U015 P95 J203-14 Cut Sheet Size Sensor 1 Signal

Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0 (PH32, 34 & 36) detects the media when “L”.

I NO

2E P_SEPR U015 P96 J203-15 Separation Sensor Signal Separation Sensor (PH18) detects the media when “L”.

I NO

2F P_EXIT U015 P97 J203-16 Exit Sensor Signal Exit Sensor (LS2) detects the media when “L”.

I NO

30 ------- U015 P50 J205-1 J205-2

31 ------- U015 P51 J205-3 J205-4

32 IN_CNT_B U015 P52 Counter A (Upper) Control Signal Feed Back

I NO

33 IN_CNT_A U015 P53 Counter B (Lower) Control Signal Feed Back

I NO


K115sm8e1.doc 8-14


34 DEV_ST U015 P54 J205-9 Developer Setting Status Signal

Connector of Developer is disconnected.

35 ------- U015 P55 J205-10

36 WEB_END U015 P56 J205-11 Web Sensor Signal Web Sensor detects “Web End” when “L”.

I NO

37 ------- U015 P57 J205-12

38 SW_R U017 P40 J208-A35 Power Switch OFF Control Signal

Power Switch (S1) is turned OFF when “H” is outputted.

O OK

39 PF_SPH U017 P41 J208-B35 Paper Feed Motor Speed Change Signal

Paper Feed Motor (M2) rotates fast when “H”. It rotates slowly when “L”.

O OK

3A T_SL1 U017 P42 J208-A36 Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid Control Signal

Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (SL3) operates when “H”.

O OK

3b T_SL2 U017 P43 J208-B36 Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid Control Signal

Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (SL4) operates when “H”.

O OK

3C T_MTR U017 P44 J208-A37 Bypass Feeding Motor Control Signal

Bypass Feeding Motor (M10) rotates when “H”.

O OK

3d POW_24V U017 P45 J208-B37 24V Relay

I NO

3E SEPBLW4 U017 P46 J208-A38 Separation Assist Blower 4 Control Signal

Separation Assist Blower 4 (BL12 & 16) rotate when “H”.

O OK

3F SEPBLW3 U017 P47 J208-B38 Separation Assist Blower 3 Control Signal

Separation Assist Blower 3 (BL13 & 15) rotate when “H”.

O OK

40 INT1 U015 P60 J204-1 Interlock Signal 1 (Thermostat)

Thermostat (TS1) is open when “H”.

I NO

41 INT2 U015 P61 J204-2 Interlock Signal 2 (Door / Thermostat)

Thermostat (TS1) or some door is open when “H”.

I NO

42 WCMTR_OC U015 P62 J204-3 Wire Cleaning Motor Over Current Detection Signal

Over current flows when “L”. I NO

43 CUTHP_O U015 P63 J204-4 Cutter Home Position Signal

Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22) detects the Cutter is at the Home Position when “L”.

I NO

44 BIAS_ST U015 P64 J204-5 Developer Bias Output 2 Detection Signal

Bias is normally supplied when “H”.

I NO

45 PWR_ST U015 P65 J204-6 Power Switch Detection Signal

Power Switch (S1) is ON when “L”.

I NO

46 DRMTR_LD U015 P66 J204-7 Drum Motor Synchronous Signal

Drum Motor (M1) rotates when “L”.

I NO

47 LEDMTR_OC U015 P67 J204-8 LED Head Cleaning Motor Over Current Detection Signal

Over current flows when “L”. I NO

48 DISP_DT24 U016 P50 J214-1 Indication Data Signal 24

O NO


O NO

4A DISP_DT26 U016 P52 J214-3 Indication Data Signal 26

O NO

4B DISP_DT27 U016 P53 J214-4 Indication Data Signal 27

O NO

4C DISP_DT28 U016 P54 J214-5 Indication Data Signal 28

O NO

4D DISP_DT29 U016 P55 J214-6 Indication Data Signal 29

O NO

4E DISP_DT30 U016 P56 J214-7 Indication Data Signal 30

O NO

4F DISP_DT31 U016 P57 J214-8 Indication Data Signal 31

O NO


O NO


O NO


K115sm8e1.doc 8-15



O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO

5A DISP_DT18 U016 P72 J214-19 Indication Data Signal 18

O NO

5B DISP_DT19 U016 P73 J214-20 Indication Data Signal 19

O NO

5C DISP_DT20 U016 P74 J214-21 Indication Data Signal 20

O NO

5D DISP_DT21 U016 P75 J214-22 Indication Data Signal 21

O NO

5E DISP_DT22 U016 P76 J214-23 Indication Data Signal 22

O NO

5F DISP_DT23 U016 P77 J214-24 Indication Data Signal 23

O NO

60 RY6 U017 P50 J208-B28 Rylay6 (RY6) Control Signal

36V is controlled when “H”. O NO

61 U005 CLK U017 P51 Shift Lock of M62362P CLK

- NO

62 U005 DI U017 P52 Serial Data of M62362P DI

- NO

63 U005 BS U017 P53 BS of M62362P

- NO

64 U002 A U017 P54 Selector A of 74HC4051

- NO

65 U002 B U017 P55 Selector B of 74HC4051

- NO

66 U002 C U017 P56 Selector C of 74HC4051

- NO

67 ------- U017 P57

-

68 DPMTR U017 P20 J208-A29 Developer Positioning Motor Control Signal

Developer Positioning Motor (M4) rotates when “H”.

O OK

69 CUTMTR U017 P21 J208-B29 Cutter Motor Control Signal

Cutter Motor (M3) rotates when “H”.

O OK

6A DP_CHG U017 P22 J208-A30 Developer Release Power Charge Control Signal

Power for releasing the Developer Unit is charged when “H”.

O OK

6B CMTR_RST U017 P23 J208-B30 Cutter Motor Reset Signal

Cutter is reset when “H”. O OK

6C WCMTR U017 P24 J208-A31 Wire Cleaning Motor Control Signal

Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) rotates when “H”.

O OK

6D PRESBLW_H U017 P25 J208-B31 Paper Pressure Blower (High Speed)

Pressure Blowers (BL4, 5, 6 &7) rotate in a high speed when “H”.

O OK

6E WCMTR_DIR U017 P26 J208-A32 Wire Cleaning Motor Reverse Signal

Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) rotates oppositely when “H”.

O OK

6F PRESBLW_L U017 P27 J208-B32 Paper Pressure Blower (Low Speed)

Pressure Blowers (BL4, 5, 6 &7) rotate in a low speed when “H”.

O OK

70 PFMTR_DIR U017 P30 J208-A33 Paper Feed Motor Reverse Control Signal

Paper Feed Motor (M2) rotates oppositely when “H”.

O OK

71 ------- U017 P31 J208-B33


K115sm8e1.doc 8-16


72 DRMTR_DIR U017 P32 J208-A34 Drum Motor Reverse Control Signal

Drum Motor (M1) rotates oppositely when “H”.

O OK

73 EXBLW3 U017 P33 J208-B34 Exhaust Fan 3 Control Signal

Exhaust Fan 3 (BL17, 18 & 19) rotate when “H”.

O OK

74 HV5 U017 P34 J209-1 Cleaning Roller Bias Control Signal

Bias is supplied when “H”.

O OK

75 HV5_SEL U017 P35 J209-2 Cleaning Roller Bias Polarity Switch Control Signal

Negative when “H”. Positive when “L”.

O OK

76 COUNTER_B U017 P36 J209-3 Counter B Control Signal (Lower : 3 pins)

Counter B (CNTB) takes 1 count when “H”.

O OK

77 COUNTER_A U017 P37 J209-4 Counter A Control Signal (Upper : 2 pins)

Counter A (CNT A) takes 1 count when “H”.

O OK

78 E_LAMP U017 P90 J208-A14 Eraser Lamp Control Signal

Eraser Lamp lights when “H”. O OK

79 HOP_CL U017 P91 J208-B14 Toner Supply Clutch Control Signal

Toner Supply Clutch (MC11) is ON when “H”.

O OK

7A ------- U017 P92 J208-A15 Separation Fan Control Signal (Low speed)

(Not controlled)

7B S_LAMP U017 P93 J208-B15 Separation Lamp Control Signal

Separation Lamp lights when “H”.

O OK

7C EXBLW_L U017 P94 J208-A16 Exhaust Blower Control Signal (Low Speed)

Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3) rotate in a low speed when “H”.

O OK

7D SEPBLW1 U017 P95 J208-B16 Separation Fan Control Signal

Separation Fan (BL1) rotates when “H”.

O OK

7E D_BIAS U017 P96 J208-A17 Developer Bias Control Signal

Bias is supplied when “H”.

O OK

7F EXBLW_H U017 P97 J208-B17 Exhaust Blower Control Signal (High Speed)

Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3) rotate in a high speed when “H”.

O OK

80 SIG_OUT U017 P10 J208-A24 Transmission PCB Output Signal

Communicating : Pulse Not communicating : H

O OK

81 LEDMTR_ DIR

U017 P11 J208-A25 LED Cleaning Motor Reverse Control Signal

LED Cleaning Motor (M8) rotates oppositely when “H”.

O OK

82 BIAS_SEL U017 P12 J208-B25 Developer Bias Polarity Switch Control Signal

Negative when “H”. Positive when “L”.

O OK

83 LEDMTR U017 P13 J208-A26 LED Cleaning Motor Control Signal

LED Cleaning Motor (M8) rotates when “H”.

O OK

84 PFMTR U017 P14 J208-B26 Paper Feed Motor Control Signal

Paper Feed Motor (M2) rotates when “H”.

O OK

85 DRMTR U017 P15 J208-A27 Drum Motor Control Signal

Drum Motor (M1) rotates when “H”.

O OK

86 DRMTR_SP U017 P16 J208-B27 Drum Motor Speed Switch Control Signal

213.5rpm when “H”. 427 rpm when “L”.

O OK

87 FUMTR U017 P17 J208-A28 Fuser Motor Control Signal

Fuser Motor (M5) rotates when “H”.

O OK

88

U016 P80 - NO

89

U016 P81 - NO

8A

U016 P82 - NO

8B

U016 P83 - NO

8C

U016 P84 - NO

8D

U016 P85 - NO

8E

U016 P86 - NO

8F

U016 P87 - NO

90 P_GATE U017 P60 J208-A2 Paper Gate Clutch Control Signal

Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) is ON when “H”.

O OK


K115sm8e1.doc 8-17


91 RP_FEED U017 P61 J208-B2 Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal

Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) is ON when “H”.

O OK

92 RP_CL U017 P62 J208-A3 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 Control Signal

Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 (MC1) is ON when “H”.

O OK

93 RP_CL2 U017 P63 J208-B3 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 Control Signal


O OK

94 RP_CL3 U017 P64 J208-A4 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 3 Control Signal


O OK

95 RP_CL4 U017 P65 J208-B4 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 4 Control Signal


O OK

96 FU_SL U017 P66 J208-A5 Fuser Solenoid Control Signal

Fuser Solenoid (SL1) is ON when “H”.

O OK

97 DEHUM U017 P67 J208-B5 Dehumidify Heater Control Signal

Dehumidify Heaters (H3, 4, 5, 6, 7 & 8) are OFF when “H”.

O OK

98 HOP_MTR2 U017 P70 J208-A6 Toner Supply Motor 2 Control Signal (Hopper to Developer)

Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6) rotates when “H”.

O OK

99 SEPBLW2 U017 P71 J208-B6 Separation Assist Blower 2 Control Signal

Separation Assist Blower 2 (BL14) rotates when “H”.

O OK

9A SAFE_RY U017 P72 J208-A7 Relay Control Signal Fuser is normal when “H”. Fuser is abnormal when “L”.

O OK

9B MF_CL U017 P73 J208-B7 Bypass Feed Clutch Control Signal

Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) is ON when “H”.

O OK

9C RP_CL1 U017 P74 J208-A8 Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch Control Signal

Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (MC8) is ON when “H”.

O OK

9D PG_BK U017 P75 J208-B8 Paper Gate Brake Control Signal

Paper Gate Brake (MC10) is ON when “H”.

O OK

9E PF_BK U017 P76 J208-A9 Paper Feed Brake Control Signal

Paper Feed Brake (MC9) is ON when “H”.

O OK

9F CT0_SL U017 P77 J208-B9 Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid Control Signal

Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (SL2) supplies the oil when “H”.

O OK

A0 HV1 U017 P80 J208-A10 Image Corona Control Signal

High Voltage is supplied to Image Corona Wire when “H”.

O OK

A1 HV_AC U017 P81 J208-B10 Separation Corona Control Signal

High Voltage is supplied to Separation Corona Wire when “H”.

O OK

A2 HV_TR U017 P82 J208-A11 Transfer Corona Control Signal

High Voltage is supplied to Transfer Corona Wire when “H”.

O OK

A3 TR_LAMP U017 P83 J208-B11 Pre-Transfer LED Control Signal

Pre-Transfer LED lights when “H”.

O OK

A4 COOL_FAN1 U017 P84 J208-A12 LED Head Cooling Fan 1 Control Signal

LED Cooling Fans (BL8 & 9) rotate when “H”.

O OK

A5 COOL_FAN2 U017 P85 J208-B12 LED Head Cooling Fan 2 Control Signal

LED Cooling Fans (BL10 & 11) rotate when “H”.

O OK

A6 HV6 U017 P86 J208-A13 Grid Bias Control Signal

High Voltage is supplied to the Image Corona Grid Wire when “H”.

O OK

A7 HOP_MTR1 U017 P87 J208-B13 Toner Supply Motor 1 Control Signal (Cartridge to Hopper)

Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7) rotates when “H”.

O OK

A8 DIGIT0 PSEL_DG0

U016 P20 J207-2 J207-1

Digit Signal 0 O NO

A9 DIGIT1 PSEL_DG1

U016 P21 J207-4 J207-3

Digit Signal 1 O NO

AA DIGIT2 PSEL_DG2

U016 P22 J207-6 J207-5

Digit Signal 2 O NO

AB DIGIT3 PSEL_DG3

U016 P23 J207-8 J207-7

Digit Signal 3 O NO

AC DIGIT4 U016 P24 J207-10 J207-9

Digit Signal 4 O NO

AD DIGIT5 U016 P25 J207-12 J207-11

Digit Signal 5 O NO

AE DIGIT6 U016 P26 J207-14 J207-13

Digit Signal 6 O NO

AF DIGIT7 U016 P27 J207-16 J207-15

Digit Signal 7 O NO


K115sm8e1.doc 8-18


B0 DISP_DT0 U016 P30 J207-17 Indication Data Signal 0

O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO

B8 SEL_A U016 P40 J207-25 Toner Remaining Level Sensor Selection Signal A

O NO

B9 SEL_B U016 P41 J207-26 Toner Remaining Level Sensor Selection Signal B

O NO

BA SEL_C U016 P42 J207-27 Toner Remaining Level Sensor Selection Signal C

O NO

BB EXIT_OUTA U016 P43 J801-35 Exit Sensor Output Signal (Ach)

“H” is outputted when P_EXIT Signal is “L”.

O NO

BC BUZZER U016 P44 J207-29 Buzzer Control Signal

Buzzer sounds when “H”. O OK

BD EXIT_OUTB U016 P45 J802-35 Exit Sensor Output Signal (Bch)

“H” is outputted when P_EXIT Signal is “L”.

O NO

BE F_LAMP1 U016 P46 J208-A1 Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal

Fuser Lamp 1 (H1) lights when “H”.

O NO

BF F_LAMP2 U016 P47 J208-B1 Fuser Lamp 2 Control Signal

Fuser Lamp 2 (H2) lights when “H”.

O NO

C0 DISP_DT32 U016 P10 J216-22 Indication Data Signal 32

O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO


O NO

C8 ------- U016 P90 J216-14

C9 (KCNT_DT2)

U016 P91 J216-13 Kay Card Data Signal 2

CA (KCNT_DT1)


CB (KCNT_DT0)


CC (KEY_CNT) U016 P94 J216-10 Kay Card Control Signal Kay Card takes 1 count when “H”.

O OK

CD ------- U016 P95 J216-9

CE ------- U016 P96

CF ------- U016 P97


Size DT1 DT2 DT3 A0 L L L A1 H L L A2 L H L A3 H H L A4 L L H Other H L H

K115sm8e1.doc 8-19


D0 (KCNT_ST) U015 P J216-8 Kay Card Status Signal “L” when the card is set.

I NO

D1 ------- U015 P J216-7

D2 ------- U015 P J216-6

D3 ------- U015 P J216-5

D4 ------- U015 P J216-4

D5 ------- U015 P J216-3

D6 ------- U015 P J216-2

D7 ------- U015 P J216-1

D8 ------- U001 P

D9 ------- U001 P

DA ------- U001 P

DB ------- U001 P

DC ------- U001 P

DD ------- U001 P

DE ------- U001 P

DF ------- U001 P

E0 IPRDY0 bit0 Printer Ready Signal Printer is ready when “L”.

O NO

E1 IPREQ1 bit1 Print Request Signal “L” is outputted when the printer is available to receive the Print Signal.

O NO

E2 LED_TR U001 P J208-A18 Toner Remaining Level Detection LED Control Signal

Toner Remaining Level Detection LED lights when “H”.

O OK

E3 ------- U001 P J208-B18

O

E4 WEB_MTR U001 P J208-A19 Web Motor Control Signal Web Motor rotates when “H”.

O NO

E5 ------- U001 P

O NO

E6 ------- U001 P

O NO

E7 ------- U001 P

O NO

E8 PAGEBL bit2 Page Enable Signal Print when “L”.

O NO

E9 IBUSY1 bit3 Data Output Busy Signal Busy when “H”.

O NO

EA IPRNT0 U001 P Print Start Signal Print is requested when “L”.

I NO

EB TSTPRT bit4 Test Pattern Print Signal Test Paint is requested when “L”.

O NO

EC IPCUT0 U001 P Paper Cut Request Signal Paper Cut is requested when “L”.

I NO

ED COMSTB U001 P Command Reception Signal “L” is outputted when the printer receives the command.

O NO

EE PA_ENT U001 P Leading Edge Sensor Signal Leading Edge Sensor (PH12) detects the media when “L”.

I NO


K115sm8e1.doc 8-20

8. 1. 3 Data Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2) 8. 1. 3. 1 Function It is possible to monitor several data as the input voltage to the DC Controller PCB or the temperature of Fuser. 8. 1. 3. 2 Indication on the Operation panel The 1st digit from the left indicates “2” which is the Sub Mode number of “Data Monitoring Mode”. The 2nd digit indicates the Data Number. The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the data. Sub Mode Number of Data Monitoring Mode Data Number Data The following list shows the selectable Data Number and its Description.

Data Number Contents Unit of the indicated data

Remarks

00 Fuser Temperature Centigrade 01 Input from Paper Size Sensors of

Roll Deck 1 Hexadecimal 0: Paper is detected.

1: Paper is not detected. 02 Input from Paper Size Sensors of






1: Paper is not detected. 05 Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors Hexadecimal 0: Paper is detected.

1: Paper is not detected. 06 Roll 1 remaining level 07 Roll 2 remaining level 08 Roll 3 remaining level 09 Roll 4 remaining level

Every 1/8 is indicated.

0A Humidity of machine inside % 0b Input Voltage from Humidity Sensor V 0C Drum Surface Potential V 0d Input Voltage from SPS V 0E Temperature of machine inside Centigrade 0F (Reserved) 10 Toner remaining level Data 1

(1st checking) X / 8

Hexadecimal 0: Toner is not detected. 1: Toner is detected.

11 Toner remaining level Data 2 (2nd checking)

X / 8 Hexadecimal

0: Toner is not detected. 1: Toner is detected.

12 Toner remaining level Data 3 (3rd checking)

X / 8 Hexadecimal

0: Toner is not detected. 1: Toner is detected.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-21

8. 1. 3. 2 Operation 1. Enter the Service Mode, and indicate the Sub Mode Number “2” on the 1st digit from the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key. Sub Mode Number of Data Monitoring Mode 2. The 2nd digit from the left indicates the Data Number presently selected. Indicate the necessary Data Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Refer to the list on the former page for the Data Number and the content. Example : “Roll 1 remaining level” is to be checked. Indicate its Data Number “06”. Data Number of “Roll 1 remaining level” 3. The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the data of the selected Data Number. Refer to [8.1.3.4 Description of each Data] on and after the page 8-22 for the description of data of each Data Number,. Example : 3/8 of roll media is still remaining. Data

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-22

8. 1. 3. 4 Description of each Data (1) Fuser Temperature (00) Actual temperature of Fuser is indicated on 4th, 5th and 6th digits. The unit is “oC”. Dot of the 6th digit lights when the Fuser Lamp 1 is ON, and that of 5th one lights when the Fuser Lamp 2 is ON. Temperature of Fuser (Example : 140oC) Fuser Lamp 2 ON/OFF Fuser Lamp 1 ON/OFF

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-23

(2) Input from Paper Size Sensors (01 to 04) Input from Paper Size Sensors (for roll media) is shown by the hexadecimal data. Hexadecimal data To check the input situation, convert the hexadecimal into binary. Each of 8 digits of binary data is related with size sensors as follows. Example) When “70” is indicated. 70 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 PH5 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 0) PH6 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 1) PH7 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 2) PH8 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 3) PH9 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 4) PH10 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 5) PH11 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 6) PH41 (15” Size Sensor Signal: Roll 1 only) Not used (always “0”: Roll 2, 3 & 4) “0” means “Paper is detected”, and “1” means “Paper is not detected”. In this example PH5, 6, 7 and 8 detect the paper (ON) while PH9, 10, 11 and 41 do not detect (OFF).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE The arrangement of sensors is different between Roll 1 and other Roll. Note that the indicated hexadecimal data of Roll 1 will be different from that of other decks if same roll paper is used. Please refer to the explanation on and after the next page to avoid misunderstanding.

This mode is available to check if the size sensor is broken or not. Supposing you check the input condition when an A0 roll (841mm wide) is loaded to the 2nd Roll Deck, PH9 is suspected to be broken if “50” is indicated as it means “0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0”. (“40” will be indicated if the PH9 is working properly, which means “0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0”)

Reference

K115sm8e1.doc 8-24

(1) Roll 2, 3 & 4 PH5 is arranged at the most inside to detect B3 and 15” paper.

Paper Sensors Paper width PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5

Hexadecimal

36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 841 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 728 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 60 594 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 70 515 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 78 420 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 7C 364 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 7E 297 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F

22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) 23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) Weight of

bits Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Paper Sensors Paper width PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5

Hexadecimal

36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 34” 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 30” 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 60 24” 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 70 22” 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 78

18” / 17” 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 7C 15” 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 7E

11” / 12” 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) 23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) Weight of


Reference : Relationship between Decimal and Hexadecimal numeric system

Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Hexa-decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

RP_SET2, 3 and 4(A3, 11" & 12")

PH5(B3 & 15")

PH6(A2, 17" & 18")

PH7(B2 & 22")

PH8(A1 & 24")

PH9(B1 & 30")

PH10(A0 & 34")

PH11(36")

Center of the paper

K115sm8e1.doc 8-25

(2) Roll 1 PH5 is arranged between PH10 and PH11 to detect 900mm, 891mm and 880mm paper. PH41 is arranged between RP_SET1 and PH6 to detect B3 and 15” paper.

Paper Sensors Paper width PH41 PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5

Hexadecimal

36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 900/891

/880 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40

841 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 41 728 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 61 594 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 71 515 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 79 420 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 7d

364 (B3) 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F 297 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FF

23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) 23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) Weight of


Paper Sensors Paper

width PH41 PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5 Hexadecimal

36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 34” 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 41 30” 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 61 24” 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 71 22” 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 79

18” / 17” 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 7d 15” 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F

11” / 12” 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FF 23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) 23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) Weight of




RP_SET1(A3, 11" & 12")

PH5(900, 891 & 880mm)

PH6(A2, 17" & 18")

PH7(B2, & 22")

PH8(A1 & 24")

PH9(B1 & 30")

PH10(A0 & 34")

(36")

PH41(B3 & 15")

Center of the paper

K115sm8e1.doc 8-26

(3) Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors (05) Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors is shown by the hexadecimal data. Hexadecimal data To check the input situation, convert the hexadecimal into binary. Each of 8 digits of binary data is related with size sensors as follows. Example) When “F0” is indicated. F0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 PH31 (Detecting 11”) PH32 (Detecting A4S & 12”) PH33 (Detecting A3S & 17”) PH34 (Detecting 18”) PH35 (Detecting 22”) PH36 (Detecting A2S & 24”) PH37 (Detecting A1S, 30”, 34” & 36”) Not used (This is always “1”.) “0” means “Paper is detected”, and “1” means “Paper is not detected”. In this example PH31, 32, 33 and 34 detect the paper (ON) while PH35, 36 and 37 do not detect (OFF). Refer to the explanation on the next page.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

This mode is available to check if the size sensor is broken or not. Supposing you check the input condition when an A1S cut sheet media (841mm wide) is set to the Bypass Feeder, PH35 is suspected to be broken if “90” is indicated as it means “1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0”. (“80” will be indicated if the PH35 is working properly, which means “1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0”)

Reference

K115sm8e1.doc 8-27

Cut Sheet Size Sensors Paper width PH37 PH36 PH35 PH34 PH33 PH32 PH31

Hexadecimal

36”/841mm (A0 orA1S)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80

594mm (A2) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 C0 420mm (A3S) 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 F8 297mm (A4S) 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 FC

22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) 23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) Weight of bits

Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Cut Sheet Size Sensors Paper width PH37 PH36 PH35 PH34 PH33 PH32 PH31

Hexadecimal

36”/34”/30” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80 24” 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 C0 22” 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 E0 18” 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 F0 17” 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 F8 12” 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 FC 11”” 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 FF

22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) 23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) Weight of bits

Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Reference: Relationship between Decimal and Hexadecimal numeric system


PH31(11")

PH32(A4S & 12") PH33

(A3S & 17")

PH34(18")

PH35(22")

PH36(A2S & 24")

PH37(A1S, 30", 34 & 36")

Center of the paper

K115sm8e1.doc 8-28

(4) Roll remaining level (06 to 09) The volume of roll media remaining in each Roll Deck is shown by 8 levels. 4th, 5th and 6th digits show the remaining level “X/8”. (8/8 means the maximum level, and 1/8 means the minimum.) Remaining level (Example : 1/8) (5) Humidity of inside the machine (0A) Actual humidity of inside the machine is indicated. The unit is “%”. Humidity (Example : 40%) (6) Input Voltage from Humidity Sensor (0b) Input voltage from Humidity Sensor is indicated. The unit is “V”. Input voltage (Example : 0.74V)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE Roll remaining level is not indicated if the Roll Deck is opened or if the printer is checking roll size. “- -” will be indicated in these cases.

K115sm8e1.doc 8-29

(7) Drum Surface Potential (0C) The Potential of Drum surface detected by the Surface Potential Sensor (SPS) is indicated. The unit is “V”. Drum Surface Potential (Example : 840V) (8) Input Voltage from SPS (0d) The input voltage from the Surface Potential Sensor (SPS) is indicated. The unit is “V”. Input voltage (Example : 4.10V) (9) Temperature of inside the machine (0E) The actual temperature of inside the machine is indicated. The unit is “oC”. Temperature (Example : 35oC)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-30

(10) Toner remaining level Data (10 to 12) The Toner Remaining Level in the Toner Cartridge is shown by 8 levels. The 4th digit shows the remaining level “X/8”. (Only “X” is indicated.) And the input from Toner Remaining Level Sensors (8 pieces) is shown by hexadecimal data on 5th and 6th digits, which can be used to check if the Toner Remaining Level Sensors are functioning correctly. Hexadecimal Remaining level (Example : 7/8) To check the input condition, convert the hexadecimal into binary. Each of 8 digits of binary data is related with toner sensors as follows. Example) When “7F” is indicated. 7F 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S511 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 0 (Level 1/8) S512 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 1 (Level 2/8) S513 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 2 (Level 3/8) S514 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 3 (Level 4/8) S515 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 4 (Level 5/8) S516 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 5 (Level 6/8) S517 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 6 (Level 7/8) S518 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 7 (Level 8/8) “0” means “Toner is not detected”, and “1” means “Toner is detected”. Therefore, the machine judges the remaining level of toner as “7/8”.

Paper Sensors Toner Remaining

Level S518 S517 S516 S515 S514 S513 S512 S511

Hexadecimal

8/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FF 7/8 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F 6/8 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 3F 5/8 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1F 4/8 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0F 3/8 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 07 2/8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 03 1/8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 01

23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) 23

(8) 22

(4) 21

(2) 20

(1) Weight of




MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-31

NOTE KIP9000 checks the Toner Remaining Level in the following 3 situations. 1. Right after turning on. 2. After opening/closing the Toner Cover. 3. Every 30m print Checking is performed 3 times keeping an interval between checks. (Toner Cartridge continues to rotate during the interval.) Motor ON 1st checking Interval 2nd checking Interval 3rd checking (Motor ON) (Motor ON) KIP9000 takes average of these 3 levels and finally judges the Toner Remaining Level. Example) 1st checking 7/8

2nd checking 2/8 Printer judges the Toner Remaining Level as 4/8. 3rd checking 4/8

Data No. “10” is the remaining level detected in the latest “1st checking”. Data No. “11” is the remaining level detected in the latest “2nd checking”. Data No. “12” is the remaining level detected in the latest “3rd checking”.

K115sm8e1.doc 8-32

8. 1. 4 Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3) 8. 1. 4. 1 Function An individual electric component can be operated singularly to check its operation in the Function Checking Mode. Refer to [8.1.2.4 Signal code list] on and after the page 8-12 for the Signal Code and its target component. 8. 1. 4. 2 Indication on the Operation panel The 1st digit from the left indicates “3” which is the Sub Mode number of “Function Checking Mode”. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected. The 5th and 6th digits indicate the status of the selected component. Sub Mode Number of Function Checking Mode Signal Code Status of the selected component

NOTES (1) Only 1 component is available to operate at one time except for the Image Corona. When [Image Corona Control Signal (Signal Code : A0)] is operated, [Grid Bias Control Signal (A6)] is automatically operated same time. (Even if [Grid Bias Control Signal] is operated, [Image Corona Control Signal] is not operated same time.) (2) Do not keep on operating the following Coronas so long time! The Drum does not rotate while the Corona is discharging. If the following Corona Units keep on discharging long time, it will lead to the damage of Drum as one point of Drum surface is strongly charged. Image Corona Control Signal (Signal Code : A0) Grid Bias Control Signal (A6) Transfer Corona Control Signal (A2) Separation Corona Control Signal (A1) (3) Do not operate the following lamps so long! Cooling fans do not operate while the lamp is lighting. It will result in the breakage of lamp as it will be heated up so much. Eraser Lamp Control Signal (Signal Code : 78) Separation Lamp Control Signal (7b) Pre-Transfer LED Control Signal (A3) (4) Do not operate the Fuser Lamps so long! Fuser Roller and surrounding parts will be heated up so much and will be broken. Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal (Signal Code : BE) Fuser Lamp 2 Control Signal (Signal Code : BF)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e1.doc 8-33

8. 1. 4. 3 Operation 1. Enter the Service Mode, and indicate the Sub Mode Number “3” on the 1st digit from the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key. Sub Mode Number of Function Checking Mode 2. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected. Indicate the necessary Signal Code pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Refer to [8.1.2.4 Signal code list] on and after the page 8-12 for Signal Codes and its target component. Example : Separation Lamp is to be lit alone. Indicate its Signal Code is “7b”. Signal Code to operate the Separation Lamp

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE All the Signal Codes in the list can be selected, but note that not all the component can be operated in the Function Checking Mode. (For example sensor’s Signal Code can be selected but the sensor is inactive.)

• Nothing is indicated on 5th and 6th digits if any “inactive” Signal Code is selected. • Hyphens (- -) are indicated if any “active” Signal Code is selected.

Check the [F.C.] column in the Signal code list to know active/inactive. If provided with “OK” in F.C., this component is active and can be operated in the Function Checking Mode.

K115sm8e1.doc 8-34

3. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to operate the selected component. Hyphens on 5th and 6th digits flash when the component is operating. Hyphens flash when the Separation Lamp is lighting. 4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to stop the operation. Hyphens on 5th and 6th digits stop flashing.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTES It is impossible to cancel the Service Mode if some component is operating in the Function Checking Mode. Stop the operation of component first then cancel the Service Mode.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-35

8. 1. 5 Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4) 8. 1. 5. 1 Function Several fundamental printer settings/parameters can be changed. Refer to [8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-39 for the brief information of the setting items. Please refer to [8.1.5.5 Description of each setting item] on and after the page 8-46 for the detail of the setting items. 8. 1. 5. 2 Indication on the Operation panel The 1st digit from the left indicates “4” which is the Sub Mode Number of “Adjustment Mode 0”. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number. The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the setting value of the selected Item Number. Sub Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 0 Item Number Setting Value

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e2.doc 8-36

8. 1. 5. 3 Operation 1. Enter the Service Mode, and indicate the Sub Mode Number “4” on the 1st digit from the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key. Sub Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 0 2. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number presently selected. Indicate the necessary Item Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Please refer to [8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-39 to know the description of setting. Example : Fusing temperature for the plain paper is to be adjusted. Indicate its Item Number “10”. Item Number to adjust the “Fusing temperature for plain paper”

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e2.doc 8-37

3. Press the [ENTER] Key after selecting the necessary Item Number. The setting value on 4th, 5th and 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable. The setting value flashes and becomes changeable. 4. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e2.doc 8-38

5. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the new setting value. The setting value stops flashing when decided.

NOTE If you press the [ ONLINE ] Key before deciding the new value, the former setting value is recovered. (Former setting value is recovered.)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e2.doc 8-39

8. 1. 5. 4 Setting item list

Item No.

Setting target Default value

Specialsetting

Adjustable Range

Unit of setting value

Refer to

page; 00 Metric or inch NO A0 or 36 8-46 01 Operation of Interface NO 0 to 2 8-46 02 Maximum cut length NO 6 or 24 m 8-47 03 Trailing margin of long print NO On or OFF 8-47 04 Special paper size NO 900/891/880 mm 8-48 05 Counting unit of Counter A NO 0 to 3 8-49 06 Counting unit of Counter B NO 0 to 3 8-49 07 Operation of Dehumidify Heater NO 0 or 1 8-50 08 Cut length of user Test Print NO A0 to b5

48 to 8.5 8-50

09 Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Mode (PPC)

NO 0 or 1 8-51

0A Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Mode (Tracing paper)

NO 0 or 1 8-51

0b Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Mode (Film)

NO 0 or 1 8-51

0C Cold Sleep ON/OFF NO On or OFF 8-57 0d Compensation of Analog Outputs NO 8-57 0E Reserved NO 0F Reserved NO 10 Fusing temperature (PPC) OK 150 to 190 1oC 8-58 11 Fusing temperature (Tracing) OK 150 to 190 1oC 8-58 12 Fusing temperature (Film) OK 150 to 190 1oC 8-58 13 LED strobe time NO 0 to 42 1 micro-

sec. 8-58

14 Reserved 15 Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing

(PPC) NO 0 or 1 8-59

16 Pre-Transfer LED ON / OFF NO 0 or 1 8-60 17 Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) NO 0 or 1 8-60 18 Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) NO 0 or 1 8-61 19 Developer Bias (applied when Auto Density

Control is set to OFF) NO 000 to 0FF Hex. 8-62

1A Current setting for the Image Corona Wire NO 000 to 0FF Hex. 8-62 1b Current setting for the Grid Plate (applied when

Auto SP Control is set to OFF) NO 000 to 500 Hex. 8-63

1C Current setting for the Transfer Corona (PPC) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-63 1d Current setting for the Transfer Corona (Tracing) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-63 1E Current setting for the Transfer Corona (Film) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-63 1F Separation Corona DC component (PPC) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-64 20 Separation Corona DC component (Tracing) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-64 21 Separation Corona DC component (Film) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-64 22 Paper Feed Motor speed (Bypass feed) NO -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-64 23 Paper Feed Motor speed (Roll 1) NO -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-64 24 Paper Feed Motor speed (Roll 2) NO -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-64 25 Paper Feed Motor speed (Roll 3) NO -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-64 26 Paper Feed Motor speed (Roll 4) NO -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-64 27 Fuser Motor speed

(Bypass feed / PPC / Large size) OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

28 Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / PPC / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

29 Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / PPC / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

2A Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / PPC / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

K115sm8e2.doc 8-40

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 2b Fuser Motor speed

(Bypass feed / Tracing / Large size) OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

2C Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / Tracing / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

2d Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / Tracing / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

2E Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / Tracing / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

2F Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / Film / Large size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

30 Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / Film / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

31 Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / Film / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

32 Fuser Motor speed (Bypass feed / Film / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65

33 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 0 to 2m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

3A Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 8 to 9m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

3b Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 9 to 10m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

3C Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 10 to 11m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

3d Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 11 to 12m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

3E Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 12 to 13m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

3F Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 13 to 14m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

K115sm8e2.doc 8-41

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 4A Fuser Motor speed

(Roll 1 / PPC / Medium size) OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

4b Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / PPC / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

4C Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / PPC / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

4d Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / Tracing / Large size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

4E Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / Tracing / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

4F Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / Tracing / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

50 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / Tracing / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

51 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / Film / Large size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

52 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / Film / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

53 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / Film / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66

54 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 / Film / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-66


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67

K115sm8e2.doc 8-42

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 69 Fuser Motor speed

(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 21 to 22m) OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67

6C Fuser Motor speed (Roll 2 / PPC / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67

6d Fuser Motor speed (Roll 2 / PPC / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67

6E Fuser Motor speed (Roll 2 / PPC / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67

6F Fuser Motor speed (Roll 2 / Tracing / Large size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67

70 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 2 / Tracing / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67

71 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 2 / Tracing / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-67


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68

K115sm8e2.doc 8-43

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 89 Fuser Motor speed



OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68

8E Fuser Motor speed (Roll 3 / PPC / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68

8F Fuser Motor speed (Roll 3 / PPC / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68

90 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 3 / PPC / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68

91 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 3 / Tracing / Large size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68

92 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 3 / Tracing / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68

93 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 3 / Tracing / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-68


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

A0 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 8 to 9m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69


OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

K115sm8e2.doc 8-44

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; AA Fuser Motor speed


Ab Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 19 to 20m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

AC Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 20 to 21m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

Ad Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 21 to 22m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

AE Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 22 to 23m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

AF Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 23 to 24m)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b0 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / PPC / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b1 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / PPC / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b2 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / PPC / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b3 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / Tracing / Large size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b4 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / Tracing / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b5 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / Tracing / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b6 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / Tracing / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b7 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / Film / Large size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b8 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / Film / Medium size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

b9 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / Film / Small size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

bA Fuser Motor speed (Roll 4 / Film / Smallest size)

OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69

bb Image placement (For 2nd and later prints)

NO 0 to 100 0.1mm 8-70

bC Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) ON timing NO 1 to 30 1 msec 8-70 bd Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) and

Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) ON timing NO 1 to 20 1 msec 8-71

bE Paper Gate Brake (MC10) ON timing NO 1 to 20 1 msec 8-72 bF Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (PPC) NO 0 or 1 8-73 C0 Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (Tracing) NO 0 or 1 8-73 C1 Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (Film) NO 0 or 1 8-73 C2 Trailing Margin compensation (Roll 1) NO 0 to 3 8-74 C3 Trailing Margin compensation (Roll 2) NO 0 to 3 8-74 C4 Trailing Margin compensation (Roll 3) NO 0 to 3 8-74 C5 Trailing Margin compensation (Roll 4) NO 0 to 3 8-74 C6 Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) NO 0 or 1 8-76 C7 Image Enhancement Mode Selection NO 0 to 3 8-77 C8 Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing

(Tracing) NO 0 or 1 8-77

C9 Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Film)

NO 0 or 1 8-78

CA Reserved NO Cb Reserved NO CC Reserved NO CD Image Enhancement Level for single pixel 0 to 7 8-79

K115sm8e2.doc 8-45

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; CE Image Enhancement Level (applied when IE

Mode is OFF, or IE Category is “A1” in any IE Mode )

0 to 7 8-80

CF Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category A2 when IE Mode is “low”)

0 to 7 8-82

d0 Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category A3 when IE Mode is “low”)

0 to 7 8-82


0 to 7 8-82


0 to 7 8-82

d3 Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category B1 when IE Mode is “low”)

0 to 7 8-82


0 to 7 8-82


0 to 7 8-82


0 to 7 8-82


0 to 7 8-82

d8 Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category A2 when IE Mode is “medium”)

0 to 7 8-83

d9 Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category A3 when IE Mode is “medium”)

0 to 7 8-83

dA Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category A4 when IE Mode is “medium”)

0 to 7 8-83

db Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category A5 when IE Mode is “medium”)

0 to 7 8-83

dC Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category B1 when IE Mode is “medium”)

0 to 7 8-83

dd Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category B2 when IE Mode is “medium”)

0 to 7 8-83

dE Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category B3 when IE Mode is “medium”)

0 to 7 8-83

dF Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category B4 when IE Mode is “medium”)

0 to 7 8-83

E0 Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category B5 when IE Mode is “medium”)

0 to 7 8-83

E1 Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category A2 when IE Mode is “high”)

0 to 7 8-84


0 to 7 8-84


0 to 7 8-84


0 to 7 8-84

E5 Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE Category B1 when IE Mode is “high”)

0 to 7 8-84


0 to 7 8-84


0 to 7 8-84


0 to 7 8-84


0 to 7 8-84

EA LED Gumma setting for bit “0” 0 to 100 % 8-84 Eb LED Gumma setting for bit “1” % 8-84 EC LED Gumma setting for bit “2” % 8-84

K115sm8e2.doc 8-46

8. 1. 5. 5 Description of each setting item (1) Metric or Inch (No.00) Either metric (ISO) or inch (ANSI) can be selected as the print format. Selectable setting values are “A0” and “36”.

Setting value Description A0 Metric (ISO) 36 Inch (ANSI)

(2) Operation of Interface (No.01) It is possible to specify how the Interface operates. Selectable setting values are “0”, “1” and “2”.

Setting value Description 0 Channels A and B of Interface communicates with the scanner and the

controller alternately. 1 Channel A of Interface communicates with the scanner.

(Channel B is not used.) 2 Channel B of Interface communicates with the controller

(Channel A is not used.)

2

1

43

EXP-CLEAN

WI RE-CLEAN

D1

MF

D2

D3

D4

EXIT

PF

COPY DENSITY

MENU

ENTERRESE T

→←

*

PAPER DECK

CUT SELECT

1 2 3 4

Image scanner A Channel

B Channel

Controller

NOTE Channel A is not used.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-47

(3) Maximum cut length (No.02) Maximum cut length can be set to either 6m or 24m.

Setting value Description 06 6m is the maximum cut length. 24 24m is the maximum cut length.

(4) Trailing margin of long print (No.03) If necessary, a trailing margin of 260mm long can be added to 3m or longer print.

Setting value Description On If print is 3m or longer, a trailing margin of 260mm long is added.

OFF No additional trailing margin is added to the long print.

0

100

50ABC

0

100

50ABC

Setting value is OFF Setting value is On

Direction of print

3m or longer print

260mm

K115sm8e2.doc 8-48

(5) Special paper size (No.04) The size sensor of Roll Deck 1 located 2nd from the outside is available to detect special paper sizes (widths) 900mm, 891mm and 880mm. When a special size is detected, KIP9000 recognizes its size as any of 900mm, 891mm or 880mm according to the selection in this No.04. (If No.04 is set to “880”, special size roll is recognized as 880mm wide even if it is 891mm or 900mm.)

Setting value Description 900 Special width of roll paper is recognized as 900mm wide. 891 Special width of roll paper is recognized as 891mm wide. 880 Special width of roll paper is recognized as 880mm wide.

NOTE The PH5 of Roll 1 detects 880/891/900 as it is located between PH10 (A0/34”) and PH11 (36”), but that of Roll 2/3/4 detedcts B3/15” as it is located between RP_SET (A3/11”/12”) and PH6 (A2/17”/18”). (In case of Roll 1, B3/15” is detected by PH41 located between RP_SET (A3/11”/12”) and PH6 (A2/17”/18”).) Sensor arrangement (Roll Decks 2, 3 and 4) Sensor arrangement (Roll Deck 1 only)

RP_SET2, 3 and 4(A3, 11" & 12")

PH5(B3 & 15")

PH6(A2, 17" & 18")

PH7(B2 & 22")

PH8(A1 & 24")

PH9(B1 & 30")

PH10(A0 & 34")

PH11(36")

Center of the paper

RP_SET1(A3, 11" & 12")

PH5(900, 891 & 880mm)

PH6(A2, 17" & 18")

PH7(B2, & 22")

PH8(A1 & 24")

PH9(B1 & 30")

PH10(A0 & 34")

(36")

PH41(B3 & 15")

Center of the paper

K115sm8e2.doc 8-49

(6) Counting unit of Counter A (No.05) Counting unit of the Counter A (Upper Counter) can be specified. Selectable setting values rely on “metric / inch setting (Item No.00)”.

• Selectable setting values in No. 05 are 0, 1, 2 and 3 if No.00 is set to “metric”. • Selectable setting values in No. 05 are 0 and 1 if No.00 is set to “inch”.

When No.00 is set to “metric”;

Setting value Description 0 Linear counter: 1m / count 1 Linear counter: 0.1m / count 2 Area counter: 1m2 / count 3 Area counter: 0.1m2 / count

When No.00 is set to “inch”;

Setting value Description 0 Linear counter: 1foot / count 1 Area counter: 1foot2 / count

(7) Counting unit of Counter B (No.06) Counting unit of the Counter B (Upper Counter) can be specified. Selectable setting values rely on “metric / inch setting (Item No.00)”.

• Selectable setting values in No. 05 are 0, 1, 2 and 3 if No.00 is set to “metric”. • Selectable setting values in No. 05 are 0 and 1 if No.00 is set to “inch”.

When No.00 is set to “metric”;

Setting value Description 0 Linear counter: 1m / count 1 Linear counter: 0.1m / count 2 Area counter: 1m2 / count 3 Area counter: 0.1m2 / count

When No.00 is set to “inch”;

Setting value Description 0 Linear counter: 1foot / count 1 Area counter: 1foot2 / count

NOTE The counting unit of Counter A is set as follows when shipped. USA 1 foot/count (setting value : 0) Europe and Asia 1m/count (setting value : 0)

NOTE The counting unit of Counter A is set as follows when shipped. USA 1foot2 / count (setting value : 1) Europe and Asia 1m2 / count (setting value : 2)

K115sm8e2.doc 8-50

(8) Operation of Dehumidify Heater (No.07) It is possible to decide when the Dehumidify Heater should operate.

Setting value Description 0 Dehumidify Heater operates only when the Power Switch is OFF. 1 Dehumidify Heater operates always.

(9) Cut length of user Test Print (No.08) Cut length of test print that is performed from the User Mode can be specified. Selectable setting values rely on “metric / inch setting (Item No.00)”. In case “meter (ISO)” is selected :

Setting value Cut length A0 1189mm A1 841mm A2 594mm A3 420mm A4 197mm A5 210mm b1 1030mm b2 728mm b3 515mm b4 364mm b5 257mm

In case “inch (ANSI)” is selected :

Setting value Cut length 48 48” 44 44” 36 36” 34 34” 30 30” 24 24” 22 22” 18 18” 17 17” 12 12” 11 11” 8.5 8.5”

NOTE This cut length is not applied to the test print from the Service Mode (Sub Mode 8).

K115sm8e2.doc 8-51

(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (No.09 to 0b) Some setting items of Adjustment Modes 0/1 are available to have dual setting values as “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. (Such items are called “dual value items”) The modes No. 09, 0A and 0b are available to change “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value” respectively on these dual value items. Refer to [Operation] on page 8-53 for how to change these values. Each 09, 0A and 0b has its own target setting based on the media type.

Item No. Target setting 09 Dual value items concerned with plain paper can be adjusted. 0A Dual value items concerned with tracing paper can be adjusted. 0b Dual value items concerned with film can be adjusted.

Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the descriptions are as follows.

Setting value Description 0 “Standard Setting Value” of dual value items can be changed. 1 “Special Setting Value” of dual value item can be changed.

[Description] Normally an individual setting item of Adjustment Modes 0/1 has only 1 setting value that is called “Standard Setting Value”. However, some setting items are available to have one more setting value called “Special Setting Value” in addition to “Standard Setting Value”. Such setting items are called “dual value items”. The following list shows some examples of dual setting items. (All items are concerned with plain paper.)

Item No.

Setting target Standard Setting Value (Example)

Special Setting Value (Example)

10 Fuser temperature (PPC) 170 190 1C Transfer corona current (PPC) 242 265 1F DC component for Separation Corona

(PPC) 319 310

Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4)

33 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 /PPC /Large size /0 to 2m)

-10 -07

0C Image placement (Roll 1 /PPC /Large size)

11.0 9.5

3C Length of trailing margin (Roll 1 /PPC /Large size)

11.0 10.0

Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode No.5)

6C Length of image (Roll 1 /PPC /Large size)

0.05 -0.15

“Standard Setting Value” is the factory default that has been specified in the factory before shipment so as to produce the best print result in our assumed usage condition. (Field customization for the Standard Setting Value is available of course.) “Special Setting Value” is something like “occasionally required custom setting”. There will be a case that normally the usage condition is within as assumed so “Standard Setting Value” is enough for getting a satisfactory print result, but sometimes (temporarily or constantly) the usage condition becomes NOT within as assumed so you need to set a certain setting item to some “special state” temporarily for getting a satisfactory print result in such special usage condition. This “special state” is what we call “Special Setting Value”. For example;

• Normally the user uses recommended paper and can get a proper print result with the default fuser temperature (170 degrees for example), but he sometimes uses a very special paper that requires to set the fuser temperature to some special state (190 degree) for

K115sm8e2.doc 8-52

getting a proper print result. So he needs to have 2 different fuser temperature settings for getting satisfactory result in both cases, one for recommended paper (Standard Setting Value) and another for special paper (Special Setting Value).

NOTE (1) It is not recommended to change the “Standard Setting Value” as it is the best factory setting, but it is possible to do it if necessary. Preferably backup all the Standard Setting Value before change. (2) Refer to each setting item list to know which items of Adjustment Mode 0/1 are “dual value items”. [8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-39 [8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-89 If “OK” is provided in [Special setting] column of the list, this item is a “dual value item”. If “NO”, it is a “single value item”. (3) Switch between “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value” can be done in the User Modes 8, 9 and A. If you set the User Mode to [Standard Print Mode], the “Standard Setting Value” of all dual value items become active. If you set the User Mode to [Special Print Mode], the “Special Setting Value” of all dual value items become active. Refer to the following pages for the detail of User Modes 8, 9 and A. [8.2.8 User Mode 8] (Page 8-180) [8.2.9 User Mode 9] (Page 8-184) [8.2.10 User Mode A] (Page 8-188) (4) On every dual value item, its “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value” are set to the same value when shipped from factory.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-53

[Operation] The “Special Setting Value” of Fuser Temperature for PPC (item No.10) is to be change in this example. 1. As the dual value item concerned with “plain paper” is to be changed, select the item No.09 in the Adjustment Mode 0.. 2. Press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value on the 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE Select “0A” if you will change the setting of any dual value item concerned with tracing paper, and “0b” when the item is concerned with film.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-54

3. As the “Special Setting Value” is to be changed, select the setting value “1” pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key.

Setting value Description 0 Select this when “Standard Setting Value” is to be changed. 1 Select this when “Special Setting Value” is to be changed.

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value “1”. The setting value “1” stops flashing. It becomes possible to access the “Special Setting Values” of all dual value items for changing them.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e2.doc 8-55

5. Pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key, indicate your required Item Number of any dual value item. Example : As the “Special Setting Value” of [Fuser temperature (PPC)] is to be changed, indicate its Item Number “10”. 6. Press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value (Special Setting Value of selected dual value item) on the 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE Refer to each setting item list to know which items of Adjustment Mode 0/1 are “dual value items”. [8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-39 [8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-89 If “OK” is provided in [Special setting] column of the list, this item is a “dual value item”. If “NO”, it is a “single value item”.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-56

7. Change the “Special Setting Value” pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key. 8. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the “Special Setting Value”. The setting value stops flashing when decided. 9. If required, select another dual value item and change the “Special Setting Value” similarly. 10. Cancel the Service Mode.

NOTE “Standard Setting Value” does not change even if you change the “Special Setting Value”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e2.doc 8-57

(11) Cold Sleep ON/OFF (No.0C) Cold Sleep mode can be set to ON or OFF. (This selection can be done only in the Service Mode.)

Setting value Description On Cold Sleep works.

OFF Cold Sleep does not work. (12) Compensation of Analog Outputs (No.0d) The Analog Outputs from the High Voltage Power Supplies (HVP1-6) and Bias Power Supply (BIAS) can be compensated to the needed levels by compensating the variation of Input Voltage (about 5V) to the Main Controller PCB. The setting value stands for the voltage (N). This mode needs to be operated only after replacing the DCP2. See [4.4 Compensation of Analog Outputs by Service Mode 4-0d (Necessary after replacing DCP2)] on page 4-104 for more detail.

NOTE Cold Sleep timer can be specified in the User Mode 4. See [8.2.4 User Mode 4 (Cold Sleep Mode timer setting)] on page 8-168.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-58

(13) Fusing temperature (No.10 to 12) Fusing temperature for each media type can be changed. The setting unit is “degree centigrade”, and the adjustment range is from 150 to 190.

Item No. Description 09 Fusing temperature applied when you print with a plain paper. 0A Fusing temperature applied when you print with a tracing paper. 0b Fusing temperature applied when you print with a film.

(14) LED strobe time (No.13) Print density can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the LED strobe time. The adjustment unit is “1micro second. The whole print density becomes darker if the value is increased.

NOTE Item No.10, 11, and 12 are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-51 for the detail.

NOTE (1) This setting is applied in the following cases.

• Test print • Print from some controller that does not have density setting.

(2) Increment/decrement of this setting evenly affects all Image Enhance Categories.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-59

(15) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (PPC) (No.15) The OFF timing of Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED can be decided. This setting is applied when printed with a plain paper. There are 2 selectable settings.

Setting value Description 0 Both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED turn OFF normally. 1 When plain paper is used, both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED

turn OFF 0.12 seconds earlier than the normal timing. (For tracing paper and film, they turn OFF normally.)

Separation Corona Pre-Transfer LED

NOTE Transfer defect may occur on the trailing edge of print if the used plain paper is very special, but such problem might be fixed if No.C8 is set to “1”. (Transfer defect means the toner remains on the Drum without being transferred onto the print media.)

K115sm8e2.doc 8-60

(16) Pre-Transfer LED ON / OFF (No.16) It is possible to decide whether or not the Pre-Transfer LED turns ON. There are 2 selectable settings.

Setting value Description 0 Pre-Transfer LED does not turn ON during the print cycle. 1 Pre-Transfer LED turns ON during the print cycle.

Pre-Transfer LED (17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (No.17) It is possible to decide whether or not the Separation Lamp lights. This setting is applied when a plain paper is used. There are 2 selectable settings.

Setting value Description 0 Separation Lamp does not light during the print cycle. 1 Separation Lamp lights during the print cycle.

Separation Lamp

K115sm8e2.doc 8-61

(18) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (No.18) It is possible to decide whether or not the Separation Lamp lights. This setting is applied when a tracing paper is used. There are 2 selectable settings.


Separation Lamp

K115sm8e2.doc 8-62

(19) Developer Bias (applied when Auto Density Control is set to OFF) (No.19) It is possible to adjust the Developer Bias supplied to the Developer Roller. The Bias specified here is directly applied when the Auto Density Control is set to OFF. The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 0FF. More negative Bias is provided to the Developer Bias when the value is increased, which makes the print image darker. Developer Roller (20) Current setting for the Image Corona Wire (No.1A) Intensity of current that flows on the Image Corona Wires can be adjusted. The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 0FF. If the value is increased, Drum will be charged more negative as more current flows on the Image Corona Wire. Image Corona Wires

NOTE Make sure to adjust the Developer Bias in this item No.19. Do not adjust the Bias by moving the volumes on the Bias Board, as they have been adjusted and locked in the factory.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-63

(21) Current setting for the Grid Plate (applied when Auto SP Control is set to OFF) (No.1b) Intensity of current that flows on the Grid Plate can be adjusted. The current specified here is directly applied when the Auto SP Control is set to OFF. The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 500. If the value is increased, Drum will be charged more negative as more current flows on the Grid Plate. Grid Plate (22) Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (No.1C to 1E) Intensity of current that flows on the Transfer Corona Wire can be adjusted. The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 500. If the value is increased, toner will tend to be more attracted onto the media as more current flows on the Transfer Corona Wires. Each Item No. has its own target media. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target media 1C Plain paper 1d Tracing paper 1E Film

Transfer Corona Wire

K115sm8e2.doc 8-64

(23) Separation Corona DC component (No.1F to 21) DC component supplied to the Separation Corona can be adjusted. The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 500. If the value is increased, more negative electric charges will be provided from the Separation Corona. Each Item No. has its own target media type. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target media 1F Plain paper 20 Tracing paper 21 Film

Separation Corona (24) Paper Feed Motor Speed (No.22 to 26) The speed of Paper Feed Motor can be adjusted. The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%. Increment of the value makes the speed of Paper Feed Motor faster. Each Item No. has its own target media source. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target media source 22 Bypass feed 23 Roll 1 24 Roll 2 25 Roll 3 26 Roll 4

K115sm8e2.doc 8-65

(25) Fuser Motor Speed (Bypass feed) (No.27 to 32) The speed of Fuser Motor can be adjusted. This setting is applied when the print media is fed from the Bypass Feeder. The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%. Increment of the value makes the speed of Fuser Motor faster. Each Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target media type Target media size27 Plain paper Large 28 Plain paper Medium 29 Plain paper Small 2A Plain paper Smallest 2b Tracing paper Large 2C Tracing paper Medium 2d Tracing paper Small 2E Tracing paper Smallest 2F Film Large 30 Film Medium 31 Film Small 32 Film Smallest

NOTE (1) Media sizes are classified into 4 levels as follows. (2) Item No.27 to 32 are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-51 for the detail.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width) Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30” Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22” Small A2 and B3 18” and 17” Smallest A3 12” and 11”

K115sm8e2.doc 8-66

(26) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 1) (No.33 to 54) The speed of Fuser Motor can be adjusted. This setting is applied when the print media is fed from the Roll Deck 1. The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%. Increment of the value makes the speed of Fuser Motor faster. Each Item No. has its own target media type and media size. And in case of the large size of plain paper, it is possible to specify the motor speed for every “1m long” step.

Item No.

Media type Media size (Range of media length)

Item No.


33 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) 44 Plain paper Large (18 to 19m) 34 Plain paper Large (2 to 3m) 45 Plain paper Large (19 to 20m) 35 Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) 46 Plain paper Large (20 to 21m) 36 Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) 47 Plain paper Large (21 to 22m) 37 Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) 48 Plain paper Large (22 to 23m) 38 Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) 49 Plain paper Large (23 to 24m) 39 Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) 4A Plain paper Medium 3A Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) 4b Plain paper Small 3b Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) 4C Plain paper Smallest 3C Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) 4d Tracing paper Large 3d Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) 4E Tracing paper Medium 3E Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) 4F Tracing paper Small 3F Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) 50 Tracing paper Smallest 40 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) 51 Film Large 41 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) 52 Film Medium 42 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) 53 Film Small 43 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) 54 Film Smallest



K115sm8e2.doc 8-67


Item No.


Item No.


55 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) 66 Plain paper Large (18 to 19m) 56 Plain paper Large (2 to 3m) 67 Plain paper Large (19 to 20m) 57 Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) 68 Plain paper Large (20 to 21m) 58 Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) 69 Plain paper Large (21 to 22m) 59 Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) 6A Plain paper Large (22 to 23m) 5A Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) 6b Plain paper Large (23 to 24m) 5b Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) 6C Plain paper Medium 5C Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) 6d Plain paper Small 5d Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) 6E Plain paper Smallest 5E Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) 6F Tracing paper Large 5F Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) 70 Tracing paper Medium 60 Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) 71 Tracing paper Small 61 Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) 72 Tracing paper Smallest 62 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) 73 Film Large 63 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) 74 Film Medium 64 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) 75 Film Small 65 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) 76 Film Smallest



K115sm8e2.doc 8-68


Item No.


Item No.


77 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) 88 Plain paper Large (18 to 19m) 78 Plain paper Large (2 to 3m) 89 Plain paper Large (19 to 20m) 79 Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) 8A Plain paper Large (20 to 21m) 7A Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) 8b Plain paper Large (21 to 22m) 7b Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) 8C Plain paper Large (22 to 23m) 7C Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) 8d Plain paper Large (23 to 24m) 7d Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) 8E Plain paper Medium 7E Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) 8F Plain paper Small 7F Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) 90 Plain paper Smallest 80 Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) 91 Tracing paper Large 81 Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) 92 Tracing paper Medium 82 Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) 93 Tracing paper Small 83 Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) 94 Tracing paper Smallest 84 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) 95 Film Large 85 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) 96 Film Medium 86 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) 97 Film Small 87 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) 98 Film Smallest



K115sm8e2.doc 8-69

(29) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 4) (No.99 to bA) The speed of Fuser Motor can be adjusted. This setting is applied when the print media is fed from the Roll Deck 4. The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%. Increment of the value makes the speed of Fuser Motor faster. Each Item No. has its own target media type and media size. And in case of the large size of plain paper, it is possible to specify the motor speed for every “1m long” step.

Item No.


Item No.


99 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) AA Plain paper Large (18 to 19m) 9A Plain paper Large (2 to 3m) Ab Plain paper Large (19 to 20m) 9b Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) Ac Plain paper Large (20 to 21m) 9C Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) Ad Plain paper Large (21 to 22m) 9d Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) AE Plain paper Large (22 to 23m) 9E Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) AF Plain paper Large (23 to 24m) 9F Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) b0 Plain paper Medium A0 Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) b1 Plain paper Small A1 Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) b2 Plain paper Smallest A2 Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) b3 Tracing paper Large A3 Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) b4 Tracing paper Medium A4 Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) b5 Tracing paper Small A5 Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) b6 Tracing paper Smallest A6 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) b7 Film Large A7 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) b8 Film Medium A8 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) b9 Film Small A9 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) bA Film Smallest

NOTE (1) Media sizes are classified into 4 levels as follows. (2) Item No.99 to bA are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-51 for the detail.


K115sm8e2.doc 8-70

(30) Image placement (For 2nd and later prints) (No.bb) The vertical position of print image on the media can be adjusted. This setting is applied to the 2nd and later prints in multiple printing. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 100 (0 to 10.0mm). Increment of the value shifts the whole print image to the leading edge side, that is the leading margin on the print becomes narrower. Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased. (31) Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) ON timing (No.bC) It is possible to adjust when the Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) should operate in print process. The setting unit is 1 millisecond, and the setting range is from 1 to 30 milliseconds. The ON timing of Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) can be decided taking the ON timing of Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) as the standard. If you set the No.bC to “20 milliseconds” for example, the Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) operates (ON) 20 milliseconds earlier than the Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) operates (ON). Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10) Paper Feed Clutch (MC6)

K115sm8e2.doc 8-71

(32) Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) and Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) ON timing (No.bd) It is possible to adjust when the Roll Paper Feed Clutches 1, 2, 3 and 4 (MC1 to MC4) and the Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) should operate. The setting unit is 1 millisecond, and the setting range is from 1 to 20 milliseconds. The ON timing of these clutches (MC1, MC2, MC3, MC4 and MC7) can be decided taking the ON timing of Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) as the standard. If you set the No.bd to “10 milliseconds” for example, these clutches operate (ON) 10 milliseconds earlier than the Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) operates (ON). Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) Roll paper Feed Clutch 1 (MC1) Roll paper Feed Clutch 2 (MC2) Roll paper Feed Clutch 3 Paper Feed Clutch (MC3) (MC6) Roll Paper Feed Clutch 4 (MC4)

K115sm8e2.doc 8-72

(33) Paper Gate Brake (MC10) ON timing (No.bE) It is possible to adjust when the Paper Gate Brake (MC10) should operate. The setting unit is 1 millisecond, and the setting range is from 1 to 20 milliseconds. The ON timing of Paper Gate Brake (MC10) can be decided taking the OFF timing of Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) as the standard. If you set the No.bE to “10 milliseconds” for example, the Paper Gate Brake (MC10) operates (ON) 10 milliseconds earlier than the Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) operates (OFF). Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10)

K115sm8e2.doc 8-73

(34) Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (No. BF to C1) Whether or not the Sub Separation Blower operates can be decided.

Setting value Description 0 Sub Separation Blower does not operate during the print cycle. 1 Sub Separation Blower operates during the print cycle.

Each Item No. has its own target media type. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target media bF Plain paper C0 Tracing paper C1 Film

Sub Separation Blowers (BL12, BL13, BL14, BL15 & BL16)

NOTE If the media is not separated well from the Drum and the Separation Area Jam (J-12) occurs often, the air blow from the Sub Separation Blowers might solve the problem. Try to set this mode to “1” in such case. On the other hand, the machine inside may become dirty in this case as the toner is blown by the air. Occasional cleaning will be required.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-74

(35) TE Margin Compensation (No. C2 to C5) It is possible to select any compensation level which avoids the variation of TE margin caused by the variation of roll thickness. Selectable setting values are 0, 1, 2 and 3.

Description (length of added TE margin) Unit : mm

Setting value (Compensation level of TE margin)

1/8 2/8 3/8 4/8 5/8 6/8 7/8 8/8 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 +1.0 +1.2 +1.4 2 0.0 +0.4 +0.8 +1.2 +1.6 +2.0 +2.4 +2.8 3 0.0 +0.6 +1.2 +1.8 +2.4 +3.0 +3.6 +4.2

Each Item No. has its own target Roll Deck. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target Roll Deck C2 Roll 1 C3 Roll 2 C4 Roll 3 C5 Roll4

[Description] When printed with both thick (new) and narrow (near empty) roll media respectively, the lengths of trailing margin on both printouts will be different from each other. In general the TE margin tends to become shorter than what it must be when printed with a narrower roll media. That is to say, more TE margin should be provided as the thickness of roll is reduced for getting the same TE margin always without affected by the variation of roll thickness. In the Items No. C2 to C5 it is possible to select any best TE Margin Compensation Level. More TE margin is added if larger level is selected. See the next page.

Thick roll media Narrow roll media

Difference of trailing margin

K115sm8e2.doc 8-75

The thickness of roll media is divided into 8 roll thickness levels as “8/8” to “1/8” (level is detected by the Paper Feed Clock Sensor.). 8/8 is the thickest (new roll media) and 1/8 is the narrowest (near to empty).

• More TE margin is added as the roll thickness level gets narrower. • More TE margin is added as larger setting value is selected. (No compensation is

performed when the value is set to “0”)

Compensation (length of added TE margin) Roll thickness level Setting value : 0

(No compensation) Setting value : 1 Setting value : 2 Setting value : 3

8/8 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 7/8 0.0mm +0.2mm +0.4mm +0.6mm 6/8 0.0mm +0.4mm +0.8mm +1.2mm 5/8 0.0mm +0.6mm +1.2mm +1.8mm 4/8 0.0mm +0.8mm +1.6mm +2.4mm 3/8 0.0mm +1.0mm +2.0mm +3.0mm 2/8 0.0mm +1.2mm +2.4mm +3.6mm 1/8 0.0mm +1.4mm +2.8mm +4.2mm

Trailing margin is same. Compensation

K115sm8e2.doc 8-76

(36) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (No.C6) It is possible to decide whether or not the Separation Lamp lights. This setting is applied when a film is used. There are 2 selectable settings.


Separation Lamp

NOTE (1) No.C6 is set to “0” (Lamp does not light) in default state. But the Separation Lamp may become a solution for getting a better transfer result when some specific type of film is used. It will be valuable to try to turn ON the Separation Lamp if transfer result looks not satisfactory. (2) Switch between ON / OFF can be done also in the User Mode 6. See Refer to [8.2.6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film])] on the page 8-174. Neither Service Mode nor User Mode has the setting priority. The final setting on either modes become active. (Separation Lamp is called “Transfer Support LED” in User Mode.)

K115sm8e2.doc 8-77

(37) Image Enhancement Mode Selection (No.C7) The level of Image Enhancement can be selected. The printed image is more enhanced (become darker) when selecting a larger level.

Setting value (Image Enhancement Mode)

Description

0 Image is not enhanced (Image Enhancement is OFF) 1 Image is enhanced with “low” Image Enhancement Level. 2 Image is enhanced with “medium” Image Enhancement Level. 3 Image is enhanced with “high” Image Enhancement Level.

(38) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Tracing) (No.C8) The OFF timing of Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED can be decided. This setting is applied when printed with a tracing paper. There are 2 selectable settings.


turn OFF 0.12 seconds earlier than the normal timing. (For plain paper and film, they turn OFF normally.)


NOTE Transfer defect may occur on the trailing edge of print if the used tracing paper is very special, but such problem might be fixed if No.C8 is set to “1”. (Transfer defect means the toner remains on the Drum without being transferred onto the print media.)

NOTE The selection of Image Enhancement Mode ) can be done on the User Mode B also. Refer to [8. 2.11 User Mode B (Selection of Image Enhancement Mode] on page 8-192. As neither Service Mode nor User Mode has the priority for the setting, the setting specified on either mode at the last occasion become effective.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-78

(39) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Film) (No.C9) The OFF timing of Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED can be decided. This setting is applied when printed with a film. There are 2 selectable settings.


turn OFF 0.12 seconds earlier than the normal timing. (For plain paper and tracing paper, they turn OFF normally.)


NOTE Transfer defect may occur on the trailing edge of print if the used film paper is very special, but such problem might be fixed if No.C9 is set to “1”. (Transfer defect means the toner remains on the Drum without being transferred onto the print media.)

K115sm8e2.doc 8-79

(40) Image Enhancement Level for single pixel (No.CD) An isolated single pixel can be enhanced by Image Enhancement Levels (IE Levels). Selectable IE Levels are 0 to 7. Specifying a larger IE Level makes the single pixel darker.

Setting value (IE Level)

Description

0 Isolated single pixel is not enhanced. 1 Isolated single pixel is enhanced. 2 Isolated single pixel is enhanced more than IE Level 1. 3 Isolated single pixel is enhanced more than IE Level 2. 4 Isolated single pixel is enhanced more than IE Level 3. 5 Isolated single pixel is enhanced more than IE Level 4. 6 Isolated single pixel is enhanced more than IE Level 5. 7 Isolated single pixel is enhanced most.

Not enhanced Enhanced

NOTE This setting is applied to only the single pixel which is found to be “completely isolated” by the image process software.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-80

(41) Image Enhancement Level (No. CE) (applied when IE Mode is OFF, or IE Category is “A1” in any IE Mode) It is possible to select an Image Enhancement Level (IE Level) that makes enhancement commonly to all the images (pixels) belonging to the following conditions.

• All IE Categories (A1 to A5, and B1 to B5) when Image Enhancement Mode (IE Mode) is set to “OFF” in the Item No.C7.

• IE Category A1 when IE Mode is set to “low”, “medium” and “high” in the Item No.C7. (The items with “Applied” in the list are concerned to the above conditions.)

IE Mode (Can be set in Item No.C7) IE Category

OFF Low Medium High A1 Applied : CE Applied : CE Applied : CE Applied : CE A2 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied A3 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied A4 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied A5 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied B1 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied B2 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied B3 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied B4 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied B5 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied

Specifying a larger IE Level makes the concerning images (pixels) darker.


Description

0 Image Enhancement is not performed. 1 Images are enhanced (become darker). 2 Images are more enhanced (become much darker) than IE Level 1. 3 Images are more enhanced (become much darker) than IE Level 2. 4 Images are more enhanced (become much darker) than IE Level 3. 5 Images are more enhanced (become much darker) than IE Level 4. 6 Images are more enhanced (become much darker) than IE Level 5. 7 Images are enhanced most (become darkest).

See REFERENCE on next page for more detail about IE Category.

K115sm8e2.doc 8-81

Reference

When the Image Enhancement is activated on the item No. 8044, the KIP9000 categorizes every single pixel of print data into any of 10 IE Categories depending on its “visual appeal power”. 2 factors concern for the categorization, such as “isolate level” and “existence of nearby dot”.

• “Isolate level” stands for the isolation from other images, and shown by the “numeral” of IE Category as A1 or A2. A larger value stands for more isolation from other images (as single pixel). “More isolation” reduces the “visual appeal power” of the target pixel. Therefore more image enhancement is required for more isolated pixel to print it much darker.

• “Existence of nearby dot” is shown by the alphabet of IE Category as A1 or B1. Nearby dot exists when “B”, and does not exist when “A”. As the existence of nearby dot provides more “visual appeal power” to the concerning pixel, less image enhancement is required.

The followings are the descriptions of 10 IE Categories, which are ordered from top to bottom in terms of their visual appeal power. (Upper item has more visual appeal power.) B5 : Isolate level 5 with nearby dot Have more visual appeal power A5 : Isolate level 5 without nearby dot (Needs less image enhancement) B4 : Isolate level 4 with nearby dot A4 : Isolate level 4 without nearby dot B3 : Isolate level 3 with nearby dot A3 : Isolate level 3 without nearby dot B2 : Isolate level 2 with nearby dot A2 : Isolate level 2 without nearby dot B1 : Isolate level 1 with nearby dot A1 : Isolate level 1 without nearby dot Have less visual appeal power (Needs more image enhancement)

K115sm8e2.doc 8-82

(42) Image Enhancement Level (No. CF to d7) (applied when IE Mode is “low”) Items from CF to d7 specify any of 8 IE Level to each 9 IE Categories (A2 to A5, and B1 to B5) respectively. These settings are applies when the IE Mode is set to “low” in the Item No.C7. All the images (pixels) belonging to a certain Image Enhancement Category is equally enhanced by the Image Enhancement Level specified to this category.

IE Mode (Can be set in Item No.C7) IE Category OFF Low Medium High

A1 Not applied Not applied Not applied Not applied A2 Not applied Applied : CF Not applied Not applied A3 Not applied Applied : d0 Not applied Not applied A4 Not applied Applied : d1 Not applied Not applied A5 Not applied Applied : d2 Not applied Not applied B1 Not applied Applied : d3 Not applied Not applied B2 Not applied Applied : d4 Not applied Not applied B3 Not applied Applied : d5 Not applied Not applied B4 Not applied Applied : d6 Not applied Not applied B5 Not applied Applied : d7 Not applied Not applied

Specifying a larger Image Enhancement Level makes the concerning images (pixels) darker.


Description


Reference

Refer to REFERENCE on page 8-81 for the description of IE Category

K115sm8e2.doc 8-83

(43) Image Enhancement Level (No. d8 to E0) (applied when IE Mode is “medium”) Items from d8 to E0 specify any of 8 IE Level to each 9 IE Categories (A2 to A5, and B1 to B5) respectively. These settings are applies when the IE Mode is set to “medium” in the Item No.C7. All the images (pixels) belonging to a certain Image Enhancement Category is equally enhanced by the Image Enhancement Level specified to this category.


A1 Not applied Not applied Not applied Not applied A2 Not applied Not applied Applied : d8 Not applied A3 Not applied Not applied Applied : d9 Not applied A4 Not applied Not applied Applied : dA Not applied A5 Not applied Not applied Applied : db Not applied B1 Not applied Not applied Applied : dC Not applied B2 Not applied Not applied Applied : dd Not applied B3 Not applied Not applied Applied : dE Not applied B4 Not applied Not applied Applied : dF Not applied B5 Not applied Not applied Applied : E0 Not applied



Description


Reference


K115sm8e2.doc 8-84

(44) Image Enhancement Level (No. E1 to E9) (applied when IE Mode is “high”) Items from E1 to E9 specify any of 8 IE Level to each 9 IE Categories (A2 to A5, and B1 to B5) respectively. These settings are applies when the IE Mode is set to “high” in the Item No.C7. All the images (pixels) belonging to a certain Image Enhancement Category is equally enhanced by the Image Enhancement Level specified to this category.


A1 Not applied Not applied Not applied Not applied A2 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E1 A3 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E2 A4 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E3 A5 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E4 B1 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E5 B2 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E6 B3 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E7 B4 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E8 B5 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E9



Description


(45) LED Gumma setting (No.EA to EC) DO NOT ADJUST! These settings might be adjusted on some stage of the development of KIP9000.

Reference


K115sm8e3.doc 8-85

8. 1. 6 Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode 5) 8. 1. 6. 1 Function Several fundamental printer settings/parameters can be changed. Refer to [8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-89 for the brief information of the setting items. Please refer to [8.1.6.5 Description of each setting item] on and after the page 8-96 for the detail of the setting items. 8. 1. 6. 2 Indication on the Operation panel The 1st digit from the left indicates “5” which is the Sub Mode Number of “Adjustment Mode 1”. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number. The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the setting value of the selected Item Number. Sub Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 1 Item Number Setting Value

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e3.doc 8-86

8. 1. 5. 3 Operation 1. Enter the Service Mode, and indicate the Sub Mode Number “5” on the 1st digit from the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key. Sub Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 1 2. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number presently selected. Indicate the necessary Item Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Please refer to [8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-89 to know the description of setting. Example : “Length of image for Roll (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size) is to be adjusted. Indicate its Item Number “6C”. Item Number of “Length of image for Roll (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size)”

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e3.doc 8-87

3. Press the [ENTER] Key after selecting the necessary Item Number. The setting value on 4th, 5th and 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable. The setting value flashes. 4. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e3.doc 8-88

5. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the new setting value. The setting value stops flashing when decided.

NOTE If you press the [ ONLINE ] Key before deciding the new value, the former setting value is recovered. (Former setting value is recovered.)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e3.doc 8-89

8. 1. 5. 4 Setting item list

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 00 Image placement for cut sheet media

(PPC / Large size) 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

01 Image placement for cut sheet media (PPC / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

02 Image placement for cut sheet media (PPC / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

03 Image placement for cut sheet media (PPC / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

04 Image placement for cut sheet media (Tracing / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

05 Image placement for cut sheet media (Tracing / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

06 Image placement for cut sheet media (Tracing / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

07 Image placement for cut sheet media (Tracing / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

08 Image placement for cut sheet media (Film / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

09 Image placement for cut sheet media (Film / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

0A Image placement for cut sheet media (Film / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

0b Image placement for cut sheet media (Film / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96

0C Image placement for Roll 1 (PPC / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

0d Image placement for Roll 1 (PPC / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

0E Image placement for Roll 1 (PPC / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

0F Image placement for Roll 1 (PPC / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

10 Image placement for Roll 1 (Tracing / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

11 Image placement for Roll 1 (Tracing / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

12 Image placement for Roll 1 (Tracing / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

13 Image placement for Roll 1 (Tracing / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

14 Image placement for Roll 1 (Film / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

15 Image placement for Roll 1 (Film / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

16 Image placement for Roll 1 (Film / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

17 Image placement for Roll 1 (Film / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97

K115sm8e3.doc 8-90

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 18 Image placement for Roll 2


19 Image placement for Roll 2 (PPC / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98

1A Image placement for Roll 2 (PPC / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98

1b Image placement for Roll 2 (PPC / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98

1C Image placement for Roll 2 (Tracing / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98

1d Image placement for Roll 2 (Tracing / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98

1E Image placement for Roll 2 (Tracing / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98

1F Image placement for Roll 2 (Tracing / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98

22 Image placement for Roll 2 (Film / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98

23 Image placement for Roll 2 (Film / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98

24 Image placement for Roll 3 (PPC / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99

26 Image placement for Roll 3 (PPC / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99

27 Image placement for Roll 3 (PPC / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99

2A Image placement for Roll 3 (Tracing / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99

2b Image placement for Roll 3 (Tracing / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99

2C Image placement for Roll 3 (Film / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99

2d Image placement for Roll 3 (Film / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99

2E Image placement for Roll 3 (Film / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99

2F Image placement for Roll 3 (Film / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99

K115sm8e3.doc 8-91

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 30 Image placement for Roll 4



100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100

32 Image placement for Roll 4 (PPC / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100

33 Image placement for Roll 4 (PPC / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100

36 Image placement for Roll 4 (Tracing / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100

37 Image placement for Roll 4 (Tracing / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100

3A Image placement for Roll 4 (Film / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100

3b Image placement for Roll 4 (Film / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100

3C TE margin for Roll 1 (PPC / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

3d TE margin for Roll 1 (PPC / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

3E TE margin for Roll 1 (PPC / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

3F TE margin for Roll 1 (PPC / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

40 TE margin for Roll 1 (Tracing / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

41 TE margin for Roll 1 (Tracing / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

42 TE margin for Roll 1 (Tracing / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

43 TE margin for Roll 1 (Tracing / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

44 TE margin for Roll 1 (Film / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

45 TE margin for Roll 1 (Film / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

46 TE margin for Roll 1 (Film / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

47 TE margin for Roll 1 (Film / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101

K115sm8e3.doc 8-92

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 48 TE margin for Roll 2


49 TE margin for Roll 2 (PPC / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102

4A TE margin for Roll 2 (PPC / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102

4b TE margin for Roll 2 (PPC / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102

4C TE margin for Roll 2 (Tracing / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102

4d TE margin for Roll 2 (Tracing / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102

4E TE margin for Roll 2 (Tracing / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102

4F TE margin for Roll 2 (Tracing / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102

52 TE margin for Roll 2 (Film / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102

53 TE margin for Roll 2 (Film / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102

54 TE margin for Roll 3 (PPC / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103

56 TE margin for Roll 3 (PPC / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103

57 TE margin for Roll 3 (PPC / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103

5A TE margin for Roll 3 (Tracing / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103

5b TE margin for Roll 3 (Tracing / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103

5C TE margin for Roll 3 (Film / Large size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103

5d TE margin for Roll 3 (Film / Medium size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103

5E TE margin for Roll 3 (Film / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103

5F TE margin for Roll 3 (Film / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-103

K115sm8e3.doc 8-93

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 60 TE margin for Roll 4



100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104

62 TE margin for Roll 4 (PPC / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104

63 TE margin for Roll 4 (PPC / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104

66 TE margin for Roll 4 (Tracing / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104

67 TE margin for Roll 4 (Tracing / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104


100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104

6A TE margin for Roll 4 (Film / Small size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104

6b TE margin for Roll 4 (Film / Smallest size)

100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-104

6C Length of image for Roll 1 (PPC / Large size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

6d Length of image for Roll 1 (PPC / Medium size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

6E Length of image for Roll 1 (PPC / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

6F Length of image for Roll 1 (PPC / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

70 Length of image for Roll 1 (Tracing / Large size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

71 Length of image for Roll 1 (Tracing / Medium size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

72 Length of image for Roll 1 (Tracing / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

73 Length of image for Roll 1 (Tracing / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

74 Length of image for Roll 1 (Film / Large size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

75 Length of image for Roll 1 (Film / Medium size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

76 Length of image for Roll 1 (Film / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

77 Length of image for Roll 1 (Film / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105

K115sm8e3.doc 8-94

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 78 Length of image for Roll 2

(PPC / Large size) 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

79 Length of image for Roll 2 (PPC / Medium size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

7A Length of image for Roll 2 (PPC / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

7b Length of image for Roll 2 (PPC / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

7C Length of image for Roll 2 (Tracing / Large size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

7d Length of image for Roll 2 (Tracing / Medium size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

7E Length of image for Roll 2 (Tracing / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

7F Length of image for Roll 2 (Tracing / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

82 Length of image for Roll 2 (Film / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

83 Length of image for Roll 2 (Film / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106

84 Length of image for Roll 3 (PPC / Large size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107

86 Length of image for Roll 3 (PPC / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107

87 Length of image for Roll 3 (PPC / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107

8A Length of image for Roll 3 (Tracing / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107

8b Length of image for Roll 3 (Tracing / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107

8C Length of image for Roll 3 (Film / Large size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107

8d Length of image for Roll 3 (Film / Medium size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107

8E Length of image for Roll 3 (Film / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107

8F Length of image for Roll 3 (Film / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-107

K115sm8e3.doc 8-95

Item No.


Special setting

Adjustable Range


Refer to

page; 90 Length of image for Roll 4

(PPC / Large size) 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108

92 Length of image for Roll 4 (PPC / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108

93 Length of image for Roll 4 (PPC / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108

96 Length of image for Roll 4 (Tracing / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108

97 Length of image for Roll 4 (Tracing / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108


0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108

9A Length of image for Roll 4 (Film / Small size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108

9b Length of image for Roll 4 (Film / Smallest size)

0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-108

9C TE margin for cut sheet media (Large size)

100 NO 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-109

9d Web operation mode 8-110 9E Web operation time : Hour 8-110 9F Web operation time : Minute 8-110 A0 Web operation time : Second 8-110 A1 Web thickness 8-110 A2 Auto SP Control ON/OFF On On or OFF 8-111 A3 Target Surface Potential at 5oC 500 to 999 V 8-111 A4 Target Surface Potential at 10oC 500 to 999 V 8-111 A5 Target Surface Potential at 15oC 500 to 999 V 8-111 A6 Target Surface Potential at 20oC 500 to 999 V 8-111 A7 Target Surface Potential at 25oC 500 to 999 V 8-111 A8 Target Surface Potential at 30oC 500 to 999 V 8-111 A9 Acceptable potential range for Auto SP Control 4 to 10 V 8-111 AA Auto Density Control ON/OFF On On or OFF 8-112 Ab Compensation of Target Density 00 to FF Hex 8-112 AC Minimum voltage gap between SP and Bias 0 to 250 V 8-112

K115sm8e3.doc 8-96

8. 1. 6. 5 Description of each setting item (1) Image placement for cut sheet media (No.00 to 0b) It is possible to adjust the vertical placement of print image on the media. These settings are applied when printed with a cut sheet media. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value moves the whole image toward the trailing edge side (that is, the leading margin gets wider). Value is decreased. Value is increased. Each Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size 00 Plain paper Large 06 Tracing paper Small 01 Plain paper Medium 07 Tracing paper Smallest 02 Plain paper Small 08 Film Large 03 Plain paper Smallest 09 Film Medium 04 Tracing paper Large 0A Film Small 05 Tracing paper Medium 0b Film Smallest

NOTE (1) Media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” stand for as follows. (2) Items from No.00 to 0b are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-51 for the detail.


K115sm8e3.doc 8-97

(2) Image placement for Roll 1 (No.0C to 17) It is possible to adjust the vertical placement of print image on the media. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 1. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value moves the whole image toward the trailing edge side (that is, the leading margin gets wider). Value is decreased. Value is increased. Each Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size 0C Plain paper Large 12 Tracing paper Small 0d Plain paper Medium 13 Tracing paper Smallest 0E Plain paper Small 14 Film Large 0F Plain paper Smallest 15 Film Medium 10 Tracing paper Large 16 Film Small 11 Tracing paper Medium 17 Film Smallest

NOTE (1) Media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” stand for as follows. (2) Items from No.0C to 17 are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-51 for the detail.


K115sm8e3.doc 8-98

(3) Image placement for Roll 2 (No.18 to 23) It is possible to adjust the vertical placement of print image on the media. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 2. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value moves the whole image toward the trailing edge side (that is, the leading margin gets wider). Value is decreased. Value is increased. Each Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size 18 Plain paper Large 1E Tracing paper Small 19 Plain paper Medium 1F Tracing paper Smallest 1A Plain paper Small 20 Film Large 1b Plain paper Smallest 21 Film Medium 1C Tracing paper Large 22 Film Small 1d Tracing paper Medium 23 Film Smallest

NOTE (1) Media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” stand for as follows. (2) Items from No.18 to 23 are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-51 for the detail.


K115sm8e3.doc 8-99

(4) Image placement for Roll 3 (No.24 to 2F) It is possible to adjust the vertical placement of print image on the media. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 3. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value moves the whole image toward the trailing edge side (that is, the leading margin gets wider). Value is decreased. Value is increased. Each Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size 24 Plain paper Large 2A Tracing paper Small 25 Plain paper Medium 2b Tracing paper Smallest 26 Plain paper Small 2C Film Large 27 Plain paper Smallest 2d Film Medium 28 Tracing paper Large 2E Film Small 29 Tracing paper Medium 2F Film Smallest

NOTE (1) Media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” stand for as follows. (2) Items from No.24 to 2F are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-51 for the detail.


K115sm8e3.doc 8-100

(5) Image placement for Roll 4 (No.30 to 3b) It is possible to adjust the vertical placement of print image on the media. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 4. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value moves the whole image toward the trailing edge side (that is, the leading margin gets wider). Value is decreased. Value is increased. Each Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.




K115sm8e3.doc 8-101

(6) TE margin for Roll 1 (No.3C to 47) It is possible to adjust the length of TE margin. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 1. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value provides more TE margin. Value is decreased. Value is increased. Exch Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.




K115sm8e3.doc 8-102

(7) TE margin for Roll 2 (No.48 to 53) It is possible to adjust the length of TE margin. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 2. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value provides more TE margin. Value is decreased. Value is increased. Exch Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.




K115sm8e3.doc 8-103

(8) TE margin for Roll 3 (No.54 to 5F) It is possible to adjust the length of TE margin. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 3. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value provides more TE margin. Value is decreased. Value is increased. Exch Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.




K115sm8e3.doc 8-104

(9) TE margin for Roll 4 (No.60 to 6b) It is possible to adjust the length of TE margin. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 4. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value provides more TE margin. Value is decreased. Value is increased. Exch Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.




K115sm8e3.doc 8-105

(10) Length of image for Roll 1 (No.6C to 77) It is possible to adjust the length of print image. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 1. The setting unit is 0.01%, and the setting range is from -1.00% to +1.00%. Increment makes the image longer to vertical direction. Value is decreased. Value is increased. Exch Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.




K115sm8e3.doc 8-106

(11) Length of image for Roll 2 (No.78 to 83) It is possible to adjust the length of print image. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 2. The setting unit is 0.01%, and the setting range is from -1.00% to +1.00%. Increment makes the image longer to vertical direction. Value is decreased. Value is increased. Exch Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.




K115sm8e3.doc 8-107

(12) Length of image for Roll 3 (No.84 to 8F) It is possible to adjust the length of print image. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 3. The setting unit is 0.01%, and the setting range is from -1.00% to +1.00%. Increment makes the image longer to vertical direction. Value is decreased. Value is increased. Exch Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.




K115sm8e3.doc 8-108

(13) Length of image for Roll 4 (No.90 to 9b) It is possible to adjust the length of print image. These settings are applied when printed with Roll 4. The setting unit is 0.01%, and the setting range is from -1.00% to +1.00%. Increment makes the image longer to vertical direction. Value is decreased. Value is increased. Exch Item No. has its own target media type and media size. Please adjust the proper item.




K115sm8e3.doc 8-109

(14) TE margin for cut sheet media (Large) (No.9C) It is possible to adjust the length of TE margin. This setting is applied when printed with a “large” cut sheet media. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value provides more TE margin. Value is decreased. Value is increased.

NOTE (1) Media sizes “large” means A0, 36”, 34” and 30”. (2) The length of TE margin can be adjusted by deleting or adding the image on the trailing edge area.

K115sm8e3.doc 8-110

(15) Web operation mode (No.9d) Set No.9d to “1” if the optional Web Unit is installed to KIP9000.

Setting value Description 0 Web Unit does not operate. 1 Web Unit operates.

(16) Web operation time (No.9E to A0) It is possible to change the total operation time of Web Unit counted by the KIP9000 firmware. Exch Item No. has its own setting target.

Item No. Target setting Setting range Setting unit 9E Can change “hour” of web operation time. 0 to 16 1 hour 9F Can change “minute” of web operation time. 0 to 59 1 minute A0 Can change “second” of web operation time. 0 to 59 1 second

(17) Web thickness (No.A1) It is possible to input the actual thickness of Web. The setting range is 0.0mm to 14.0mm in 0.1mm increment.

NOTE When No.9d is set to “0”, the Web Unit is inactive even if it is installed.

NOTE (1) Recovery from “Web End” or “Web Near End” has to be done in the correct way. a) Set all of 9E, 9F and A0 “0” (set to 0 hour 0 minute 0 second) after replacing the web with the new one. b) In any of No.9E to A1, press and hold the WIRE-CLEAN Key and then press the CUT Key. c) Turn off/on the KIP9000. “Web End” or “Web Near End” is cleared. If the above b) and c) are not performed, Web End error will be indicated continuously! (2) Web operation time (No.9E to A0) and web thickness (No.A1) are linked with each other. If either one is changed, the other one is changed also to the appropriate value automatically.

NOTE The “counter” for Web End error is normally the web operation time (9E, 9F & A0). If the web operation time is lost accidentally, web thickness is the solution to recover the counter. Measure the actual thickness of unused side of web roll and input that value on No.A1. An appropriate web operation time is automatically calculated from the web thickness, and it is automatically set on each No. 9E, 9F and A0. Thus the counter can be recovered.

K115sm8e3.doc 8-111

(18) Auto SP Control ON/OFF (No.A2) Auto SP Control can be set to ON or OFF.

Setting value Description OFF Auto SP Control is not performed. ON Auto SP Control is performed.

(19) Target Surface Potential (No.A3 to A8) Target Surface Potential at each temperature points (5 degrees step) can be specified, which is used when the Auto SP Control adjusts the surface potential. The setting range is from 500 to 999 in 1V increment. Increment of the setting value provides a possibility to have bigger density gap against Developer Bias, which makes the print image lighter.

Item No. Target setting A3 Target Surface Potential at 5oC A4 Target Surface Potential at 10oC A5 Target Surface Potential at 15oC A6 Target Surface Potential at 20oC A7 Target Surface Potential at 25oC A8 Target Surface Potential at 30oC

(20) Acceptable potential range for Auto SP Control (No.A9) KIP9000 will show the service call error E-26 if the Automatic SP Control fails in adjusting the potential to within acceptable range within decided times of trial. The acceptable range can be specified in the No.A9. The setting value stands for “+/- X volts against the Target Surface Potential. The setting range is from 4 to 10 volts in 1V increment. Increment of setting value increases the possibility to avoid service call error E-26.

NOTE Service Mode 5-A2 is the same setting with User Mode D. When the Auto SP Control is set to OFF, it may be possible to avoid machine down caused by the service call error E-26. Neither Service Mode 5-A2 nor User Mode D has setting priority.

K115sm8e3.doc 8-112

(21) Auto Density Control ON/OFF (error check level) (No.AA) Auto Density Control can be set to any of OFF, ON1 and ON2.

Setting value Description OFF Auto Density Control is not performed. ON1 Auto Density Control is performed with normal error check level. ON2 Auto Density Control is performed with strict error check level.

(22) Compensation of Target Density (No.Ab) Target Density can be compensated if necessary. The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is 00 to FF. Increment of the setting value makes the Target Density darker. (23) Minimum voltage gap between SP and Bias (No.AC) When the Auto Density Control tries to adjust the density several times, the Developer Bias may be so much increased that the voltage gap between Surface Potential and Developer Bias may become so small. This situation may result in very light image as enough amount of toner can not move onto the Drum at development because of small voltage gap. To avoid such situation, it is possible to specify a minimum voltage gap. The setting stands for “-X volts against the Surface Potential”, and the setting range is from 0 to 250V in 1V increment.

NOTE Service Mode 5-AA is the same setting with User Mode E. When the Auto Density Control is set to OFF, it may be possible to avoid machine down caused by the service call error E-28. Neither Service Mode 5-AA nor User Mode E has setting priority.

K115sm8e4.doc 8-113

8. 1. 7 Running Mode (Sub Mode 6 : Do not use) 8. 1. 7. 1 Function Running Mode (mode No.6) is used only when the manufacturer makes an evaluation test by operating the machine endlessly. Do not make any operation in the Running Mode as this is not required in the field.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-114

8. 1. 8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7) 8. 1. 8. 1 Function It is possible to ignore (mask) the Service Call Errors purposely in the Error Mask Mode. The errors that can be ignored are listed in below.

Mask Code Name of error Error Code 00 Fuser Temperature Rising Error E-01 01 Fuser Over Temperature Error E-02 02 Fuser Thermostat Error E-21 03 Paper Feed Motor Error E-13 04 Drum Motor Error E-05 05 Fuser Motor Error E-14 06 Developer Positioning Motor Error E-49 07 Cutter Motor Error E-07 08 Counter A Error E-06 09 Counter B Error E-06 0A Wire Cleaning Error E-16 0b LED Head Cleaning Error E-23 0C Unused 0d Unused 0E Unused 0F Unused 10 Unused 11 Unused 12 Unused 13 Unused 14 Unused 15 Unused 16 Unused 17 Unused 18 Unused 19 Unused 1A Unused 1b Unused 1C Unused 1d Unused 1E Unused 1F Unused

K115sm8e4.doc 8-115

8. 1. 8. 2 Indication on the Operation panel The 1st digit from the left indicates “7” which is the Sub Mode number of “Error Mask Mode”. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the present selection of Mask Code. The 5th and 6th digits indicate the status (“-L” or “-H”) of selected mask item. Sub Mode Number of Error Mask Mode Mask Code Status 8. 1. 8. 3 Operation 1. Enter the Service Mode, and indicate the Sub Mode Number “7” on the 1st digit from the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key. Sub Mode Number of Error Mask Mode 2. The 2nd and 3ed digits from the left indicate the Mask Code presently selected. Indicate the necessary Mask Code pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Refer to the list on page 8-114 for Mask Codes and target items. Example : “Cutter Motor Error” is to be masked. Indicate its Mask Code “07”. Mask Code of “Cutter Motor Error”

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-116

3. The 5th and 6th digits indicates “-L” at first. It means the target item of selected Mask Code is not masked presently. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to mask the target item. “-H” is indicated when masked. Even if this error is detected in the later printing, it will be ignored and the printer will continue to print. 4. Error masking can be cancelled by any of the following 3 ways. (1) Indicate “-L” again pressing the [ ENTER ] Key. (2) Cancel the Service Mode. (3) Turn off the machine.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE It is possible to mask some errors simultaneously.

K115sm8e4.doc 8-117

8. 1. 9 Test Print Mode (Sub Mode 8) 8. 1. 8. 1 Function Internal test pattern can be printed out for diagnostic purpose, with changing several settings according to the necessity. Test Print Mode has 9 sub modes.

Sub Mode No. Setting 0 Print Start Mode 1 Print Number Setting Mode 2 Test Pattern Selection Mode 3 Media Source Selection Mode 4 Cut Length Selection Mode 5 Media Type Selection Mode 6 Interval Print Mode 7 Negative Mode 8 Mirror Mode

8. 1. 8. 2 Indication on the Operation panel The 1st digit from the left indicates “8” which is the Sub Mode number of “Test Print Mode”. The 2nd digit indicates any Setting Mode Number (from 0 to 8) presently selected. The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the setting value of the selected Setting Mode. Sub Mode Number of Test Print Mode Setting Mode Number Setting value

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-118

8. 1. 8. 3 Operation 1. Enter the Service Mode, and indicate the Sub Mode Number “8” on the 1st digit from the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key. Sub Mode Number of Test Print Mode 2. The 2nd digit from the left indicates the Setting Mode Number presently selected. Indicate the necessary Setting Mode Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Refer to the following for the setting of each Setting Mode Number. And refer to the “reference page” shown in the list for more description of each setting mode. Example : “Print Number Setting Mode” is to be selected for deciding the number of print. Indicate its Setting Mode Number “1”. Setting Mode Number of “Print Number Setting Mode”

Setting Mode No. Contents of setting Reference page 0 Print Start Mode 8-122 1 Print Number Setting Mode 8-123 2 Test Pattern Selection Mode 8-124 3 Media Source Selection Mode 8-125 4 Cut Length Selection Mode 8-126 5 Media Type Selection Mode (Bypass Feed only) 8-127 6 Interval Print Mode 8-127 7 Negative Mode 8-128 8 Mirror Mode 8-128

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-119

3. Press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value on the 4th, 5th and 6th digits starts flashing and becomes changeable. 4. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Example : Number of print is set to 25 prints.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-120

5. Press the [ ENTER] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value on the 4th, 5th and 6th digits stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE (1) Unless the setting is decided, it is impossible to select other Sub Mode Numbers or other Setting Mode Numbers. Sub Mode No. Setting Mode No. (2) If the [ ONLINE ] Key is pressed before the decision of setting value, the value on changing is cancelled and the previous setting is recovered.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-121

6. Change other setting items in the same way if necessary. When all necessary settings are changed, select the Print Start Mode by indicating the Setting Mode Number “0”. Setting Mode Number of “Print Mode” 7. Confirm that “rdy” is indicated, and press the [ ENTER ] Key to start printing. “Prt” will be indicated when on printing.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to cancel test printing in the middle.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-122

8. 1. 8.4 Description of each Setting Mode (1) Print Start Mode (Setting Mode No.0) This mode starts and stops a Test Print. To start printing, press the [ ENTER ] Key when “rdy” is indicated. To stop (cancel) printing in the middle, press the [ ENTER ] Key again. Print Start Mode informs the status of KIP9000 indicating a Status Code on 4th, 5th and 6th digits. Status

Status Code Meaning rdy Printer is ready for printing.

Er An error occurs.

JA A Jam occurs.

OP Any door is open.

noP Media is not installed on the selected media source.

- - Waiting

Prt During print.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-123

(2) Print Number Setting Mode (Setting Mode No.1) Number of print can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 99. Number of print (Example : 99 sheets)

NOTE Do not select “SP” although it is selectable in Print Number Setting Mode. This is a special mode to print 30,000 prints continuously, which is useful only on testing in manufacturer. SP (Do not select this!)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-124

(3) Test Pattern Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.2) Printed test pattern can be selected. KIP9000 has the following 8 test patterns. Select the necessary patter by indicating its own “pattern number”. Pattern number (Example : Pattern No.3)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Pattern No.1 Pattern No.4 Pattern No.7

Pattern No.2 Pattern No.5 Pattern No.8

Pattern No.3 Pattern No.6

K115sm8e4.doc 8-125

(4) Media Source Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.3) One of 5 media source (roll 1-4 & bypass) can be selected and used for test printing. Select the necessary source indicating its own “media source number”. Media source number (Example : Roll 2)

Media source No. Media source 0 Bypass Feeder 1 Roll Deck 1 2 Roll Deck 2 3 Roll Deck 3 4 Roll Deck 4

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-126

(5) Cut Length Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.4) It is possible to specify the cut length which is applied when printed with a roll media. Cut length (Example : A0) Selectable setting values are as follows. Metric format Inch format

NOTE When “SC” is selected, the operator can send a cutting signal anytime to cut the roll media by requested length. Start printing, and press the [ ENTER ] Key at the time the media should be cut. (If the [ ENTER ] Key is not pressed, media will be cut in 6m long or 24m long depending on the maximum cut length setting.)

Setting value Cut length A0 1189mm A1 841mm A2 594mm A3 420mm A4 297mm A5 210mm b1 1030mm b2 728mm b3 515mm b4 364mm b5 257mm SC As required

Setting value Cut length 48 48” 44 44” 36 36” 34 34” 30 30” 24 24” 22 22” 18 18” 17 17” 12 12” 11 11” 8.5 8.5” SC As required

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-127

(6) Media Type Selection Mode : Bypass Feed only (Setting Mode No.5) When printed with a cut sheet media, the media type can be specified. Media type No. (Example : Plain paper)

Media type No. Media type 0 Plain paper 1 Tracing paper 2 Film

(7) Interval Print Mode (Setting Mode No.6) Interval Print can be activated. Setting value (Example : Interval print is selected.)

Setting value Media source 0 Normal print 1 Interval print

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

When multiple number of test printing is performed when in the Interval Mode, printer stops completely and goes into ready state whenever after ejecting one print, and then start printing the next sheet.

Reference

K115sm8e4.doc 8-128

(8) Negative Mode (Setting Mode No.7) Selected test pattern is printed by negative image. Setting value (Example : Negative image is selected.)

Setting value Media source 0 Normal image 1 Negative image

(9) Mirror Mode (Setting Mode No.8) Selected test pattern is printed by mirror image. Setting value (Example : Mirror image is selected.)

Setting value Media source 0 Normal image 1 Mirror image

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-129

8. 1.10 Special Operation Mode (Sub Mode 9) 8. 1.10. 1 Function Special Operation Mode offers the following items; Refer to [8.1.10.3 Operation/description of each item] on and after the page 8-131.

Item No.

Setting item Permission for the operation

Refer to page ;

00 Image Corona Wire Cleaning Mode 8-132 01 Cutter Cleaning Mode 8-133 02 LED Head Cleaning Mode 8-134 03 Image Corona Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-135 04 Pre-Transfer LED Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-136 05 Transfer Corona Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-137 06 Separation Corona Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-138 07 Positive Developer Bias Adjustment Mode

(Toner Collection Process) Do not operate 8-139

08 Negative Developer Bias Adjustment Mode (Print Process)

Do not operate 8-140

09 Toner Supplying Mode 8-141 0A Surface Potential Control Mode : Manual execution of

control 8-142

0b Density Lock Mode : Setting of Target Density 8-143 0C Density Control Mode : Manual execution of control 8-144

NOTE Adjustment modes (Item No. from 03 to 08) are for manufacturer’s use to make a final machine inspection right before shipment. It is not recommended for the service side to make operation in these modes.

K115sm8e4.doc 8-130

8. 1.10. 2 Indication of the Operation Panel The 1st digit from the left indicates “9” which is the Sub Mode number of “Special Operation Mode”. The 2nd and 3rd digit indicates any Item Number presently selected. The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate either status or setting value. Sub Mode Number of Special Operation Mode Item Number Status or setting value

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-131

8. 1.10. 3 Operation and explanation for each item (1) How to select each item 1. Enter the Service Mode, and indicate the Sub Mode Number “9” on the 1st digit from the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key. Sub Mode Number of Special Operation Mode 2. The 2nd digit from the left indicates the Item Number presently selected. Indicate the necessary Item Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Example : “LED Head Cleaning Mode” is to be selected. Indicate its Item Number “02”. Item Number of “LED Head Cleaning Mode”

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-132

(2) Image Corona Wire Cleaning Mode (Item No.0) Cleaning for the Image Corona Wire can be performed by operating its cleaning mechanism. 1. Indicate the Item Number “00” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start cleaning. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during cleaning. “8 8” flashes during cleaning. 2. When cleaning is finished, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE It is unable to start cleaning even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing on the 5th and 6th digits.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-133

(3) Cutter Cleaning Mode (Item No.1) Cleaning for the Cutter Blade can be performed by operating its cleaning mechanism. 1. Indicate the Item Number “01” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start cleaning. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during cleaning. “8 8” flashes during cleaning. 2. When cleaning is finished, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm8e4.doc 8-134

(4) LED Head Cleaning Mode (Item No.2) Cleaning for the LED Head can be performed by operating its cleaning mechanism. 1. Indicate the Item Number “02” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start cleaning. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during cleaning. “8 8” flashes during cleaning. 2. When cleaning is finished, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm8e4.doc 8-135

(5) Image Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.3) When this mode is executed;

• Drum rotates in a 330 degrees arc. • Image Corona takes discharging when Drum is rotating.

1. Indicate the Item Number “03” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start the operation. Drum rotates and Image Corona takes discharging, and the 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing. “8 8” flashes during the operation. 2. When the operation is finished, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE It is unable to start the operation even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing on the 5th and 6th digits.

K115sm8e4.doc 8-136

(6) Pre-Transfer LED Adjustment Mode (Item No.4) When this mode is executed;

• Drum rotates in a 330 degrees arc. • Pre-transfer LED lights when Drum is rotating.


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm8e4.doc 8-137

(7) Transfer Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.5) When this mode is executed;

• Drum rotates in a 330 degrees arc. • Transfer Corona takes discharging when Drum is rotating.


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm8e4.doc 8-138

(8) Separation Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.6) When this mode is executed;

• Drum rotates in a 330 degrees arc. • Separation Corona takes discharging when Drum is rotating.


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


K115sm8e4.doc 8-139

(9) Developer Bias (Positive) Adjustment Mode (Toner Collection Process) (Item No.7) Positive Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller. 1. Indicate the Item Number “07” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start outputting the positive Bias. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing when bias is being outputted. “8 8” flashes during output. 2. Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to stop outputting. “- -” lights on the 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE Make sure to stop outputting manually pressing the [ ENTER ] key as it does not stop automatically.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE It is unable to start outputting the bias even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing on the 5th and 6th digits.

K115sm8e4.doc 8-140

(10) Developer Bias (Negative) Adjustment Mode (Print Process) (Item No.8) Negative Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller. 1. Indicate the Item Number “08” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start outputting the negative Bias. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing when bias is being outputted. “8 8” flashes during output. 2. Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to stop outputting. “- -” lights on the 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE It is unable to start outputting the bias even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing on the 5th and 6th digits.

NOTE Make sure to stop outputting manually pressing the [ ENTER ] key as it does not stop automatically.

K115sm8e4.doc 8-141

(11) Toner Supplying Mode (Item No.9) Toner Supplying Mode is a kind of setup mode used during machine installation or developer maintenance. When it is executed, necessary amount of toner can be supplied from Hopper to Developer automatically. 1. Indicate the Item Number “09” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start supplying the toner. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during toner supply. “8 8” flashes during toner supply. 2. When the printer detects “toner full”, it stops toner supplying automatically. “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE It is unable to start supplying the toner even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing on the 5th and 6th digits.

K115sm8e4.doc 8-142

(12) Surface Potential Control Mode : Manual execution of control (Sub Mode A) It is possible to execute Surface Potential Control manually. 1. Indicate the Item Number “0A” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start Surface Potential Control. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during toner supply. “8 8” flashes during Surface Potential Control. 2. When the printer finishes Surface potential Control, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-143

(13) Density Lock Mode : Setting of Target Density (0b) It is possible to set new Target Density and make the KIP9000 memorize it. 1. Indicate the Item Number “0b” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start Density Lock operation. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during toner supply. “8 8” flashes during Surface Potential Control. 2. When the printer finishes Density Lock operation, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again. The Target Density is automatically refreshed.

NOTE Normally it is unnecessary to set new Target Density as it has been already adjusted properly in the factory. It is not recommended to use this mode in the field except for some special case.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-144

(14) Density Control Mode : Manual execution of control (0C) It is possible to execute Density Control manually. 1. Indicate the Item Number “0C” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start Density Control. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during toner supply. “8 8” flashes during Surface Potential Control. 2. When the printer finishes Surface potential Control, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-145

8. 1.11 Special Setting Mode (Sub Mode A) 8. 1.11. 1 Function Special Operation Mode offers the following items; Refer to [8.1.11.3 Operation/description of each item] on and after the page 8-146.

Item No.

Setting item Permission for the operation

Refer to page ;

0 Backup Data Clearing Mode Do not operate 8-146 1 Software Counter A Setting Mode (Lower 4 digits) 8-148 2 Software Counter A Setting Mode (Upper 3 digits) 8-148 3 Software Counter B Setting Mode (Lower 4 digits) 8-148 4 Software Counter B Setting Mode (Upper 3 digits) 8-148 5 Print interval for continuous long printing 8-150 6 Key Card Setting Mode 8-152 7 Folder Setting Mode 8-154

8. 1.11. 2 Indication of the Operation Panel The 1st digit from the left indicates “A” which is the Sub Mode number of “Special Setting Mode”. The 2nd digit indicates any Item Number presently selected. The 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate either status or setting value. Sub Mode Number of Special Operation Mode Item Number Status or setting value

CAUTION Do not make any operation in the Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.0)! Careless operation in this mode may result in losing all fundamental setting values individually set on each machine!

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-146

8. 1.11. 3 Operation and explanation for each item (1) Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.A) All Backup Data values are cleared and go back to the factory defaults. 1. After indicating the Item Number “0” on the 2nd digit, press and hold both [ ENTER ] and [ MENU ], and also press and hold the [ ONLINE ] Key. “CL” flashes on the 5th and 6th digits. “CL” flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

CAUTION Do not make any operation in the Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.A)! Careless operation in this mode may result in losing all fundamental setting values individually set on each machine!

K115sm8e4.doc 8-147

2. Keep your hand from all keys when “CL” is flashing. (“CL” keeps on flashing.) 3. Press the [ ENTER ] key. All backup Data are initialized and the printer is turned off automatically.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-148

(2) Software Counter Setting Modes (Item No. from 1 to4E) The counted values on 2 software counters A and B can be changed on items b to E. The counted value of each counter consists of 7 digits, and it is divided into 2 groups as upper 3 digits and lower 4 digits.

Item No. Contents of setting 1 Lower 4 digits of Software Counter A 2 Upper 3 digits of Software Counter A 3 Lower 4 digits of Software Counter B 4 Upper 3 digits of Software Counter B

Example) Present count of the Software Counter A is 0001234, and it is to be corrected to 0001250. This can be corrected in item No.1. 1. After indicating the Item Number “1” on the 2nd digit, press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value on the 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-149

2. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). 3. Decide the setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-150

(3) Print interval for continuous long printing (Item No.5) It is possible to keep a longer interval time between prints in continuous multiple number of long printing (longer then 2 meters). The interval time between prints will become about 10 seconds longer than usual when set to “1”.

Setting value Contents 0 Interval time is normal. 1 Longer interval (10 seconds longer than usual) is kept between prints in the

continuous multiple number of long printing. 1. After indicating the Item Number “5” on the 2nd digit, press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value on the 6th digit flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes. 2. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-151

3. Decide the setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-152

(4) Key Card Setting Mode (Item No.6) If a Key Card is connected to KIP9000, it is possible to make the printer recognize its existence, and it is also possible to decide the counting unit.

Setting value Contents 0 Key Card is not connected. 1 Key Card is connected, and it counts the print length by every 1m for each

paper width separately. 2 Key Card is connected, and it counts the print length by every 0.1m for each

paper width separately. 3 Key Card is connected, and it counts the number of prints for each standard

size separately. 1. After indicating the Item Number “6” on the 2nd digit, press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value on the 6th digit flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes. 2. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-153

3. Decide the setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e4.doc 8-154

(5) Folder Selection Mode (Item No.7) (USE IPS ONLY) If any folder is connected to KIP9000, it is possible to make the printer recognize what kind of Folder is connected.

Setting value Contents 0 Folder is not connected. 1 Bay folder is connected. 2 ESTE folder is connected. 3 Reserved (Same with “Folder is not connected.”) 4 Reserved (Same with “Folder is not connected.”)

1. After indicating the Item Number “7” on the 2nd digit, press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value on the 6th digit flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE If Bay folder is connected, the following settings are available in User Modes F0 to Fb.

• Fold type • Width of fan folding • Margin

Refer to [8.2.15 User Mode F0 to Fb (Fold settings for Bay Folder)] on and after page 8-205 for the details.

K115sm8e4.doc 8-155

2. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). 3. Decide the setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-156

8. 2 User Modes KIP 9000 provides 14 User Modes.

Name of User Mode

Description User Mode Code

User Mode 1 Test print U1. User Mode 2 Calendar setting U2. User Mode 3 Warm Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting U3. User Mode 4 Cold Sleep Mode timer setting U4. User Mode 5 Automatic paper cut at power on U5. User Mode 6 Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film] U6. User Mode 7 Alarm ON / OFF U7. User Mode 8 Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Plain paper] U8. User Mode 9 Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Tracing paper] U9. User Mode A Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Film] UA. User Mode B Selection of Image Enhancement Mode Ub. User Mode C Enlargement of printable area UC. User Mode D Temporal clearance of E-26 error Ud. User Mode E Temporal clearance of E-28 error UE.

The following optional User Modes (F0 to Fb) are normally not accessible, but become accessible only when the Service Mode 9-H (Folder Selection Mode) is set to “1” (Bay folder). (These modes can specify several folding settings applied when Bay Folder is connected)

Name of User Mode

Setting matter User Mode Code

User Mode F0 Fold type F0 User Mode F1 Width of fan folding F1 User Mode F2 Margin

Applied to folding method 1

F2 User Mode F3 Fold type F3 User Mode F4 Width of fan folding F4 User Mode F5 Margin


F5 User Mode F6 Fold type F6 User Mode F7 Width of fan folding F7 User Mode F8 Margin


F8 User Mode F9 Fold type F9 User Mode FA Width of fan folding FA User Mode Fb Margin


Fb

K115sm8e5.doc 8-157

8. 2. 1 User Mode 1 (Test Print) [Function] An internal test pattern can be printed out for checking the image.

• Printing media is selected automatically. • Cut length obeys the service mode setting. (Refer to [(9) Cut length of user Test Print

(No.08)] on the page 8-50.) [Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key once to select the User Mode 1. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U1.” 2. The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicates the status of KIP 9000. - - - (flashing) : Test print is not available. ooo (lighting) : Test print is available. ooo (flashing) : On test printing Status of KIP 9000

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] once.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-158

3. Press the [ ENTER ] Key when “ooo” is lighting. Test print is started and “ooo” flashes. 4. When test print is finished, “ooo” stops flashing and lights. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 1.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-159

8. 2. 2 User Mode 2 (Calendar setting) [Function] Calender setting can be corrected if wrong. (KIP9000 memorizes calendar information on its circuit.) [Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key twice to select the User Mode 2. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U2.”. 2. The User Mode 2 has 8 sub modes which can be orderly selected by pressing [ ] and [ ] Keys. 2 of them are “Confirmation Modes”, and the rest of 6 are “Correction Modes”.

Order of selection Name of Sub Mode Example of indication 1 Confirmation Mode – Date 0 2 0 5 3 1 2 Confirmation Mode – Time 1 2.0 0.3 0 3 Correction Mode – Year C 1 0 2 4 Correction Mode – Month C 2 0 5 5 Correction Mode – Day C 3 3 1 6 Correction Mode – Hour C 4 1 2 7 Correction Mode – Minute C 5 0 0 8 Correction Mode – Second C 6 3 0

NOTE (1) KIP9000 can operate without problem even if the calendar setting is wrong. (2) The calendar setting is used for diagnostics purpose. If some error or mis-feed occurs, KIP9000 records it with the information “when” it occurred based on the calendar setting set in User Mode 2. As such record is very useful for the service personnel to diagnose the trouble, please set the calendar occasionally to the correct date and time.

Press [ MENU ] twice.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-160

3. Select the “Confirmation Mode – Date” first pressing the [ ] Key, and confirm the current setting for year, month and date. Example : May 31, 2002 Year Month Day 4. Select the “Confirmation Mode – Time” next pressing the [ ] Key, and confirm the current setting for hour, minute and second. Example : 12 : 00 : 30 Hour Minute Second

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-161

5. If some item needs to be corrected, select its correction mode pressing [ ] and [ ] Keys. 6 Correction Modes are shown by Correction Mode Code as C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 and C6, and necessary correction mode can be selected by indicating its code.

Correction Mode Codes Description C1 Correction Mode – Year C2 Correction Mode – Month C3 Correction Mode – Day C4 Correction Mode – Hour C5 Correction Mode – Minute C6 Correction Mode – Second

Example : “C5” is selected as “Minute” is to be corrected. Correction Mode Code for Correction Mode - Minute 6. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value on 5th and 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-162

7. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Example : Minute is to be corrected from 00 to 05. 8. Decide the new setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value stops flashing. 9. Correct other setting items in the same way if necessary.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-163

10. When all necessary items are corrected, press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 2.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-164

8. 2. 3 User Mode 3 (Warm Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting) [Function] It is possible to select whether or not the Warm Sleep Mode works. The timer for Warm Sleep can be specified as well. If the KIP 9000 does not receive any print/copy for the time set as timer in User Mode 3, it will go into the Warm Sleep Mode to save the power consumption. [Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 3 times to select the User Mode 3. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U3.”.

Warm Sleep Mode is a kind of power saving mode. It works when the KIP9000 does not print for the time the timer specifies. Power consumption is reduced by maintaining the temperature of fuser at a lower degree than usual stand by state. Warm Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically when a print job or a copy job is sent from the outer device. However it may take time until the KIP9000 starts printing as it needs to recover enough temperature on the fuser. (Print does not start until the KIP9000 gets ready recovering enough temperature.)

Reference

Press [ MENU ] 3 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-165

2. The Status Display indicates either “OFF” or “On” according to the current setting. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value (OFF/On) flashes and becomes changeable. “OFF” (or “On”) flashes. 3. Select either “OFF” or “On” pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key..

Setting value Description 0 Warm Sleep Mode works when a decided time has passed.

(Timer can be set in the later procedure.) 1 Warm Sleep Mode does not work.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-166

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting.

• If “On“ is decided, the Status Display indicates the setting value of Warm Sleep timer in flashing. Go to the following procedure 5 for setting the timer.

• If “OFF” is decided, go to the procedure 7 as it is unnecessary to set Warm Sleep timer. Setting value (timer) flashes. 5. Indicate the necessary Warm Sleep timer value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Setting unit is “minute”, and the selectable values are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90, 120, 180 and 240.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-167

6. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the timer value. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value (timer) stops flashing. 7. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 3.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-168

8. 2. 4 User Mode 4 (Cold Sleep Mode timer setting) [Function] It is possible to set the Cold Sleep timer. If the KIP 9000 does not receive any print/copy for the time set as timer in User Mode 4, it will go into the Cold Sleep Mode to save the power consumption. [Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 4 times to select the User Mode 4. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U4.”.

NOTE If the Cold Sleep does not start even if the time specified in User Mode 4 has passed, the Cold Sleep Mode may be set to OFF. If there is a dot beside the timer value, the Cold Sleep Mode is set to OFF (inactive). To set the Cold Sleep to ON, see [(11) Cold Sleep ON/OFF (No.0C)] on page 8-57. Dot (Cold Sleep is OFF)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Cold Sleep Mode is a kind of power saving mode that can save more power than Warm Sleep Mode. It works when the KIP9000 does not print for the time the timer specifies. Power consumption is reduced greatly by completely shutting off supplying the power to the fuser unit. The Cold Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically when a print job or a copy job is sent from the outer device. However it may take time until the KIP9000 starts printing as it needs to recover enough temperature on the fuser. (Print does not start until the KIP9000 gets ready recovering enough temperature.) Note that the Cold Sleep Mode will require longer recovering time than Warm Sleep.

Reference


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-169

2. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The timer value for Cold Sleep flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value (timer) flashes. 3. Indicate the necessary Cold Sleep timer value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Setting unit is “minute”, and the selectable values are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90, 120, 180 and 240.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-170

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the timer value. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value (timer) stops flashing. 5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 4.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-171

8. 2. 5 User Mode 5 (Automatic paper cut at power ON) [Function] It is possible to make Initial Cut for all of 4 roll media whenever KIP9000 is turned on. [Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 5 times to select the User Mode 5. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U5.”. 2. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes.

Initial Cut is a function to cut off the leading part of roll media in 240mm long.

Reference

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-172

3. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

Setting value Description 0 KIP 9000 takes Initial Cut for all roll media at turning ON. 1 KIP 9000 does not take Initial Cut at turning ON.

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value stops flashing.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-173

5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 5.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-174

8. 2. 6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film]) [Function] It is possible to turn on the Transfer Support LED for getting a clearer and darker image when printed with a unsupported printing media. (Transfer Support LED is also called “Separation Lamp” that is below the Separation Corona.) [Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 6 times to select the User Mode 6. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U6.”.

NOTE (1) The printed image may look not clear or not enough dark when printed with some king of unsupported type of printing media. In such case the print image may possibly become clearer and darker if the Transfer Support LED is turned on in the User Mode 6. (However note that the Transfer Support LED is not always the complete solution for such case.) (2) The service personnel can decide to which media type the Transfer Support LED should work. See the following each page.

• [(17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (No.17)] on page 8-60 • [(18) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (No.18)] on page 8-61 • [(36) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (No.C6)] on page 8-76

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-175

2. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes. 3. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

Setting value Description 0 Transfer Support LED does not work. 1 Transfer Support LED works when printed with film.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e5.doc 8-176

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value stops flashing. 5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 6.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-177

8. 2. 7 User Mode 7 (Alarm ON / OFF) [Function] When alarm is set to ON, the following status can be noticed by the sound of alarm. (1) Toner empty (2) Toner near empty (3) Roll empty [Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 7 times to select the User Mode 7. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U7.”.

Alarm will continue to sound if unless either of the following operations is done. 1. Remove the cause of error. (Replace the Toner Cartridge or install a new roll media.) 2. Or press the [ ] Key to stop the alarm without removing the cause of error.

Reference

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-178


Setting value Description 0 Alarm does not sound. 1 Alarm sounds if “toner empty”, “toner near empty” or “roll empty” occurs.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-179

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value stops flashing. 5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 7.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-180

8. 2. 8 User Mode 8 (Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Plain paper]) [Function] The operation mode of KIP9000 can be set to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode] according to the situation. This setting become effective when printed with a plain paper.

• When the User Mode 8 is set to [Standard Print Mode], the “Standard Setting Value” of all dual value items controls the total print operations of KIP9000.

• When the User Mode 8 is set to [Special Print Mode], the “Special Setting Value” of all dual value items controls the total print operations of KIP9000.

Some setting items of Adjustment Modes 0/1 of Service Mode are available to have dual setting values as “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. (Such items are called “dual value items”)

• “Standard Setting Value” is (in many cases) the factory default setting that is suitable to produce a satisfactory image in a recommended usage condition.

• “Special Setting Value” is a kind of custom setting that is required to produce a satisfactory image in some special usage condition.

The user sets the User Mode 8 to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode] considering the situation, like he/she sets it to [Standard Print Mode] when in the recommended condition and sets it to [Special Print Mode] when in the special condition. When set to [Standard Print Mode] for example, the “Standard Setting Values” of all dual value items become effective and the KIP9000 operates according to those settings. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on the page 8-51 for more description of “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”.

Reference

NOTE User Modes 8, 9 and A are the selection mode of [Standard Print Mode] and [Special Print Mode]. They are concerned with their own target media type respectively as follows. User Mode 8 : Concerned with the plain paper User Mode 9 : Concerned with the tracing paper User Mode A : Concerned with the film

K115sm8e6.doc 8-181

[Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 8 times to select the User Mode 8. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U8.”. 2. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-182


Setting value Description 0 Standard Print Mode is applied in printing. (When plain paper is used.) 1 Special Print Mode is applied in printing. (When plain paper is used.)


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-183


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-184

8. 2. 9 User Mode 9 (Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Tracing paper]) [Function] The operation mode of KIP9000 can be set to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode] according to the situation. This setting become effective when printed with a tracing paper.

• When the User Mode 9 is set to [Standard Print Mode], the “Standard Setting Value” of all dual value items controls the total print operations of KIP9000.

• When the User Mode 9 is set to [Special Print Mode], the “Special Setting Value” of all dual value items controls the total print operations of KIP9000.




The user sets the User Mode 9 to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode] considering the situation, like he/she sets it to [Standard Print Mode] when in the recommended condition and sets it to [Special Print Mode] when in the special condition. When set to [Standard Print Mode] for example, the “Standard Setting Values” of all dual value items become effective and the KIP9000 operates according to those settings. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on the page 8-51 for more description of “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”.

Reference


K115sm8e6.doc 8-185

[Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 9 times to select the User Mode 9. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U9.”. 2. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-186


Setting value Description 0 Standard Print Mode is applied in printing. (When tracing paper is used.) 1 Special Print Mode is applied in printing. (When tracing paper is used.)


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-187


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-188

8. 2.10 User Mode A (Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Film]) [Function] The operation mode of KIP9000 can be set to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode] according to the situation. This setting become effective when printed with a film.

• When the User Mode A is set to [Standard Print Mode], the “Standard Setting Value” of all dual value items controls the total print operations of KIP9000.

• When the User Mode A is set to [Special Print Mode], the “Special Setting Value” of all dual value items controls the total print operations of KIP9000.




The user sets the User Mode A to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode] considering the situation, like he/she sets it to [Standard Print Mode] when in the recommended condition and sets it to [Special Print Mode] when in the special condition. When set to [Standard Print Mode] for example, the “Standard Setting Values” of all dual value items become effective and the KIP9000 operates according to those settings. Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on the page 8-51 for more description of “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”.

Reference


K115sm8e6.doc 8-189

[Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 10 times to select the User Mode A. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “UA.”. 2. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-190


Setting value Description 0 Standard Print Mode is applied in printing. (When film is used.) 1 Special Print Mode is applied in printing. (When film is used.)


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-191

5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode A.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-192

8. 2.11 User Mode B (Selection of Image Enhancement Mode) [Function] The printed image can be enhanced most appropriately by selecting proper Image Enhancement Mode. KIP9000 has 4 Image Enhancement Modes. Printed image is more enhanced (become darker) when selecting a larger level. Try to select a larger level if the image looks weak.

Setting value

Image Enhancement Mode

Description

0 Mode 0 (OFF) Image is not enhanced (Image Enhancement is not performed)

1 Mode 1 Image is enhanced normally. 2 Mode 2 Image is more enhanced (becomes darker) than Mode 1. 3 Mode 3 Image is most enhanced. (become darkest)

[Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 11 times to select the User Mode B. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “Ub.”.

NOTE The selection of Image Enhancement Mode can be done on the Service Mode (4-C7) also. Refer to [(37) Image Enhancement Mode Selection (No.C7)] on page 8-77. As neither Service Mode nor User Mode has the priority for the setting, the setting specified on either mode at the last occasion become effective.

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-193


Setting value

Image Enhancement Mode

Description

0 Mode 0 (OFF) Image is not enhanced (Image Enhancement is not performed)

1 Mode 1 Image is enhanced normally. 2 Mode 2 Image is more enhanced (becomes darker) than Mode 1. 3 Mode 3 Image is most enhanced. (become darkest)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-194

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value stops flashing. 5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode B.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-195

8. 2.12 User Mode C (Print on TE margin area) [Function] User Mode C allows to print the image in the TE margin area (no TE margin is provided). Normal Image area is enlarged (TE margin is provided.) (No TE margin is provided.) The following 3 settings are selectable.

Setting value

Selected setting Description

0 Normal setting Does not allow for printing on TE margin area. (Default) 1 TE Margin Print Mode 1 Allows for printing on TE margin area. A longer interval

is kept between prints for cleaning. 2 TE Margin Print Mode 2 Allows for printing on TE margin area. Normal interval is

kept between prints.

NOTE When a continuous printing “without TE margin” is performed, sometimes the image on the former print may be very weakly printed on the next print as “ghost image”.

• The Margin Print mode 1 has a special cleaning process between prints to get rid of this ghost image. Therefore the interval between prints becomes longer than usual so the print productivity is reduced, but a better image quality can be expected. (Recommended setting)

• The Margin Print Mode 2 does not have the cleaning process. Therefore the print

productivity is the same as usual, but the prints may have ghost image. (Not recommended setting)

K115sm8e6.doc 8-196

[Operation] 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 12 times to select the User Mode C. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “UC.”. 2. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-197


Setting value

Selected setting Description

0 Normal setting Does not allow for printing on TE margin area. (Default) 1 TE Margin Print Mode 1 Allows for printing on TE margin area. A longer interval

is kept between prints for cleaning. 2 TE Margin Print Mode 2 Allows for printing on TE margin area. Normal interval is

kept between prints. 4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value stops flashing.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-198

5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode C.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-199

8. 2.13 User Mode D (Auto SP Control ON/OFF : Temporary clearance of E-26 error) [Function] Auto SP Control can be set to ON or OFF. When it is set to OFF, service call errors E-26 might be temporarily cleared for avoiding the breakdown of KIP9000. 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 13 times to select the User Mode D. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “Ud.”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

The image quality varies according to the variation of temperature of surrounding environment. To achieve a constant image quality in any environment, KIP9000 flexibly adjusts the Developer Bias to the most appropriate level monitoring the variation of actual density with the Density Sensor. And accompanying to the variation of Developer Bias, the surface potential of Drum is also adjusted flexibly to have a proper voltage gap against Developer Bias. This control for the surface potential is called Auto SP Control. If the Auto SP Control can not work correctly for some reason, a service call error E-26 is indicated and no more print becomes available. As the user can not clear this error, KIP9000 will continue to be in breakdown until the error is cleared by the service personnel. But if the error can be temporarily cleared in the User Mode E by easing the error check level, KIP9000 will be relieved from breakdown and you will be able to continue printing. When you will clear the error by the User Mode E, note that;

• Image quality may not be satisfactory as the real time adjustment does not work. • There may be some case that the error can not be cleared even if you ease the error

check level. • The User Mode E does not remove the real cause of error. Therefore the service

personnel need to go customer site immediately for removing the real cause of error.

Reference

K115sm8e6.doc 8-200


Setting value Description 0 KIP9000 does not make error checking for E-26. (OFF) 1 KIP9000 makes error checking for E-26. (ON)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-201

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value stops flashing. 5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode D.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-202

8. 2.14 User Mode E (Auto Density Control ON/OFF : Temporary clearance of E-26 error) Auto Density Control can be set to ON or OFF. When it is set to OFF, service call errors E-28 might be temporarily cleared for avoiding the breakdown of KIP9000. 1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 14 times to select the User Mode E. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “UE.”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE


MENU ENTER ONLINE

The image quality varies according to the variation of temperature of surrounding environment. To achieve a constant image quality in any environment, KIP9000 flexibly adjusts the Developer Bias to the most appropriate level monitoring the variation of actual density with the Density Sensor. This is called Auto Density Control. If the Auto Density Control can not work correctly for some reason, a service call error E-28 is indicated and no more print becomes available. As the user can not clear this error, KIP9000 will continue to be in breakdown until the error is cleared by the service personnel. But if the error can be temporarily cleared in the User Mode E by easing the error check level, KIP9000 will be relieved from breakdown and you will be able to continue printing. When you will clear the error by the User Mode E, note that;

• Image quality may not be satisfactory as the real time adjustment does not work. • There may be some case that the error can not be cleared even if you ease the error

check level. • The User Mode E does not remove the real cause of error. Therefore the service

personnel need to go customer site immediately for removing the real cause of error.

Reference

K115sm8e6.doc 8-203


Setting value Description 0 KIP9000 does not make error checking for E-28. (OFF) 1 KIP9000 makes error checking for E-28 with normal check level. (ON1) 2 KIP9000 makes error checking for E-28 with strict check level. (ON2)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-204

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value stops flashing when decided. Setting value stops flashing. 5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode D.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-205

8. 2.15 User Mode F0 to Fb (Fold settings for Bay Folder) [Function] KIP9000 provides 4 kinds of folding method when it is works together with Bay Folder. The User Modes F0 to Fb are available to make customization on each of these folding methods by specifying “fold type”, “width of fan fold” and “margin” respectively. (1) Fold type The following 3 types are selectable.

Setting value

Fold type

00 Not folded

01 Fan folding

02 Fan folding & cross folding

(2) Width of fan fold The width of fan fold can be increased or decreased ranging from 180 to 210mm (from 7.1” to 9.0”) in 1mm increment (0.1” increment).

K115sm8e6.doc 8-206

(3) Margin Additional margin can be provided to the “last” fan fold, and its length can be increased or decreased ranging from 0 to 30mm (from 0.0” to 1.2”) in 1mm (0.1”) increment. 12 User Modes from F0 to Fb have their own target setting as follows.

User Mode Target setting Target folding method F0 Fold type F1 Width of fan fold F2 Margin

Folding method 1

F3 Fold type F4 Width of fan fold F5 Margin

Folding method 2


Folding method 3

F9 Fold type FA Width of fan fold Fb Margin

Folding method 4

K115sm8e6.doc 8-207

[Operation] 1. Indicate the code of necessary User Modes (F0 to Fb) pressing the [ MENU ] Key when the KIP9000 is in normal condition.

User Mode Code Target setting Target folding method F0 Fold type F1 Width of fan fold F2 Margin

Folding method 1


Folding method 2


Folding method 3

F9 Fold type FA Width of fan fold Fb Margin

Folding method 4

[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “FX.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the left.

Press [ MENU ] necessary times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-208

2. The Status Display indicates any setting value on its right half according to the selected User Mode. Press the [ MENU ] Key, and the setting value flashes and becomes changeable. Setting value flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-209

3. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Selectable setting values depend on the selected User Mode. (a) Fold type : Select any of “00”, “01” and “02”.

Setting value

Fold type

00 Not folded

01 Fan fold

02 Fan fold & cross fold

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-210

(b) Width of fan fold : Change the value within the following adjustable range. (c) Margin : Change the value within the following adjustable range.

Unit Adjustable range Setting unit Metric 180 to 210mm 1mm Inch 7.1” to 9.0” 0.1”

Unit Adjustable range Setting unit Metric 00 to 30mm 1mm Inch 0.0” to 1.2” 0.1”

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e6.doc 8-211

4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the selected setting value. It stops flashing when decided. Setting value stops flashing. 5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode.

The followings are the default on each folding method.

Reference

Folding method Fold type Width of fan folding margin Folding method 1 02 (fan fold & cross fold) 190mm 8.5” 0mm 0.8” Folding method 2 02 (fan fold & cross fold) 210mm 8.5” 20mm 0.0” Folding method 3 02 (fan fold & cross fold) 210mm 9.0” 0mm 0.0” Folding method 4 02 (fan fold & cross fold) 210mm 7.5” 0mm 0.0”

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

K115sm8e7.doc 8-212

8. 3 KIP Diagnostics (Program used on field service) KIP Diagnostics is an exclusive program used on the field service of KIP models including KIP9000.

8. 3. 1 Having a communication between KIP Diagnostics on service laptop (PC) and KIP9000 1. Copy the necessary programs of KIP Diagnostics onto anywhere in the service laptop (PC).

NOTE Make sure to put 3 programs [KIPDiag.exe], [KipDiag.chm] and [KipDiag_JP.chm] in the same folder.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-213

2. Confirm both service laptop (PC) and KIP9000 are turned off. Connect the COM1 port of laptop and the DIAG. Port of KIP9000 with the RS232C cross cable. Use the following type of RS232C cable. Printer PC (D-Sub 9 pins female type) (D-Sub 9 pins female type) 2 RxD 2 RxD 3 TxD 3 TxD 5 SG 5 SG

Diag Port

NOTE

K115sm8e7.doc 8-214

3. Turn on both laptop and KIP9000. 4. Run [KIPDiag.exe]. The main screen of KIP Diagnostics is indicated without indicating any information.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-215

5. Select [Serial Port] under [Setting]. 6. Set the setting items in [Serial Port Dialog] to the values shown in the right picture, and click on [OK]. Set to these values

K115sm8e7.doc 8-216

5. KIP Diagnostics starts a communication with the printer. The information sent from the printer is indicated.

NOTE If the communication is shut off for some reason, recover it by [Initialize] under [Setting].

K115sm8e7.doc 8-217

8. 3. 2 Outline of Tabs on KIP Diagnostics KIP Diagnostics has 6 Tabs that cover almost all main functions of KIP Diagnostics. Basic Screen Tab Indicates the basic information of KIP9000 such as ROM version,

counter value and etc. Display Tab Indicates kinds of signal status (input/output) and input data. (Display Tab covers the functions of “Input/Output Checking Mode” and “Data Monitoring Mode” of Service Mode.) Setting Tab Available to change kinds of printer parameters. Also available to

upload and download the backup RAM file. (Setting Tab covers the functions of Adjustment Mode 0/1 of

Service Mode.) History Tab Indicates recent errors and jams with such information as error/jam

code, date/time, and counter value. Upload ROM Data Tab Uploads the firmware data (ROM file) to KIP9000. Test Print Tab Prints out the internal test printing. (Test Print Tab covers the Test Print Mode of Service Mode.)

K115sm8e7.doc 8-218

8. 3. 3 Description of each Tab 8. 3. 3. 1 Basic Information Tab Basic Screen Tab indicates the basic information of KIP9000 such as ROM version, counter value and etc.

ROM Version Version of current KIP9000 firmware I/F Version Version of the Interface 8 Max Length Maximum print length Architecture Selected print format (metric or inch)

Machine Information

Print Speed Print speed of KIP9000 Total Counter Total length of print is indicated. (Counting unit is always “linear

meter”.) Counter A Count value of Counter A.

Counter

Counter B Count value of Counter B. Status Status of KIP9000 is indicated precisely. Toner Volume Remaining level of toner in Toner Cartridge Option Connected optional device is shown (if connected). Condition Status of KIP9000 is shown. Deck / Manual Feed The following media information on each media source is

indicated. - Media width - Media type - Remaining level Presently selected media source is shown by [>>].

K115sm8e7.doc 8-219

8. 3. 3. 2 Display Tab Display Tab Indicates kinds of signal status (input/output) and input data. (Display Tab covers the functions of “Input/Output Checking Mode” and “Data Monitoring Mode” of Service Mode.) (1) (2) (3) (1) [Number] column indicates the 4 digits codes. The left 2 of each 4 digits code are either “10xx” or “20xx”.

• “10xx” are the items that belong to the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. “10” stands for the Mode Number of Input/Output Checking Mode, and “xx” stands for the Signal Code.

• “20xx” are the items that belong to the Data Monitoring Mode of Service Mode. “20” stands for the Mode Number of Data Monitoring Mode, and “xx” stands for the Data Number.

(Examples) 1 0 1 5 2 0 0 A Signal Code Data Number Mode No. of Input / Output Mode No. of Data Checking Mode Monitoring Mode (2) [Name] column indicates either Signal Name (Input/Output Checking Mode) or the contents of data (Data Monitoring Mode). (3) [Data] column indicates the status of signal (Input / Output Checking Mode) or the input data (Data Monitoring Mode).

K115sm8e7.doc 8-220

NOTE Display Tab covers the functions of Input/Output Checking Mode and Data Monitoring Mode of Service Mode. See the following pages for the descriptions of those modes.. [8.1.2 Input / Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode 1)] on and after the page 8-10 [8.1.3 Data Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2)] on and after the page 8-20

K115sm8e7.doc 8-221

8. 3. 3. 3 Setting Tab It is possible to change many kinds of printer parameters, and also possible to upload and download the backup RAM file. (Setting Tab covers the functions of Adjustment Mode 0/1 of Service Mode.) (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) [Number] column indicates the 4 digits codes. The left 2 of each 4 digits code are either “40xx” or “50xx”.

• “40xx” are the items that belong to the Adjustment Mode 0 of Service Mode. “40” stands for the Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 0, and “xx” stands for the Item Number.

• “50xx” are the items that belong to the Adjustment Mode 1 of Service Mode. “50” stands for the Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 1, and “xx” stands for the Item Number.

(Examples) 4 0 1 2 5 0 9 0 Item Number Item Number Mode No. of Adjustment Mode 0 Mode No. of Adjustment Mode 1 (2) [Name] column indicates the setting target (brief name) of each Item Number. (3) [Data] column indicates the current setting value of each Item Number. (4) [Min/Max] column indicates the selectable setting values or the changeable range.

NOTE Setting Tab covers the functions of Adjustment Modes 0/1 of Service Mode. See the following pages for the descriptions of those modes. [8.1.5 Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4)] on and after the page 8-35 [8.1.6 Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode 5)] on and after the page 8-85

K115sm8e7.doc 8-222

(1) Changing the setting value of each Item Number 1. Click the right button of mouse on any setting value ([Data] column) of requested setting item to indicate “Edit”. Click on [Edit] with left button of mouse to indicate a window for changing the setting value. Window for changing the setting value

NOTE It is recommended to save all the present setting values in Backup RAM file for safety before changing the setting value. Refer to [(2) Saving all present settings in Backup RAM file (Download)] on the page 8-224.

NOTE The following 2 ways also indicates the window for changing the setting value. (1) Double-click on the setting value ([Data] column) of requested setting item. (2) Click once on the setting value ([Data] column), and press the [Enter] Key of Keyboard.

Click the right button of mouse here to indicate [Edit].

K115sm8e7.doc 8-223

2. Change the setting value in the Edit Diagram, and click on [OK]. Example) Setting value is to be changed from “900” to “880”. 3. The 4 digits code is marked with (E) when its setting value is changed. Change other setting items in the same way if necessary. When all necessary settings are changed, click on [Upload] icon to upload new settings to KIP9000. 4. When all new settings are uploaded and become effective on KIP9000, [Complete] is indicated. Click on [OK] finally.

There are 2 ways to change the setting value.

• Select any existent setting value from the pull-down menu. • Or input the required setting value directly with keyboard.

Reference

Click on [Upload] to upload new settings to KIP9000.

Code is marked with (E) when its setting is changed.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-224

(2) Saving all present settings in Backup RAM file (Download) All present settings specified on Setting Tab (All Adjustment Mode 0/1 settings of Service Mode) can be downloaded and saved in the Backup RAM file. 1. Click on [Backup] icon.

KIP9000 will recover the previous setting values as specified on Setting Tab at the time of “Download” if Backup RAM file is “uploaded”. Therefore it is recommended to download the present settings and save them in the Backup RAM file BEFORE changing any setting of the Setting Tab. After getting the Backup RAM file, even a great customization on the Setting Tab will be safe. Refer to [(3) Uploading the Backup RAM file to KIP9000] on page 8-226 for “upload”.

Reference

K115sm8e7.doc 8-225

2. Select a save folder and give a filename for the Backup RAM file, and click on [Save]. All the present setting values specified on Setting Tab are downloaded from KIP9000 and saved in the Backup RAM file.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-226

(3) Uploading the Backup RAM file to KIP9000 A Backup RAM file can be uploaded to KIP9000 to recover all the previous setting values specified on Setting Tab at the time of “download”. Upload will be useful in the following situations.

• When some setting value is lost for some reason, and it must be recovered. • When all the setting values specified on one KIP9000 are to be copied to another KIP9000

to have completely same situation on both machines. (Download from one KIP9000 then upload to another one.)

1. Click on [Restore] icon. 2. Select a Backup RAM file (*.ram) that is to be uploaded to KIP9000, and click on [Open].

K115sm8e7.doc 8-227

3. KIP Diagnostics reads all the setting values saved in the Backup RAM file, and automatically changes the setting values on the Setting Tab according to the read values. [Complete!] is indicated when all setting values are changed according to the Backup RAM file. Setting values will change according to the setting values saved in Backup RAM file.

NOTE The KIP Diagnostics just indicates the saved settings in Backup RAM file on the screen. Note that these values are not effective on the KIP9000 yet at this stage.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-228

4. Click on [Upload] icon on the KIP Diagnostics, and click on [Yes] on the confirmation window. All the settings on Setting Tab are uploaded to KIP9000. 5. [Complete!] is indicated when all the settings are uploaded and become effective on KIP9000. Click on [OK] to finally.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-229

8. 3. 3. 4 History Tab History Tab indicates recent errors (Service Call Error) and jams with such information as error/jam code, date/time, and counter value. Clearance of the error/jam histories is also available. Error history Jam history (1) [Number] column indicates the order that the recent error/jam occurred. (Smaller value means more recently occurred error/jam) (2) [Code] column indicates either Error Code (E-00XX) or Jam Code (J-00XX). (3) [Date/Time] column indicates the date and time that the concerning error/jam occurred. (4) [Count] column indicates the counter value indicated when the concerning error/jam occurred.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

K115sm8e7.doc 8-230

(1) Clearance of error / jam histories 1. There are 2 [Clear] icons on the History Tab. The upper button in [Error History Information] section clears the error history, and another one in [Jam History Information] clears the jam history. Click on your requested [Clear] icons. Clear icons 2. The record of every error or jam is deleted. Click on [OK] when [Complete!] is indicated.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-231

8. 3. 3. 5 Upload ROM Data Tab It is possible to update the firmware by uploading the ROM file (*.rom) to the KIP9000. (ROM file is supplied from the manufacturer.) (1) Update of firmware 1. Click on [Browse] icon in the Upload ROM Data Tab.

NOTE All the current printer parameters (specified in Setting Tab of KIPDlPRO or Adjustment Mode 0/1 of Service Mode) will be maintained surely even after firmware updating. However it is strongly recommended to save the present setting values in the Backup RAM file for the safety before firmware updating.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-232

2. Select a firmware file (*.ram) that is to be uploaded to KIP9000, and click on [Open]. 3. Confirm that the filename of ROM file as well as its file path are indicated in [Filename], and then click on [Upload] icon. Click on [Yes] when a confirmation message is indicated. KIP Diagnostics starts uploading the ROM file to KIP9000. Normally uploading will take some minutes.

NOTE Firmware file (ROM file) is supplied from the manufacturer.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-233

4. Printer is restarted automatically when uploading of ROM file is finished, and [Complete!] is indicated on the application side. Click on [OK] finally.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-234

8. 3. 3. 6 Test Print Tab Internal test pattern can be printed out from KIP9000 with specifying several settings as cut length, number of print, media type and etc. (Test Print Tab covers the function of Test Print Mode of Service Mode.) (1) (2) (6) (3) (7) (4) (5) (1) Select any of 8 test patterns. (2) Select any of Roll 1, 2, 3, 4 and Bypass Feeder as the media source. (3) Select any cut lengths. (4) Specify the number of prints. Maximum number is 999. (5) Click on [Start] to start printing. If [Paper Deck] is set to “Manual Feed”, [Manual Feed Setting] area becomes changeable. (6) Select any paper widths according to the used cut sheet paper. (7) Select any of “Plain Paper”, “Tracing Paper” and “Film” according to the type of used cut sheet paper.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-235

8. 3. 4 Description of Menu Bar and Tool Bar 8. 3. 4. 1 File Save The information indicated in each tab can be saved in a text file. (Available tabs are Basic Information, Display, Setting and History.) Print The information indicated in each tab can be printed out from the Windows

Printer Driver. (Available tabs are Basic Information, Display, Setting and History.) Print Font It is possible to select a font that is to be used when the above “Print” is

performed. Exit Finished KIP Diagnostics. 8. 3. 4. 2 Setting Initialize Recovers the communication between KIP Diagnostics and KIP9000 when it

is shut off. Serial Port Specifies the communication settings between KIP Diagnostics and KIP9000. Tool Bar Tool Bar is indicated when checked.

K115sm8e7.doc 8-236

8. 3. 4. 3 Tool ROM Maker This command is always not accessible as it is not used in the field. 8. 3. 4. 4 Help Index Can search the necessary functional explanations of KIP Diagnostics by [Contents] or [Index]. About Version of KIP Diagnostics or some other information is indicated. 8. 3. 4. 5 Tool bar The function of each icon is as follows. Help Serial Port Initialize Print Save

Documents

KIP 9000 Service Manual Ver A_0